JP6019293B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as can be seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, a gaming machine is known in which a special game in which a large amount of prize balls is paid out when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is first determined whether or not there is a winning game ball at the starting port. When a game ball is won at the starting port, a lottery process for winning a jackpot is performed with a predetermined winning probability. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a special game in which a lot of prize balls are paid out to the player is performed.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the literature 1, when a lottery process for a big hit is performed, an effect is displayed by displaying an image on a predetermined display screen. As a result, the player can recognize the result of the lottery process for the jackpot according to the display mode for the effect.

JP 2004-194223 A

  However, in recent years, even the effects performed on the predetermined display screen are becoming more complicated effects in order to improve the gaming interests, for example, effects that cause the player to guess the lottery result are performed. There is also. Accordingly, there is a concern that a player who is not used to such a complicated performance will not be able to launch a game ball without noticing this even if the jackpot is won.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress the fall of a game entertainment attraction.

Means 1: lottery means for performing lottery processing based on establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Game control means for performing control related to execution of the jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the lottery processing by the lottery means ;
A game area provided so that a game ball can be divided between a left area and a right area of the center character;
A first receiving port and a second receiving port that are provided in the game area and can receive a game ball ;
The game control means includes
Despite jackpot at the lottery process by the selecting means is elected, the conjunction jackpot gaming are able to form a period that is not executed, the game balls to any one of the first receiving port and the second receiving port A non-execution period control means for allowing the jackpot game to be executed by terminating the period based on the acceptance of the game, and when the game ball is received at the first receiving port, and the second have different execution mode between when the game ball received in the receiving port and have a bonus game execution unit capable of executing the bonus game,
The gaming machine further includes
In the gaming area in which game balls can be divided between the left area and the right area of the center accessory, the game balls divided in the right area of the center accessory are taken into the internal area. Specific receiving device capable of flowing down in the internal region
With
Both the first receiving port and the second receiving port are provided in an internal area of the specific receiving device .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko game machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 11, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 13 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is AA sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is BB sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is the cross-sectional top view of the pachinko gaming machine cut | disconnected by the horizontal line of the middle (main control board box part) of the pachinko gaming machine. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the vertical direction center of the pachinko game machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is a front view which shows a game board with a movable decoration body in a normal state. It is a front view which shows a game board in the state to which the movable decoration body moved. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. FIG. 75 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 74. It is CC sectional drawing in FIG. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the exploded view of FIG. 81 from diagonally behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected and shown in the vertical direction in the state which assembled the front structural member in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 84 from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view shown from diagonally behind in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board | substrate holder for boards. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control board box in an exploded perspective view after FIG. (A) is a left side view of the center character, (B) is a front view of the center character, and (C) is a right side view of the center character. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally upper left. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally lower right. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left gate member from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the right gate member from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member on the left side from diagonally behind. FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view showing the gate member of FIG. 96 in an exploded manner. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left side winning prize opening member from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at (A) from diagonally behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the right side winning prize opening member from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at (A) from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side prize winning opening member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side winning prize opening member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a front view of a back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into the light emission decoration body, the movable decoration body, the back box, etc., and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 105 from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission decoration body from diagonally upward. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission decoration body from diagonally upward. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission decoration body from back diagonally. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the luminous decoration for every member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 110 from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the center movable decoration body from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center movable decoration body from back diagonally. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center movable decoration body and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotation mechanism of the collar part in a center movable decoration body, and was seen from diagonally forward. (A) is a perspective view which shows the moving mechanism of a center movable decoration body, (B) is a left view which shows the rotation mechanism of a center movable decoration body. It is a side view explaining the movement of the collar part of a center movable decoration body. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left side movable decoration body from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the left side movable decoration body from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side movable decoration body and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the side moving mechanism of a left side movable decoration body. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the right side movable decoration body from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the right side movable decoration body from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side movable decoration body and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the side moving mechanism of a right side movable decoration body. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the under movable decoration body from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the under movable decoration body from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the under movable decoration body and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the under movement mechanism of an under movable decoration body. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back box of the state which supported the liquid crystal display device etc. from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the back box of (A) from diagonally behind. It is the rear view which looked at the back box of FIG. 127 from the back. It is DD sectional drawing in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back box of FIG. 127 for every main member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure around the main board | substrate in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the periphery control board periphery in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st and 2nd start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of round number lottery processing. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a time chart which shows internal control according to progress of a game. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a periphery control board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically arrangement | positioning of the movable decoration body in a normal game state, (a) is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of a movement of the movable decoration body in reach development effect. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating an example of reach development effects different from FIG. 145 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the various time ranges in the reach development effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the display mode of the door symbol in the reach development effect of FIG. 146, and the operation lottery probability. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of the movable production | presentation by a movable ornament. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a jackpot game effect typically. FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example of the big hit game effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the various time ranges in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the amount of appearance of the crocodile pattern and hit | damage determination in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the haunt pattern of the first half in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the appearance pattern table selection table in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the haunt pattern selection table for the latter half in the reach development effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the various examples of the haunt pattern of the latter half in the reach development effect of FIG. FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various examples of the second half appearance pattern subsequent to FIG. 157. It is explanatory drawing which shows the winning probability selection table of the operation lottery used at the time of the special effect specification in the reach development effect of FIG. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main members which comprise game boards, such as a center accessory to which the protective cover was attached, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main members which comprise game boards, such as a center accessory to which the protective cover was attached, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory to which a protective cover is attached from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center object to which a protective cover is attached from diagonally behind. It is a figure showing the magnitude | size of the clearance gap between the side decoration member of a side movable decoration body, and the notch part of a protective cover when a side movable decoration body exists in the approach position which mutually approached. It is a figure showing the magnitude | size of the clearance gap between the side decoration member of a side movable decoration body, and the notch part of a protective cover when a side movable decoration body exists in the separation position which mutually separated. It is A arrow directional view of FIG. It is a B arrow line view of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control side reset process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control side timer interruption process. It is a front view which shows the game board concerning 2nd Embodiment in a normal state with a movable decoration body. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the movable member in a special figure gate apparatus in the gaming machine concerning 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the movable member in a special figure gate apparatus in the gaming machine concerning 2nd Embodiment. In the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram for explaining the winning type of jackpot.

(First embodiment)
[Overall structure of pachinko machines]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1, FIG. 4 is a side view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1.

  1 to 8, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be mounted with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and a game window 101 that allows a player to visually recognize the game area 101 and a lower part of the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls that are arranged and are paid out according to the result of the game.

  A lower front plate 14 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower back of the main body frame 3. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power boards for controlling electrical components are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 7) of the main body frame 3 is detachable. Is provided. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 250 and a handle device 460 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 460 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5, and the door Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 9 to 13. 9 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 13 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 11A, a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 13A, and a sectional view taken along line DD. , E-E sectional view (D).

  9 and 10, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment is a connection for connecting the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with the member 19. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the present embodiment correspond to the horizontal frame of the present invention, and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 of the present example correspond to the vertical frame of the present invention. Yes.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 and the left and right sides of the connecting member 19 are lowered by one step on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 10 are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the case of illustration. A lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 23) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main body frame 3 can be widened. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger. However, if the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 12) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (on the side where one portion of the left and right portions lowered by one step of the connecting member 19 is fitted. 9 is formed in the groove 29 of the frame plate 13. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 13B to 13D, a flat plate shape with which the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is brought into contact. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 13B, the recessed portion 30 (side) into which the hanging piece 53 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is inserted. A recess 30 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above has a hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. Also, a mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame portion 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 in the upper portion thereof, and closing the lower portion thereof. A mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 with the mounting screw 42 is formed, and a mounting hole 43 for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 67) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turning it in one direction, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are engaged with each other. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by being disconnected.

  The lower front plate 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the decorative cover plate 15 are covered with a decorative cover plate 15, and a fixing protrusion 16 (see FIG. 12) is formed on the rear surface of the decorative cover plate 15. The attachment protrusion 16 is attached to the lower front plate 14 by being passed through a fastening hole 17 that passes through the lower front plate 14. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along one upper surface of the upper support plate 45 and the lower front plate 14 that also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hole 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 25) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support hole formed in FIG. 26 is inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the clamping plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  Further, there is a hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53, and this mounting hole and the mounting hole are provided. 31 is fixed with fixing screws 32 to fix the upper support bracket 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support bracket 45. Yes.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connecting member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13, Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Even when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

(Door frame)
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the door frame 5, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame 5, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 14, 15, 18, and 19, the door frame 5 has a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 formed on the upper part of a door frame main body 100 that is formed in a square shape. A door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface, a plate unit 300 is provided on the door frame main body 100 on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and a handle is provided on one side (open side) of the plate unit 300. An operation handle portion 461 of the device 460 is fixed in a projecting manner. Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 210 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 250 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101, and a plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. The joint unit 480, the mounting base 280, and the frame decoration relay board 290 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461 are attached to the back surface of the frame. A security cover 270 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 250. Hereinafter, a more detailed structure of each of the above constituent members constituting the door plate 5 will be described.

<Door frame body>
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the door frame main body 100 is formed in a frame shape with a synthetic resin, and as described above, the vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 is formed on the upper portion, and the lower side of the gaming window 101 is It is a plate-like part. A circular speaker opening 102 that penetrates a speaker 163, which will be described later, is formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101, and a stopper 254 of a glass unit 250, which will be described later, is locked below the speaker opening 102. A stop lever 108 (see FIG. 15) is rotatably provided. Note that the gaming window 101 according to the present embodiment is attached with the gaming board 4 having larger vertical and horizontal dimensions than conventional gaming windows 101, so the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the gaming window 101 are also increased. Yes. For this reason, the shape of the door frame lens unit 120, which will be described later, is greatly different from that generally known in the art.

  On the other hand, in the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passage port 103 through which the prize ball communication rod 451 of the dish unit 300 passes is opened at the upper part on the pivot support side. A lid opening 105 for detaching 406 is opened, and a ball feeding opening 104 for mounting the ball feeding unit 287 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. Further, a lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 1010 to pass therethrough is opened closer to the open side.

  Also, a joint unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the joint unit 480 is formed on the back side of the plate-like portion below the ball feed opening 104, and glass is formed on the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the back side of the lower plate-like portion. An attachment receiving piece (not shown) for engaging the engaging protrusion 255 of the unit 250 is formed, and an attachment elastic piece 273 (to be described later) of the security cover 270 is attached to the side of the engagement receiving piece. An opening 110 is formed. In addition, an engagement protrusion 111 is formed in the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion so as to be inserted into a guide hole 456 (see FIG. 16) of the dish unit 300 described later. Further, the lower side of the door frame main body 100 is a door frame protruding piece 112 protruding rearward, and as will be described later, the door frame protruding piece 112 and engagement grooves 584 and 585 formed in the main body frame 3 Constitutes the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the structure of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. The door lens unit 120 includes a reflector having a front surface as a reflection surface, a cold cathode tube and an LED substrate attached to the front and inside of the reflector, a light-transmissive lens cover 150 covering the front of the reflector, and the lens cover 150. And a lens base body 121 serving as a base of the lens cover 150.

  In the lens cover 150, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 in the lens base body 121 are formed of a transparent resin. And since the opening dimension of the game window 101 formed in the door frame main body 100 is formed larger than before, as described above, the dimension between the outer periphery of the door frame main body 100 and the inner periphery of the game window 101. In other words, since the dimensions for attaching the lens cover 150 (particularly the dimensions of the left and right sides) are narrow, the lens cover 150 in this embodiment includes the upper lens cover 151 and the side lens cover. All of the maximum forward projecting portions of the portions 156 and 157 have a wedge-shaped cross section in which the projecting size projecting forward is larger than the base size (the width size of the portion contacting the door frame body 100). ing. More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are both formed as a white lens portion with a wedge-shaped front bulging portion formed of a synthetic resin, and the lower end portion of the white lens portion. A red lens portion formed of synthetic resin with different coloring is connected to the inside of the gaming window 101 to be bordered.

  By the way, the upper lens cover portion 151 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section with a hollow inside and opened at the rear, and is formed in a boomerang shape in a plan view. It is formed so that the distance between the cathode tube and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is reduced. An opaque leading molding member 154 colored in silver is fixed to the outer side of the wedge-shaped front end portion of the upper lens cover portion 151, and the front bulging surface having a wedge-shaped cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 151 is formed. Illuminated with an upper cold cathode tube. The side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are similar to the upper lens cover portion 151 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. The distance between the side cold cathode fluorescent tube formed in a straight line and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is smaller than that of the lens cover 151 and is formed in a boomerang shape having a gentle curve as a whole. Is formed to be close.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the reason why the cold cathode tube is used as the illumination means for decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5 is as follows. When decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5, there is a restriction that the distance between the light source and the lens cover disposed on the front surface of the light source cannot be made too large. This restriction is because the door frame 5 is always opened and closed, and if the protrusion amount is made too large, there is a possibility that the operation at the time of opening may be hindered. Thus, in a situation where the distance between the light source and the lens cover is not so large, the light decoration visible through the lens cover is continuous when the lamp or LED is scattered as the light source as in the past. The light decoration is not visible, but can only be seen as a spotted pattern with strong and weak parts. On the other hand, when a continuous cold cathode tube is used as a light emitting source as in this embodiment, even if the distance between the cold cathode tube and the lens cover 150 is short, the light decoration visible through the lens cover 150 is A beautiful light decoration in a continuous state is visible. For this reason, since the area surrounding the game board 4 is bordered by a continuous beautiful light decoration, a decoration effect not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines can be achieved. If the distance between the light source and the lens cover can be kept to some extent, light should diffuse and illuminate the entire area of the lens cover with little intensity even if scattered light sources such as LEDs are used. Can do.

  Further, a decorative member attachment region 184 is formed below the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 of the lens cover 150, and the decorative member 185 is attached to the decorative member attachment region 184. The decorative member 185 has a shape similar to the speaker cover 165 described above, and when the lens cover 150 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the impression that the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides of the lens cover 150 are balanced. It is attached to give Note that the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 described above do not simply cover the front of the speaker 163 or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 150 as described above, but the periphery thereof is light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  As described above in detail, the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 according to the present embodiment have four corners in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5 apart from the light decoration by the cold cathode tube and the LED substrate described above. Since it is configured so as to be intensively decorated with light, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be made with a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a tendency that only a speaker is conventionally arranged, and the light decoration around the speaker is not performed. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery excluding the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively light-decorated.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
The door lens unit 120 described above is attached to the front side of the door frame main body 100, and the dish unit 300 is attached below the door lens unit 120. Here, before describing the structure of the dish unit 300, the reinforcing sheet metal 210, the glass unit 250, the security cover 270, the mounting base 280, the frame decoration relay board 290, and the handle device 460 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. A description will be made sequentially. First, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19 and 15 to 17.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 is attached along the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 211 that is attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame main body 100 and the rear side of the side of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100. A pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 212, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 213 that is attached along the back of the open side of the door frame body 100, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal that is attached along the back of the lower side of the gaming window 101 of the door frame body 100. 214 are fastened with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 18, an upper shaft support portion 218 having a shaft pin 219 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 and a shaft pin 221 ( And a lower shaft support portion 220 having a structure (see FIG. 15). The upper and lower shaft pins 219 and 221 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width dimension of the door frame main body 100, and the lower long side edge of the both long side edges is bent rearward. Although it becomes the lower bending protrusion piece 229, and both sides of the upper long side edge are the upper bending protrusion pieces 230 bent backward, The sandwiched portion is a vertical bent protrusion 231 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229 is not so large, and the lower bent protrusion 229 does not engage with the groove or the recess to form the uneven engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusion 230 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229, and somewhat prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 214 is a vertical bent protrusion 231.

  The vertical bent protrusion 231 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 described later, and when the glass unit 250 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protruding piece 231 is adapted to engage with an engaging groove 261 formed along the outer periphery of substantially the center in the width direction of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 (see FIG. 17). ). The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 228 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit (transparent plate unit)>
Next, the glass unit 250 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the glass unit 250 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 251 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101, and outer peripheral front and back surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 251. It is constituted by adhering two glass plates 252 (not a glass plate or a transparent synthetic resin plate) as a transparent plate (with a hot melt adhesive). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the unit frame 251, the desiccant enclosure space part which encloses a desiccant inside is formed.

<Security cover>
Next, with respect to the crime prevention cover 270 that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 250 and is provided with a crime prevention function that prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4, mainly FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. Will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the security cover 270 is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 250 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 212 and 213 with a transparent synthetic resin, and the upper side portion thereof is the inner side of the game board 4. It is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 271 along the lower arc surface of the rail 603, and a post-crime prevention projection piece 274 protrudes rearward along the contact recess 271. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the pivot support side with the security cover 270 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 270, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 272 is projected along the lower shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 with the crime prevention cover 270 attached, and U-shaped at the lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 273 formed in a protruding manner is formed to project forward.

  The security cover 270 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 273 in the mounting opening 110 formed in the door frame main body 100. In the attached state, as shown in FIG. 17, the pre-crime projection piece 272 faces the lower rear side surface of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 272 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 231. In addition, the post-crime projection piece 274 and the post-crime end edge projection piece 275 are in a state of protruding rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the post-crime prevention projection piece 274 on the shaft support side is The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces each other, but the half of the open side of the post-crime protrusion 274 is the rail crime prevention formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is superposed along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 30). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 270 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 285 and the security space 586 described later, In addition to the crime prevention structure of the crime prevention cover 270, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from the lower side of the glass unit 250, the unauthorized access from the lower direction of the front surface of the crime prevention cover 270 is caused by the polymerization of the projection piece 272 and the unit frame 251. This prevents the post-crime protrusion 274 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component member 601 from overlapping, so that intrusion of unauthorized tools from the lower direction of the rear face of the security cover 270 is prevented. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 275. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4 by a superposed structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protruding piece 274. Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent protrusions 223 and 225 of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 213, intrusion of unauthorized tools from the obliquely lower side on the opening side of the door frame 5, rail security The concave and convex engagement between the groove 607 and the post-crime projecting piece 274 can further prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 274 and the rear end protrusion 275 on the back side of the security cover 270 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball hitting or back feeding the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 262.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 15, 18, and 19, the mounting base 280 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 270. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. This mounting base 280 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 280 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed in order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the launch rail 515 to the game board 4. For this reason, a ball flight guide surface 286 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 280. By the way, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 281 that penetrates the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 228 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 at the upper part on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is formed in the lower part of the open side to which the ball feed unit 287 is attached. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is a ball flight guide surface 286. The ball feed unit 287 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is provided with a ball feed member that swings in response to the reciprocal movement difference of a ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 by the swinging operation. Further, a lid opening 283 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 406 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 280. Further, an upright wall 284 is formed to stand vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 280. As shown in FIG. 15, the upright wall 284 is provided to restrict the lower portion of the security cover 270 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 270 when the security cover 270 is attached. is there.

  Further, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment is characterized in that the security protrusion 285 is obliquely projected from the lower side of the above-described ball flight guide surface 286 to the prize ball passage opening 281 toward the rear. It is. As described above, the security projecting piece 285 is provided between the security space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

<Frame decoration relay board>
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, a frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting base 280, and a relay board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the frame decoration relay board 290 is attached. ing. This frame decoration relay board 290 is an electrical part or electrical part provided on the door frame 5 (cold cathode tube, LED board, speaker 163, switch provided in the operation handle part 461, ball rental unit 327, operation button unit 329. Etc.) are integrated and connected, and the prize ball payout control board via the door relay board 1102 etc. incorporated in the board unit 1100 to which the wiring from the frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 It is connected to the main control board 1350 (see FIGS. 78 and 131) of the main control board box 624 attached to 1186 and the game board 4.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14, 18 and 19. The dish unit 300 is roughly divided into a unit frame 301 constituting an appearance, a lower speaker unit 340 attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, and an upper part of the lower speaker unit 340 so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301. , A second ball extraction link unit (not shown) for performing the ball extraction operation of the second ball extraction valve provided on the plate body 380, and a plate lid plate for closing the rear surface of the unit frame 301 450.

  The unit frame 301 is provided with a ball rental unit 327. The ball lending unit 327 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like when a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Further, the unit frame 301 is provided with an operation button unit 329 at the front center on the upper surface. The operation button unit 329 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) push buttons 330 a, 330 b, and 330 c, and the plurality of operation buttons 330 is a liquid crystal provided on the game board 4. It is operated when the player participates in the game content performed on the display device 640 or the like.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is provided with a first ball extraction button 316 on the right side of the upper surface of the unit frame 301, and a second part of the second ball extraction link unit is formed at the lower center of the unit frame 301. A two-ball removal button 421 is arranged. In this embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 316 and 421, which are the first ball removal button 316 and the second ball removal button 421, are provided by storing the dish body 380 by operating the first ball removal button 316. Although all the spheres stored in the portion 381 and the guide passage portion can be removed, the operation of removing the spheres takes some time to remove the spheres arranged in a line in the guide passage portion 382. On the other hand, by operating the second ball removal button 421, the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 381 of the dish body 380 can be quickly removed from the second ball extraction opening having a large diameter. Can be shortened. For this reason, it is possible to select the length of time for the player to take the ball.

  Further, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and when the game is continued by leaving it, the full tank switch 916 (see FIG. 57), the payout operation is stopped, or the ballistic operation is stopped and the game is not successful even though it is a big hit. In such a case, the second ball removal button 421 By performing the operation, the ball that is being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, and the game with a big hit can be continued.

<Handle device>
Next, the handle device 460 attached to the lower part of the door frame 5 on the open side will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19, and 20. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided on the main body frame 3. The handle device 460 is assembled to an operation handle portion 461 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side, and the back surface of the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461, and rotates according to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 461. And a joint unit 480 that cooperates with the rotating shaft 465 and changes the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 465 into a slide motion.

  Although not shown, the handle device 460 is a micro switch that is turned on when the operation handle portion 461 is rotated, and a single button that turns off the micro switch when the micro switch is turned on. And a touch sensor for detecting contact of the player with the operation handle portion 461 through conductive plating applied to the outer peripheral surface of the operation handle portion 461. Then, when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461, the microswitch is turned ON and the touch sensor detects contact, a later-described launch motor 695 (see FIG. 37) of the hitting ball launcher 650 is rotationally driven. It has become so. In addition, a cam formed in the shape of a ball is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465, and the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 moves in the left-right direction by rotating this cam. .

  As shown in FIG. 20, the sliding movement of the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the hitting ball launching device 650, and the tension of the biasing spring 684 (see FIG. 37) of the hitting ball launching device 650 is increased. By adjusting, the strength of the urging force of the hitting ball rod 687 can be adjusted to obtain the ball hitting force desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

[Body frame]
Next, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for discharging a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, a ball path unit 770, and a prize ball unit 800. (Corresponding to the payout unit of the present invention), the full unit 900, the locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 And various components such as a board unit 1100 in which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 are collectively provided, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580. The main body frame 3 constructed by mounting the main body frame 500 on the main body frame main body 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. FIG. 21 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components, FIG. 22 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components, and FIG. 23 is a main body frame main body before attaching the components. FIG. 24 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 with the components attached. 26 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 27 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 29 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional plan view of a pachinko gaming machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine 1 (main control board box 624 portion). is there.

  In FIG. 21, an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 (both see FIG. 25) for attaching and closing the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are mounted on one side of the body frame main body 500. In the state where the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502 are formed and the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502, the upper side and the side side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. Is substantially coplanar with the upper and side sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and side sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially coplanar with the lower and side sides of the lower shaft support 509 (FIG. 27). reference). Here, the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 27. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side. On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 220 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the door support plate 507 is provided with the lower shaft support portion 220 of the door frame 5. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 221 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 25) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 211 attached and fixed to the rear side of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 215 and 216 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 223 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 225 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 217 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact. Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 212 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 217 also functions sufficiently, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 is formed for passing through a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 67) provided on a lock device 1000 (described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 and projecting forward. A board positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projecting piece 217 of the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 212 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the board positioning projection 576 on the side side of the front pivot side is slightly lower. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side plane portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate part 511 is a game board placement part 512 for placing the game board 4, and the game board 4 is placed on the placement part 512 in the approximate center of the game board placement part 512. A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 30) formed in the game board 4 when placed. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end on the open side at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 25) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. The connecting passage 609 (see FIG. 30), which is the downstream end of 603, is adjacent. In addition, at the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515), the upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 25) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is provided. A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is projected, and a stopper 518 is projected diagonally below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512 to play the game. The board fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 41) that is associated with the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the connecting window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 37) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through-hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward. Is provided with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 22, a ball discharge passage 524 that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then goes downward is formed. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 25), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. Further, a cylindrical guide projection 525 protrudes rearward above the launching device mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 73) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is inserted into the guide projection 525. This facilitates the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Further, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are associated with the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is protruded rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with a ball extraction connection opening 530 that is an opening at the upstream end of the ball extraction discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. Yes. A downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting a full unit 900 (see FIG. 25), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with the engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 57) of the full unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided. Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. Also, as shown in FIG. 25, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided rearward from the inner side surface on the shaft support side and the upper side portion and the open side surface portion described above, and is provided rearward from the first side wall 540. A second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 circumferentially provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 circumferentially provided rearward from the third side wall 542, The body frame 3 is formed in a concave shape in which the left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are surrounded. The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 29) that is inclined inwardly from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done. At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is performed using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 63) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively. In this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided at 4 are accommodated. In other words, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the back of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 toward the rear substantially in parallel with the first side wall 540 and is provided on the game board 4. It constitutes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720. Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 21), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is like that. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be attached. Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 if there is a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even in the case where a gaming device in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the gaming board 4 is attached, The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  In addition, the 1st side wall 540 in this embodiment is corresponded to the front side wall of this invention, and the 2nd side wall of this example, the 3rd side wall, and the 4th side wall are the back side wall of this invention. It corresponds.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. The middle and lower three places are opened, and the upper and lower door hook holes 549 are further above, below, and below, the lock locking holes 548 with which the locking protrusions 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 are engaged (see FIG. 22). Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 22) for performing the attachment with a screw is an upper part of the rear end portion of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only at the upper and middle positions, but also at a screw mounting portion 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole formed near the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing 547 to 547 with screws.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 5). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 45) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. Further, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is provided at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top. When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pushed backward, and then the tank rail member is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. What is necessary is just to lift 740 upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground connector 207 is attached to the inside of the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, vertical support walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the support-side rear wall 546 on the support-supporting rear wall 546, and a spherical passage unit is provided between the stand-up walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The prize ball guiding projection 561 is projected rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that its projecting height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 50) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 50). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 52) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 52) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 52) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A relief hole 566 is formed to receive the end. A payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 25). The prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the engaging groove 573 formed at the lowermost lower end of the rear surface of the shaft supporting side rear wall 546 and is supported by the engaging protrusion 565 and the locking elastic claw 564. The rear wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which an open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546. A locking wall 569 protrudes downward. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIG. 28) of the cover body 1250, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are aligned and fixed with screws (not shown). Thus, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 that is U-shaped in plan view. By passing through the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 28) and, for example, hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570, only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250. You can make it impossible.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 21) are formed into which the door frame protrusions 112 and 113 (see FIG. 19) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame main body 100 bent rearward. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described firing device mounting portion 520, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 112 corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 113 corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 112 with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protrusions 112 and 113 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engagement portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 280 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has the door frame 5 in a closed state. A security protrusion 285 that enters 586 is formed. The security protrusion 285 is formed on the mounting base 280 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention projection piece 285 protruding from the mounting base 280. The security projection piece 285 and the security space 586 constitute an inner ridge and engagement portion in the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

<Schematic configuration of game board>
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35. 30 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 32 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. FIG. 34 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 35 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG.

  In FIG. 30, the game board 4 includes a substantially square panel holder 600 holding a transparent plate-like game panel 599, and a front component member 601 attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600 so as to surround the game area 605. It is configured. On the surface of the game panel 599, various game devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. Then, after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600, and the front component 601 has a circular hollow inside so as to surround the game panel 599. And the outer shape is formed in the shape of the outer shape of the panel holder 600, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 that is connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at a starting end portion thereof, and is formed adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609 with a foul. A mouth 610 is formed. A metal rail is attached in close contact with the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stopper 620. The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. As described above, the security projection 608 overlaps with the rear end projection 275 of the security cover 270 protruding from the security cover 270 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed. It prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 274 protruding from the security cover 270 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime protrusion piece 274, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is overlapped in the vertical direction. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to fit in the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and is formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the game board 4 is entirely inserted after the positioning recess 611 is inserted from the front side of the main body frame 3 in an oblique direction so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576. Is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is in a free state in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  By the way, the game board 4 in this embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 34, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the game board 4 in the front and rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the game board 4 (exactly). Is formed with a mounting notch 616 in the front component 601.), and a fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a belt groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 35). ).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 has speaker cutouts 612 formed on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to receive the rear protruding portions of the speakers 163 provided on the back surface of the door frame 5, and the side of the foul mouth 610. A notch portion 613 for passage into which a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted is formed obliquely below. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for applying a certificate check certificate is provided.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, a winning is obtained by aligning and guiding the balls won in various gaming devices provided in the gaming area 605 (for example, a winning opening such as a big winning opening device or a general winning opening) on the downstream side. A space forming cover body 621 (hereinafter referred to as a back box 2002) is attached, and a liquid crystal display device 640 serving as a display device disposed almost at the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the winning space forming cover body 621 (FIG. A liquid crystal display control board box 622 is attached as a display control board box in which a liquid crystal control board 2612 (see FIG. 132) for controlling the display of the display control screen is controlled. The liquid crystal display board box 622 also stores a peripheral control board 2600 (see FIG. 132) described later, and the peripheral control board 2600 and the liquid crystal control board 2612 are electrically connected by a board connector. It has become.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back side of the game board 4 below the winning space forming cover body 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space portion (a width of the space portion in the front-rear direction is the width of the winning space forming cover body 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the winning space forming cover body 621 in the front thereof. The drop port 629 (see FIG. 29) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 73) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later. Further, the board substrate holder 623 is connected to the main control board box 624 for storing the main control board 1350 for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof, and a payout control board 1186 and a power supply board provided in the board unit 1100 described later. And a relay terminal plate 625 for mounting. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3. The board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joining guide protrusion 628 that protrudes rearward so as to pass through the relay terminal plate 625 from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 73). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

<Hitball launcher>
The ball striking device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 is a perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball launcher 650, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor part removed, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 39 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 461 is not operated. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 461 is operated. 41 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), a front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball striking device 650, and a cross-sectional view A-A in the front view (B). It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651, and attaches a shot motor 695 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape by a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper portion and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed. The slide guide hole 655 is used for guiding a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from the upper rear end of the slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

  Further, a hook portion is formed with respect to the main body of the launch base frame 651 at a front portion of the upper side of the launch base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. ing. The operating piece opening 657 abuts on a supply swing piece 289 (see FIG. 15) provided facing a hitting ball supply port 288 (see FIG. 15) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The operating piece 658 is swingably provided by a stop pin 659 on a mounting portion 660 protruding from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the operating piece opening 657. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided to project, and the upper side portion swings the supply swing piece 289 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. Balls flowing out from the supply port 288 are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 515.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. In addition, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a projecting manner to slide the slide rod 677 to the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. Has been.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hitting ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. For this reason, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, 668, 669 corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, the respective through holes 666 to 671 have the members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663 corresponding thereto. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 37, the swing piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, the shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. A connecting hole 674 having a shape is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with an operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 on the front back surface side thereof, and the front front surface of the base plate 690 is used to latch the locking ring 686 on the other end of the biasing spring 684. A spring locking portion 692 is provided in a projecting manner, and a motor contact projecting piece 691 that engages with and disengages the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is provided in a projecting manner on the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion to attach the motor. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 formed integrally with an attaching portion in which an attachment fixing hole 699 for attaching to the boss 661 is formed. 697 is fixed. A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698. The reverse rotation prevention cam 698 is engaged with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 39) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. Prevents reverse rotation. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor contact protrusion 691 mesh with each other and the ball hitting device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion piece 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the main configuration of the hit ball launching device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  Incidentally, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moved is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open as shown in FIG. 41, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted. Thus, the insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes inward from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface slightly toward the rear of the first inclined surface 715. A sandwiching piece 716 is formed and provided with a predetermined interval between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state in which the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 41B, one end side of the slide protrusion 492 on the inclined side 493 side contacts the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above has an elliptical shape formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. The insertion space 714 faces the connection opening 664, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. Although they are shown in contact with each other in a normal state, they are in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 has a right position at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 38A). 39, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 39) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the left inner wall in FIG. 38A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 40) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide in the slide member storage space 656 of the slide member 710.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience of the hitting ball launching device 650. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 483 of the joint unit 480 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 464. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 is rotated, the slanting cam 466 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 480 483 slides and moves in one direction inside the storage body 481. For this reason, the slide protrusion 492 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 483 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 of the slide body 483 penetrates the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 493 side of the sliding protrusion 492 is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Accordingly, when the slide protrusion 492 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, the ball striking force of the ball striking device 650 can be adjusted by rotating the rotation operation member 464 of the handle device 460.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 460 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 of the handle device 460 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 492 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 460. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 460 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 can be linked / separated with the opening / closing of the door frame 5 very easily. In particular, when the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 that protrudes into the insertion space 714 even if the position of the slide protrusion 492 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction. The slide projection 492 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protrusion 492 is simply separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide protrusion 492 is not limited. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 493 of the sliding protrusion 492 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 492 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can cooperate with each other regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461. It is.

<Prize ball tank>
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 24) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 that is inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 that is inclined from the front wall 721 toward a discharge port 730 described below. In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720, the main body frame 3 is provided. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the fourth side wall 543 project, and a ball leveling member 744, which will be described later, is attached to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. The ball leveling attachment shaft 735 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed on and attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. The portion 728 communicates with the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 5, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described below. ing. Accordingly, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to the 4th side wall 543, and it is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543. Thus, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are formed deep so as to cover the rearward projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, and therefore the side wall 541 thereof. Although the depth of the storage part of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of ˜543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Since the entirety of 720 is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without deformation of the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a plan view showing the pressure state of a sphere at the discharge port portion between the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 43, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the outlets 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure. For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, and the sphere may be clogged. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

<Tank rail member>
The tank rail member 740 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 24) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by the partition wall 741 as shown in FIG. The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. In addition, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 22). Yes. For this reason, the static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the passages 742 in the two rows of the tank rail members 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step. Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
A ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the winning ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 51. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 49 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 50 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 51 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. 48 and 49, the prize ball unit 800 portion is a drawing of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841 and the unit sub plate 825 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface of a substantially rectangular plate (the surface seen from the back surface is referred to as the front surface). As shown in FIG. 46A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. It consists of a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in the left and right direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and having a substantially vertical shape. As shown in FIG. 46A, the front / rear bent passage portion 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 is the main body frame. 3 is positioned away from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 and the pivot support side rear wall 546 to the rear side, so that the winning ball guiding projections projecting from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the pivot support rear wall 546 are provided. 561 and the ball dropping passage 772 are bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending. Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped. A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 inserts a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 to prevent clogging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 when it is difficult to swing the ball breakage detection piece 776 due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball path unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is also formed in the passage unit mounting boss formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546. 562. Thus, to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the passage unit attachment boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end portion of the ball dropping passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 51B). The state shown in FIG. 51) and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball dropping passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 51A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, the ball path unit 770 is fixed to the pivot support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the pivot support side rear wall 546 as will be described later (FIG. 51 ( In the state shown in A), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit By connecting the 800 bent passages 803 with the passage wall 790, a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

<Prize ball unit>
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. 52 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 53 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 55 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  52, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and the unit base body. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of 801, a relay board 830 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a gear provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface region) of the unit sub-plate 825; It comprises a group 843, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 801 from the lower portion of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of the bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end. That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is housed and fixed in a motor housing space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Is done. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of the spheres staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface of the. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  In the distribution space 805, a sprocket 807 serving as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof A payout ball detection sensor 812 is detachably mounted. The payout ball detection sensor 812 is a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the tip, and a bent passage wall 802 includes a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end. By forming, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 812 is connected to a relay board 830 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed. In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted from the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 includes a guide protrusion 819. The guided ball is guided to a ball disconnection passage 880 to be described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided. The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801 and is attached with a rod-like detachable button 822 slidably in the depth width direction. It corresponds to the lock elastic claw 564 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed. Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub-plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. A relay board region 826 for attaching the relay board 830 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, and a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847 and detection are formed below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which the disk 850 is attached is formed. The relay substrate region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay substrate 830 are provided along the square shape, and a substrate cover 835 (described later) is provided above and below one side of the side. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with the mating protrusion 836 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking projection 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Further, the relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and an attachment boss part 832 for fixing the relay board 830 with screws (not shown).

  The relay board 830 attached to the relay board area 826 described above includes wiring from the above-described payout ball detection sensor 812, payout motor 815, and sensor 855 described later provided in the prize ball unit 800, and a payout control board 1186 (described below). 25 and 72), a plurality of connectors are provided for this purpose, and a button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and a mounting hole 831 corresponding to the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. And are drilled. Thus, the relay board 830 is mounted on the mounting rib 827 in the relay board area 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). It can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the plate 825.

  Further, the relay board 830 attached as described above is covered with a board cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front side open, and an engagement projection 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. Further, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The relay substrate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and is formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. A shaft 845, the other end of which is supported in the shaft hole 846, is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 844, a third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is a unit sub-plate. A shaft 848 press-fitted in a shaft hole 849 formed in 825 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807. . As shown in FIG. 55, the tip of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 55, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Accordingly, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the case of illustration). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. The detection notch 851 is detected by a light emitting / receiving sensor 855 (rotational position detecting means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. . The sensor 855 monitors whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). It is. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 55, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 covering the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the base unit body 451 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, there is a wiring processing piece 869 that hangs and collects wiring connected to the relay board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the relay board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later). Projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub-plate 825, the relay board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, as shown in FIG. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be extracted is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage. In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 has a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 formed in a single passage shape, so Thinning is achieved. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 is protruded to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. 55, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. Further, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  In addition, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824, the engagement protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be. That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

<Full tank unit>
The full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62. 56 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 58 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 59 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 60 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  The full unit 900 is placed and fixed on the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above. As shown in FIG. 58, the full unit is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that a sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  Further, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed forward, and the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920 forms the above-described dish unit 300. Guided to prize ball contact 451.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface, and the bottom surface swing plate 907 is closed so that the bottom surface swinging plate 907 can swing. ing. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is semi-circularly supported by being fitted to the shaft support protrusion 911 when viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A bearing portion 908 is formed to project. Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 protrudes downward from the center of the back surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 60, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed such that the foul ball entrance 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 451 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 includes engaging pieces that are engaged with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching projection 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed along with a projection 924. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened in the passage 902 at a position corresponding to the upstream end. Further, around the lid 926, a latching piece 928 for engaging with the latching projection 925 of the box main body 901 projects downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 56, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the side guide passage 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The sphere colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920, and the front guide passage 920. From the exit 921 through the prize ball communication rod 451 to the dish unit 300. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball contact hole 451 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of normal prize balls is paid out, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock, and the detection protrusion 909 is a light projecting / receiving method as shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the biasing force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment is detachably attached to the full tank unit placement portion 531 of the main body frame 3, so that the full tank device is attached to the main body frame as in the past. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the formed dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

<Lock device>
Next, the lock device 1000 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 64 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a latching structure of the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 66 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 66 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 67 is an enlarged sectional view, FIG. 67 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 68 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. ) Are perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000. FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Is a front view for explaining the operation of the body frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 71 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding frame 1040 for the main body, the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame cannot be illegally slid. The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 are attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, since the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely increased and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the side walls 540 and the main body frame 3 are The mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width dimension of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the size between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. Further, a screw fixing portion 1003 protrudes in the horizontal direction at the upper part and the middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 69) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, and further, the side surface 1001a (not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side) A locking projection 1004 is formed in a protruding manner at the upper end and middle portion of FIG. Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward ( In this state, since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. be able to. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 for positioning and locking, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure. In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to the frame 3. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock attaching piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 protrudes laterally, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 are provided on the side face 1001 b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 is arranged so that the lock attachment piece 1008 is positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are drilled in two places at the top and bottom, and screw stoppers 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are drilled. The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock attachment substrate 1011, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is the lock attachment substrate. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has an attachment hole 1013 and a lock attachment piece 1008 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011 by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 1009. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rods 1040 and the body frame sliding rods 1050, the lowermost insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, a slanting portion 1024 is an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 71B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on the outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restricting protruding piece 1031 protruding below the stopper piece 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped body. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 227 (see FIG. 15) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked with each other by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  In addition, a vertically long rivet hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet for the rivet long hole 1042 is formed. A guide projection 1043 is provided below the elongated hole 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling. Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. A clearance notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is passed through the rivet slot 1055, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001, and the upper hook member 1051 is smoothly moved without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the lower engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper and lower sides are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005. At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  With the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 is regulated. The state is in contact with the projecting piece 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While inserting into the hook hole 549, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hooked state of the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened. When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the slope is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side slope portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is hooked to the hook cover 227 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, and finally the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from there is performed. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 71 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame provided inside is used. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 close the closed space of the unauthorized tool. Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, a main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed. Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

<Board unit>
Next, the substrate unit 1100 that is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. 72 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the front side.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 22 and 24) formed in the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in the figure, the frame unit is made of synthetic resin. The board holder 1101 is configured by attaching various boards such as a door relay board, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay board. Among the above boards, the door relay board, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 in the front-rear direction, and are attached to the main drawer relay board. The auxiliary drawer relay board is attached to the front side of the frame board holder 1101. A shield plate is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from a power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board and the sub drawer relay board are covered with a board cover 1109. Attached.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in the drawing, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side. A recess for a relay board for attaching the door relay board to the door is formed. At both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment hole portions of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to 527 (see FIG. 22). As shown in FIG. 24, the attachment hole 527 is formed with an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Furthermore, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 73) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  Further, an out-sphere passage 1119 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. The out ball passage 1119 is formed broadly at the upper side so as to correspond to the out port 606 (see FIG. 31), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 22), and the drop port 629 (see FIG. 29). The downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 25, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  The board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board. A rectangular connector opening for projecting outward is formed.

  The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body to which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board is fixed, and a cover body that is attached to the box main body and covers the surface of the payout control board. One side of the box main body and the cover body are engaged, and the other side is caulked and fixed by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body and the cover body, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act.

<Cover body>
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 24, and 28. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1283, the standing wall 1284, the contact protrusion 1285, and the reinforcing rib 1286 of the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment. Have the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are aligned and fixed with screws (not shown), whereby the main body frame 3 is secured by the cover body 1250. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

<Detailed configuration of game board>
A detailed configuration of the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 82. FIG. 74 is a front view showing the game board with the movable decorative body in a normal state, and FIG. 75 is a front view showing the game board with the movable decorative body movable. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from an oblique front, FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from an oblique rear, and FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 74, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 74, and FIG. 81 is an exploded front view for each main member constituting the game board. FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. 81 viewed obliquely from behind.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a player operates a control ball 461 as a game ball (simply “ A frame-shaped front component member 601 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which the game area 605 is to be driven, and a transparent plate-like game that is disposed so as to close the game area 605 behind the front component member 601 A panel 599, a frame-like panel holder 600 that covers the outer periphery of the gaming panel 599 and holds the gaming panel 599 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear side of the front component 601; A rear unit 2000, a liquid crystal display device 640 as an effect display means arranged on the rear side of the back unit 2000 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a panel A board substrate holder 623 which is fixed to the rear side of the rudder 600 and covers the lower part of the back unit 200 and the liquid crystal display device 640, and the main control board box 624 is fixed to the rear side, and a symbol display device arranged on the front component 601. 1800.

  A game panel 599 in the game board 4 is arranged at the center of the game area 605 in the left-right direction below the center accessory 1400 and above the out port 606. An attacking unit 1500, a general-purpose gate 1600 arranged in the game area 605 on both the left and right sides of the center accessory 1400 and allowing a game ball to pass therethrough, and substantially on the outer periphery of the game area 605 on the left and right sides of the attacker unit 1500. And the side prize opening member 1700 arranged along the upper left shoulder of the center accessory 1400 (specifically, a path through which a game ball launched toward the left side of the center accessory 1400 can always pass). Special figure gate A1900 and the shoulder on the upper right side of the center accessory 1400 (specifically, fired toward the right side of the center accessory 1400) A special symbol gate B1910 that game balls are disposed always route can pass) supports the front side.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 of the game board 4 has a warp inlet 1402 that allows a game ball flowing down the game area 605 to enter the left and right outer peripheral surfaces, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 1402 to the inside of the frame. A warp passage 1404 for guiding, and a stage 1406 capable of being released into the game area 605 below the center accessory 1400 after rolling the game ball flowing through the warp passage 1404 in the left-right direction.

  Also, the attacker unit 1500 of the game board 4 includes a first start port 1502 that is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and is opened upward so that a game ball can be always won (received), and a first start port 1502 A second starting port 1506 that changes between a state in which a game ball can be won and a state in which it cannot be won by a pair of movable pieces 1504 that are disposed on the lower side and can be opened and closed, and a second starting port 1506 that is disposed below the second starting port 1506. A large winning opening 1510 is provided that changes between a state in which a game ball can be won and a state in which no winning can be achieved by opening and closing an opening / closing member 1508 that extends in the left-right direction from the start port 1506.

  Further, the side prize port member 1700 of the game board 4 has two general prize ports 1702, which are arranged at positions separated by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and are opened upward so as to be able to always receive game balls. I have.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the symbol display device 1800 of the game board 4 is disposed outside the game area 605 and below the front component 601 on the right side of the out port 606. A first special symbol display 1802 that is variably displayed in response to a winning of a game ball to 1502; a second special symbol display 1804 that is variably displayed in response to a winning of a gaming ball in the second start port 1506; A normal symbol display 1806, which starts displaying a variation when a game ball passes through the general gate 1600, and the first start port 1502 while the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804 are displaying the variation. The first special symbol memory number display 1808, the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804 for displaying the number of memories for which the start of the variable display is suspended when the game ball wins The second special symbol memory number display 1810 and the normal symbol display unit 1806 are displaying the fluctuation when the game ball wins the second starting port 1506 during the dynamic display, and the normal symbol display 1806 that displays the number of memories for which the start of the fluctuation display is suspended. A normal symbol memory number display 1812 for displaying the number of memories for which the start of variation display is suspended when a game ball passes through the general gate 1600, and a status indicator 1816 for indicating the internal control state of the main control board 1350; It has.

  The first special symbol indicator 1802 and the second special symbol indicator 1804 of the symbol display device 1800 are each composed of a 7-segment LED, and the first start port 1502 and the second start port 1506 are selected depending on the combination of the segments. The result of the success / failure determination process for the special symbol acquired by the start winning prize is suggested. Specifically, the special symbol variation display is started by the 7-segment LED based on the start prize at the first starting port 1502 and the second starting port 1506, and after a predetermined period (first special symbol variation pattern selecting means). 7 segments after the change display of the special symbol is stopped at the elapse of the variation time according to the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 2574 A predetermined mode is displayed on the LED. Further, the normal symbol display 1806 is composed of LEDs that can emit light in two colors (red and green in this example), and a normal lottery result in which a game ball is drawn by passing through the normal gate 1600. Is suggested by the emission color. When the game ball passes through the normal map gate 1600 and the normal symbol display 1806 emits light in a color (for example, green) that suggests hitting, the pair of movable pieces 1504 that close the second start port 1506 has a predetermined time ( For example, 0.5 seconds), the game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 1506.

  The first special symbol memory number indicator 1808, the second special symbol memory number indicator 1810, and the normal symbol memory number indicator 1812 are each composed of two LEDs, and combinations of lighting and blinking of each LED. Indicates the number of memories reserved (for example, a maximum of four).

  In addition, the symbol display device 1800 includes a round in which the opening / closing member 1508 is continuously operated in the “hit game”, separately from the first special symbol memory number display 1808 and the second special symbol memory number indicator 1810. A round indicator 1814 for displaying the number is further provided. Note that the “hit game” is a game in which the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 as an accessory operates continuously until reaching a predetermined number of rounds, and the opening / closing member 1508 opens / closes to win a big prize. The game ball can be easily won in the mouth 1510. When a game ball wins the big prize opening 1510, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball by the prize ball payout control board 1186. The number of rounds in which the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 continuously operates during the “hit game” will be described in detail later, but the first special symbol acquired based on the start winning to the first start port 1502 will be described later. Randomness for success / failure determination (hereinafter referred to as “first special random number”) and randomness for determination of success / failure of the second special symbol acquired based on the start winning at the second start port 1506 (hereinafter referred to as “second special random number”). As a result of the success / failure determination process (hereinafter referred to as “special lottery result”), the condition device is activated, and after the condition device is activated, either the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 is selected. This is determined based on whether the game ball has passed. The round indicator 1814 includes three LEDs, and displays “per 4R (round)”, “per 8R (round)”, or “per 15R (round)” depending on the position of the LED to be lit. Be able to.

  In this embodiment, the average number of winning balls that can be paid out to a player per round is the same for all of “per 4R”, “per 8R”, and “per 15R”. In other words, regardless of whether “per 4R”, “per 8R”, or “per 15R” (regardless of the type of hit), the operation of the attacker unit 1500 (specifically, the opening / closing member 1508) as one round The aspect is the same. The operation mode of the attacker unit 1500 as one round is preset according to the maximum operation time and the maximum number of winnings. The attacker unit 1500 receives the maximum prize when the operation (opening) time of the attacker unit (specifically, the opening / closing member 1508) reaches the maximum operational time and when the attacker unit (specifically, the big prize opening 1510) reaches the maximum. When one of the winning numbers is met, the operation as one round is completed.

  Furthermore, the symbol display device 1800 is provided with a status indicator 1816. When the probability changing function is activated, the symbol display device 1800 is lit in red, for example, and the jackpot game is being executed even though the condition device is activated. If it is not a special state, which will be described later, for example, it lights in green. However, when the gaming state is a concealment state, the gaming state is concealed without lighting in red even if the probability changing function is activated. Since it is not kept secret as to whether or not it is in a special state, it is always lit in green if the condition device is operating.

  Although a part of the game board 4 is not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 599. Further, the game panel 599 has a transparent plate shape so that the rear side of the game panel 599 can be visually recognized from the player side. The game panel 599 has a plurality of openings 599e (see FIG. 84, FIG. 85, etc.) penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a predetermined inner peripheral shape, and corresponding to these openings 599e, A center accessory 1400, an attacker unit 1500, a general gate 1600, a side prize opening member 1700, a special gate A1900, and a special gate B 1910 are fixed to the game panel 599 from the front side.

  The back unit 2000 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 599 in the game board 4 includes a back box 2002 that supports the liquid crystal display device 640 at a position away from the game panel 599 by a predetermined distance as shown in the figure. In the housing space 2010 formed by the annular plate-shaped light emitting decorative body 2004 supported at the front end of the back box 2002 so as to be close to the rear surface of the game panel 599, the light emitting decorative body 2004 and the liquid crystal display device 640. A movable decorative body 2006 that is arranged and moves in the back box 2002 is provided. The light emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006 of the back unit 2000 are visible from the player side through the transparent portion of the game panel 599, the opening 599e, and the like. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a characteristic appearance not seen in the conventional pachinko machines in which the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 can be seen on the rear side of the game panel 599, that is, on the rear side of the game area 605. It has become different from other pachinko machines and can attract players' interest.

  Although the detailed configuration of the movable decorative body 2006 in the back unit 2000 will be described later, the movable decorative body 2006 is disposed on the upper front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, is movable in the left-right direction, and strikes the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. A center movable decorative body 2200 having a movable flange 2202, a side movable decorative body 2300 which is disposed on the left and right front surfaces of the liquid crystal display device 640 and is movable in the left and right directions, and a lower front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 And an under movable decorative body 2400 that can be moved up and down on the display screen. The side movable decorative body 2300 can be positioned in an approach position close to each other and a separation position separated from each other by moving in the left-right direction, and a game on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 The viewing range visible from the person side can be narrowed or widened, and the viewing range of the display screen can be widened by moving from the proximity position to the separation position (FIG. 74 and FIG. 75). In the approach position where the side movable decorative bodies 2300 approach each other, the origin position of the side decorative member 2302 (see FIG. 118) of the left side movable decorative body 2300L becomes the origin position, and the side decorative member 2302 (see FIG. 121).

[Game panel holding structure on the game board]
A holding structure of the game panel 599 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a front component member, a game panel, and a panel holder in the gaming board in a longitudinal direction in an assembled state, and FIG. 84 is a front component member mainly constituting the game board. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the panel, the panel holder, etc., exploded and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 84 viewed from diagonally backward.

  As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 599 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 599 from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 600, and an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 for guiding the game ball into the game area 605 and defining the outer periphery of the game area 605 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 600. It mainly includes a front structural member 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600.

  As shown in the figure, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning protrusion 601b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 600, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 599 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 599 in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin or the like. . The game panel 599 is thinner than the panel holder 600 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when an obstacle nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 599 has a plurality of fitting holes 599a formed by round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 599b extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with respect to the panel holder 600. In addition, the game panel 599 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 599c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 599c is formed by cutting out approximately half of the board thickness of the game panel 599, and is disposed outside the game area 605 in the same manner as the fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b. This is for engaging and fixing the game panel 599 to the panel holder 600.

  The game panel 599 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 599d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 599b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 599d.

  Further, the game panel 599 is provided with a center shape 1400, an attacker unit 1500, a general gate 1600, a side prize opening member 1700, a special gate A1900, a special gate B1910, etc. A plurality of openings 599e penetrating in the direction are formed, and fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions.

  The panel holder 600 in the game board 5 has a size that includes the game panel 599 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape. It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (in this example, about 20 mm). The panel holder 600 includes a holding step portion 600a that holds the game panel 599 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side. It mainly includes a through-hole 600b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 599. It is designed to be almost the same surface. Further, the holding step portion 600a has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance C is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 599. With this clearance C, even if the game panel 599 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed (see FIG. 79). An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b formed in the game panel 599 held by the holding step portion 600a, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 599a. A plurality of protruding pins 599c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 599a and the long holes 599b of the game panel 599 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 600c into the fitting holes 599a and the long holes 599b of the game panel 599, the panel holder 600 and the game panel 599 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with an engaging claw 600d and an engaging piece 600e that engage with the engaging step portion 599c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 599c of the game panel 599. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the engaging claw 600 d is disposed on the upper holding step portion 600 a of the panel holder 600 and corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 599 c of the game panel 599. The holding step portion 600a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 599c. The engaging claw 600d has such a size that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 600. On the other hand, the engagement piece 600e is disposed on the lower holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 599c of the game panel 599, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 600a. In a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 599c of the panel 599 to be inserted is formed, the panel 599 is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 600. By engaging the engagement step portion 599c of the game panel 599 with the engagement claws 600d and the engagement piece 600e, the game panel 599 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 600.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with a boss insertion hole 600f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component member 601 can be inserted. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 600 and the front structural member 601 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 and 85, the panel holder 600 has a mounting support portion 600g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. Is provided. With this mounting support portion 600g, the rear surface of the panel holder 600 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height and the rear outer peripheral portion protrudes rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth is about 2 in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 2018 (see FIG. 127A, etc.) of the back box 2002 in the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 600g. 0.5 mm, and preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By fixing and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 600g, the fixing portion 2018 can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 600, and the panel holder 600, that is, the game board 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1 The game board can be securely installed in the game board installation recess 510.

  In addition, the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 600g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back body 635. The storage recess 600h is further provided with a locking portion 600i that is disposed so as to penetrate the storage recess 600h in the front-rear direction and that can lock the locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 202h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 600i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. It is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 600.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 83 and 85, the panel holder 600 has a plurality of mounting holes 600j that are arranged in the mounting support portion 600g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recessed portion 600h and into which a predetermined screw can be screwed. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 600k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 600j. In the positioning hole 600k, a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion 2022 formed on the fixing portion 2018 of the back box 2002) formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 600j is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 600k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that the mounting hole 600j has an inner diameter of a large diameter and a small diameter mixed so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 600j may be used.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 600 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 600l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 600 is reduced by the thinned portions 600l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 84, these thinning portions 600l are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 600h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 600 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 600 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface thereof becomes a substantially flat surface, and the ball hitting device 650 The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 600 is formed with a thinned portion 600l so that the mounting holes 600j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 600. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 600 is formed with a positioning unit 600m corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 599 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 600, an opening 600n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 600o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 so as to cover the thinned portion 600l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing recess 600h of the panel holder 600 are arranged with each other. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. The positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 600i of the panel holder 600, and a concave portion 635d for reducing the amount so as not to penetrate from the front side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 600j and the positioning hole 600k in the panel holder 600. Similarly to the panel holder 600, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports or supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 600n of the panel holder 600, the communication hole 600o, and the boss insertion hole 600f.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 600h of the panel holder 600, and the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 600i of the panel holder 600, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 600. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 600. By integrating the panel holder 600 and the panel back plate 635 in this manner, the mounting holes 600j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 600b over substantially the entire circumference. A mounting hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 600k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these mounting holes allows a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the game panel 599 in the present example, the game panel 599 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600 from the front, and the engaging claw 600d and the engaging piece 600e, By engaging the engagement step portion 599c, the panel holder 600 can hold the game panel 599, and the front side of the game panel 599 and the panel holder 600 are substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set the game panel 599 in the state where the game panel 599 is held in the panel holder 600 without modifying the used obstacle nail planting device, and to install the obstacle nail planting device. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 599, the panel holder 600, and the front component member 601, the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes, etc. are determined depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing game panel 599 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 600 and the front component 601 can be used as common parts. The panel holder 600, the front component 601 and the like can be made recyclable and the game panel 599 can be recycled. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a game board 4 that can be used for various types of machines by simply replacing them.

  Further, since the panel holder 600 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 600j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various types such as the back unit 2000 and the board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 depending on the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different positions, the panel holder 600 can be shared by the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 600j. It can be made into parts.

[Board substrate holder]
A detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81, 86 and 87. FIG. 86 is a perspective view shown obliquely from behind with the main control board box fixed to the board holder. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG.

  The board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 600. As shown in FIG. 81, the board holder 623 has a box shape with the front and upper sides opened, and its bottom is substantially in the center in the left-right direction. Is inclined so as to become lower toward the front side, and after receiving the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 599, it can be discharged downward from a substantially horizontal center. . On the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, a sealed part 1302 corresponding to the sealing part 624a provided on the main control board box 624 is formed of a metal plate fixed with a predetermined screw from the rear side. A caulking base member 1300 and a drawer holder 1350 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are fixed.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the board substrate holder 623 so that the caulking base member 1300 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the board board holder 623 and the sealing portion of the main control board box 624. 624a is sealed to the sealed portion 1302 of the caulking base member 1300. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark remains on the sealed portion 1302 of the caulking base member 1300, and the main control board box 624 is illegally removed. Whether or not it has been confirmed can be visually confirmed.

  Further, in a state where the main control board box 624 is fixed to the board substrate holder 623, the heads of screws fixing the caulking base member 1300 to the board board holder 623 are connected to the caulking base member 1300 and the main control board box 624. The caulking base member 1300 and the main control board box 624 can be prevented from being removed. In addition, since the caulking base member 1300 is formed of a metal plate, the sealed portion 624a of the main control board box 624 can be firmly sealed by the sealed portion 1302, and a structure in which illegal acts are difficult to be performed. It has become.

[Center character]
A detailed configuration of the center accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90. 88A is a left side view of the center accessory, FIG. 88B is a front view of the center accessory, and FIG. 88C is a right side view of the center accessory. FIG. 89 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed obliquely from behind.

  The center accessory 1400 includes a front annular portion 1400a that is in an annular shape substantially along the inner periphery of the largest opening 599e formed at the approximate center of the transparent gaming panel 599, and a front annular portion that contacts the front surface of the gaming panel 599. An insertion annular portion 1400b extending mainly from the inner peripheral end of 1400a into the opening 599e of the game panel 599 is provided, and a movable decorative body 2006 and a liquid crystal display arranged on the rear side through the annular ring The device 640 and the like are visible (see FIG. 74 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the front annular portion 1400a of the center accessory 1400 has a left and right side and an upper side excluding the front side of the stage 1406 forward from the front surface of the game panel 599 by a predetermined amount (for example, within a range of 15 mm to 25 mm). It is formed in a protruding weir shape so that the game ball does not move from the outer peripheral side to the inner peripheral side of the center accessory 1400 beyond the front annular portion 1400a. The front annular portion 1400a has a warp inlet 1402 that is open to the outer peripheral surfaces on both the left and right sides and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 605 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 1402 is placed in the center object 1400. A warp passage 1404 that leads to a stage 1406 formed on the peripheral side is provided. In FIG. 90, reference numeral 1405 denotes a warp exit from which a game ball that has entered the warp passage 1404 comes out.

  In addition, the front annular portion 1400a is provided with a guide shelf 1408 that guides the game ball that has flowed down from the upper side of the game area 605 from the upper side on the upper surface side on the outer periphery. The guide shelf 1408 has an inclined surface that becomes lower as it moves away from the center in the left-right direction of the center accessory 1400, and the game balls that have flowed down from above the center accessory 1400 are on the left and right side surfaces of the center accessory 1400. Can be guided to.

  On the other hand, the insertion annular portion 1400b of the center accessory 1400 has a length in the front-rear direction (depth) that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 599 (see FIGS. 78 to 80). This prevents the center accessory 1400 from interfering with the light emitting decorative body 2004, the movable decorative body 2006, and the like of the back unit 2000 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 599.

  Accordingly, the insertion annular portion 1400b is inserted into the opening 599e from the front of the game panel 599, and is disposed between the stage 1406 and the warp outlet 1405 of the warp passage 1404 and the stage 1406 from the rear of the game panel 599. A ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410 for guiding the game ball supplied from 1404 in a ninety-nine fold shape and guiding it to the stage 1406 and a transparent plate-like protective wall portion 1418 extending upward to the rear side of the stage 1406 Is inserted into the insertion annular portion 1400b and screwed to the front annular portion 1400a to constitute the center accessory 1400. The ninety-nine folding guideway 1410 is formed in a plurality of steps (for example, five steps) stepped downward toward the center in the left-right direction of the stage 1406, and the inclination of each step with respect to the front-rear direction is alternated. The game balls supplied from the warp passage 1404 are sequentially sent to the lower stage while alternately rolling in the front-rear direction. With this ninety-nine fold guideway 1410, the speed of the game ball supplied from the warp passage 1404 can be reduced and supplied to the stage 1406, and the depth of the stage 1406 including the ninety-nine fold guideway 1410 can be reduced. Even if it is narrow, the game ball that has entered the warp passage 1404 can be prevented from being discharged from the stage 1406 into the game area 605 in a short time, and the rolling effect of the game ball can be enjoyed. .

  Further, the stage 1406 is formed in a curved surface shape with the center in the left-right direction lowered as a whole, and the first stage 1406a that receives a game ball supplied from the ninety-nine-fold guide path 1410 is arranged on the rear side in the front-rear direction. And a second stage 1406b which is arranged on the front side of the first stage 1406a and has a shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction is smoothly raised. In addition, the first stage 1406a and the second stage 1406b are formed with a curved concave groove 1412 that becomes lower on the front side and expands to the left and right as it goes to the front side. In the second stage 1406b, the second stage 1406b is arranged in two places with the center in between. Furthermore, the second stage 1406b has an entrance 1414 that allows a game ball to enter the center.

  The front annular portion 1400a located on the front side of the stage 1406 is configured to extend upward so as to block the front end of the second stage 1406b except for the portion where the concave groove 1412 is formed. A discharge port 1416 that communicates with the entrance 1414 of the second stage 1406b is formed in the center. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the stage 1406 is discharged into the game area 605 below the center accessory 1400 from either the concave groove 1412 of the second stage 1406b or the discharge port 1416 of the front annular portion 1400a. It has come to be. Note that the discharge port 1416 of the center accessory 1400 is disposed immediately above the first start port 1502 in the attacker unit 1500 (see FIG. 74 and the like), and when the game ball is discharged from the discharge port 1416, The first start opening 1502 can be won with a high probability.

  The protective wall portion 1418 prevents the game ball from moving from the stage 1406 or the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410 to the rear side of the center accessory 1400. In other words, the game ball can be prevented from entering the back box 2002 (accommodating space 2010) of the back unit 2000 disposed on the rear side of the center accessory 1400. Note that the protective wall portion 1418 is made of a plate-like member that extends upward in front of the liquid crystal display device 640, whereby the protective wall portion 1418 hinders visual recognition of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. Avoid as much as possible. In other words, it is possible to extend from the upper part of the protective wall part 1418 toward the rear (in the direction of the liquid crystal display device 640) so as to cover the upper part of the accommodation space 2010, but it extends toward the rear. As a result, the thickness of the portion is larger than that of the other portions, which may hinder the visual recognition of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. On the other hand, in this configuration, a part of the protective wall portion 1418 is disposed in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 so as to overlap the display screen, but extends upward in front of the liquid crystal display device 640. Since it is composed of a plate-shaped member, the thickness in the depth direction (the back direction of the pachinko machine 1) can be reduced, and the thickness of the protective wall portion 1418 can be made uniform. It is possible to avoid obstructing the visual recognition of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 due to the increase. Further, when the game ball gets over the protection wall portion 1418 and enters the accommodation space 2010, the game ball is stored in the accommodation space 2010. As described above, the accommodation space 2010 is surrounded by the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the liquid crystal display device 640 and is located on both sides of the under movable decoration body 2400 of the light emission decoration body 2004 and corresponding to the bottom of the accommodation space 2010. Is formed with an intrusion ball holding portion 2115 for holding a game ball that has entered the accommodation space 2010 so that the game ball that has entered the accommodation space 2010 does not enter the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, a game ball stored in the accommodation space 2010, specifically, a game ball held on the intrusion ball holding unit 2115, has a finger inserted into the gap between the protective wall portion 1418 and the liquid crystal display device 640. It is possible to take it out. As a result, in the case where a malfunction that prevents the driving of a movable member or a light-emitting body provided in the accommodation space 2010 due to the game ball that has entered the accommodation space 2010 occurs, the game that causes the malfunction is dealt with immediately. The ball can be removed. The under movable decorative body 2400 is arranged so that a part of the under base member 2406 protrudes above the intrusion ball holding portion 2115, so that the game ball held in the intrusion ball holding portion 2115 is used for the under. Intrusion to the inside of the base member 2406 is prevented, and driving of the under movable decorative body 2400 is not hindered. In addition, the penetrating sphere holding portion 2115 is formed by protruding the left and right end portions (the end portion close to the under movable decorative body 2400 and the end portion farthest from the under movable decorative member 2400) upward. The game ball held by the ball holding unit 2115 can be stopped on the penetrating ball holding unit 2115. In addition, the game ball that has entered the accommodation space 2010 may be guided to the out-ball path 1119 and discharged toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, the island collection basket). Since the game balls that have entered the storage space 2010 are not stored in the storage space 2010, the game balls stored in the storage space 2010 may cause problems such as hindering driving of movable members and light emitters provided in the storage space 2010. Occurrence can be suppressed.

  Further, a member in which the insertion annular portion 1400b is inserted into the opening 599e from the front of the game panel 599, and the stage 1406, the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410, and the protective wall portion 1418 are integrally formed from the rear of the game panel 599. Is inserted into the insertion annular portion 1400b and screwed to the front annular portion 1400a to form the center accessory 1400. Therefore, the stage 1406 and the ninety-nine fold guide path 1410 are protected from the opening 599e of the game panel 599. A region formed by a member integrally formed with the wall portion 1418 can be expanded. In other words, the front annular portion 1400a and the stage 1406, the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410, and the protective wall portion 1418 are integrally inserted into the opening 599e from the front of the game panel 599 in a state where the members are screwed together. In such a case, the member in which the stage 1406, the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410, and the protective wall portion 1418 are integrally formed must be formed so as not to contact the opening edge of the opening portion 599e. By being configured to be screwed from the rear of 599, the stage 1406, the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410, and the protective wall 1418 can be integrated with each other because it can be formed wider than the opening edge of the opening 599e. Thus, it becomes possible to form the members formed more widely.

  The center accessory 1400 of this example is provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface side excluding the stage 1406, the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410, and the protective wall portion 1418. The end face of the opening 599e in the game panel 599 can be prevented from being visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be prevented from being deteriorated. Further, the front annular portion 1400a is decorated with a crocodile skin-like decoration so that the appearance characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 are formed. The center accessory 1400 includes a stage 1406, a ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410, and a protective wall portion 1418 formed of colorless and transparent members, through which the movable decorative body of the back unit 2000 disposed on the rear side. 2006 and the light-emitting decorative body 2004 can be visually recognized.

  In this way, by forming the stage 1406, the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410, and the protective wall portion 1418 with a colorless and transparent member (acrylic resin or the like), an effect space (accommodation) that can be visually recognized by the player below them. A space 2010) is formed. Then, by arranging movable members, light emitters, and the like in the stage space below the stage 1406, the ninety-nine fold guideway 1410, and the protective wall portion 1418, a predetermined stage can be executed in the stage space. . As a result, the area width in which the performance can be performed is expanded, and the game ball that rolls above the stage 1406, the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410, and the protective wall portion 1418, and the stage 1406, the ninety-ninth folding guiding path 1410 The depth feeling can be improved by comparison with the effect executed in the effect space below the protective wall portion 1418. In addition, as long as it forms so that at least one part of the under movable member 2400 arrange | positioned in the accommodation space 2010 can be visually recognized, the stage 1406, the ninety-nine fold guideway 1410, and the protection wall part 1418 are colored members. You may comprise.

  It should be noted that the stage 1406 in the center bonus 1400 is higher than the level of the player's eyes when the player is seated on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 after the pachinko machine 1 is attached to an island facility such as a game hall. It is arranged at a position on the lower side, and it is easy to see the game balls on the stage 1406 and the ninety-nine fold guideway 1410 by setting the stage 1406 so that the player looks down.

[Attacker unit]
The configuration of the attacker unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed obliquely from the upper right, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from obliquely the upper left. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the upper right side obliquely, and FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the lower right side obliquely.

  The attacker unit 1500 is inserted from the front side into an opening 599e formed on the lower side of the opening 599e into which the center accessory 1400 in the game panel 599 is inserted, and is sized to protrude rearward from the rear side of the game panel 599. Casing 1500a, and a flange portion 1500b extending from the front surface of the casing 1500a along the surface of the game panel 599 and abutting against the front peripheral edge portion of the opening 599e. The casing 1500a includes a start opening solenoid 1512 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 1504 for opening and closing the second start opening 1506, and an attacker solenoid 1514 for opening and closing an opening / closing member 1508 for closing the big prize opening 1510. The start opening solenoid 1512 and the attacker solenoid 1514 can open and close the pair of movable pieces 1504 and the opening / closing member 1508 by link mechanisms (not shown).

  Further, the casing 1500 a is provided with a second start port sensor 1516 for detecting a game ball won in the second start port 1506 and a count sensor 1518 for detecting a game ball won in the big winning port 1510. As shown in FIG. 94, the game ball which is won by the second start port 1506 and detected by the second start port sensor 1516 is discharged downward from the discharge port 1520 formed on the lower surface of the casing 1500a. It has become. Also, the game ball detected by the count sensor 1518 after winning the big prize opening 1510 is discharged downward from a position different from the outlet 1520 on the lower surface of the casing 1500a.

  As shown in the figure, a first start port 1502 and a second start port 1506 are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 1500b of the attacker unit 1500 so as to protrude forward. Further, from the first start port 1502, a guide rod 1522 integrally formed with the flange portion 1500b extends rearward. Further, the flange portion 1500b is rotatably supported with the lower side of the opening / closing member 1508 extending in the left-right direction as an axis, and is closed when the upper side of the opening / closing member 1508 is moved forward by the opening drive of the attacker solenoid 1514. The large prize winning opening 1510 is opened.

  The flange portion 1500b has a plurality of through-holes 1524 penetrating therethrough, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the front surface of the game panel 599 through the attachment holes 1524, whereby the attacker unit 1500 is attached to the game panel 599. It can be attached and fixed to. 93 and 94, reference numeral 1526 denotes a protrusion for positioning the fixed position of the attacker unit 1500 with respect to the game panel 599. The protrusion 1526 is located at the position of the game panel 599 corresponding to the protrusion 1526. A positioning hole to be inserted is formed (not shown).

  The attacker unit 1500 has a crocodile-like decoration on the surface and a plated layer having a metallic luster as with the center accessory 1400, and this pachinko machine 1 is characterized. Yes.

[Gate material]
The structure of the general gate 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 95A is a perspective view of the left gate member as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 95B is a perspective view of the right gate member as viewed from the oblique front. 96 is a perspective view of the left gate member as viewed obliquely from behind, and FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view showing the gate member of FIG. 96 in an exploded manner.

  The configuration of the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 is the same as that of the general figure gate 1600, and therefore, the description of the configuration of the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 is omitted here.

  The base gate 1600 of this example is arranged in the game area 605 and has a square hole-shaped gate portion 1602 that penetrates in the vertical direction so that a game ball can pass through, and outward from the rear end of the gate portion 1602 in the left-right direction. A flange portion 1604 that contacts the front surface of the extended game panel 599 and an insertion portion 1606 that extends backward from the rear end of the gate portion 1602 and is inserted into an opening 599e formed in the game panel 599 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the gate portion 1602 and the insertion portion 1606 in the general-purpose gate 1600 have substantially the same width in the horizontal direction and height in the vertical direction. Further, in the conventional gate 1600, a through hole 1608 that penetrates the insertion portion 1606 in the front-rear direction is formed, and a groove 1610 that is continuous with the through hole 1608 of the insertion portion 1606 is formed inside the left and right sides of the gate portion 1602. Is formed (see FIG. 97).

  In this example, the general-purpose gate 1600 is provided with a general-purpose gate sensor 1612 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 1602 on the left-side general-purpose gate 1600. The universal gate sensor 1612 is supported by the universal gate 1600 by being fitted into the through hole 1608 of the insertion portion 1606 and the groove 1610 of the gate portion 1602. It should be noted that with the universal gate sensor 1612 supported by the universal gate 1600, a predetermined small screw such as a pan screw is screwed into the screw hole 1614 formed at the rear end of the insertion portion 1606, so that the small screw Movement to the rear side is restricted by the head, and the universal gate sensor 1612 can be fixed to the universal gate 1600.

  Note that the base figure gate 1600 of this example has a length in the front-rear direction of the insertion portion 1606 that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 599. It does not protrude greatly to the rear side of the panel 599, and does not interfere with the light emitting decorative body 2004 or the like of the back unit 2000 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 599.

  Reference numeral 1616 in the figure denotes an attachment hole through which a screw for attaching the general gate 1600 to the front surface of the game panel 599 can be inserted. Reference numeral 1618 in the figure denotes a protrusion for positioning the general-purpose gate 1600 at a predetermined position of the game panel 599, and is inserted into a positioning hole formed at a predetermined position of the game panel 599. Can be positioned at a predetermined position.

  This general-purpose gate 1600 also has a crocodile-like decoration on its surface and a plated layer with a metallic luster, as in the case of the center accessory 1400 and the attacker unit 1500. The pachinko machine 1 is characterized.

[Side prize opening member]
The configuration of the side prize opening member 1700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 (A) is a perspective view of the left side winning prize opening member as viewed from diagonally forward, and (B) is a perspective view of (A) as viewed from diagonally rear. FIG. 99 (A) is a perspective view of the right side winning prize opening member as viewed obliquely from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of (A) as viewed from the oblique rear. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the left side winning prize port member disassembled and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the right side winning prize port member disassembled and viewed from diagonally forward.

  The side prize-winning member 1700 of this example includes a transparent and plate-like base member 1704 extending in an arc shape, a front upper member 1706 that is fixed to the upper front side of the base member 1704 and has an upper general prize-winning port 1702 formed thereon, A front lower member 1708 fixed to the front lower portion of the member 1704 and having a lower general winning opening 1702 formed therein. In the side prize opening member 1700, a front upper member 1706 and a front lower member 1708 are assembled to a base member 1704 with screws penetrating the base member 1704 from the rear side.

  The base member 1704 of the side prize opening member 1700 includes an insertion base portion 1710 that is inserted into the opening 599e of the game panel 599, and an exposed portion 1712 that protrudes forward from the insertion base portion 1710 and is exposed to the player side. Although not shown, a plurality of minute lenses are formed in the exposed portion 1712 so that light passing through the exposed portion 1712 can be diffused. Note that the dimension of the insertion base portion 1710 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 599, and does not protrude from the rear surface of the game panel 599.

  The front upper member 1706 is inserted into the opening 599e of the game panel 599 together with the insertion base portion 1710 of the base member 1704, and can be brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel 599 provided at the front end of the insertion portion 1714. And a general winning opening 1702 is formed so as to extend forward from the flange portion 1716. Further, the front upper member 1706 further includes a guide shelf 1718 that extends forward from the flange portion 1716 and is inclined on the upper surface so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 605. The game balls that have flowed down in the game area 605 by the guide shelf 1718 can be guided to the center side of the game area 605. Further, on the front upper member 1706, a game ball won in the general prize opening 1702 with a length projecting rearward from the rear face of the game panel 599 to the rear side of the general prize opening 1702 to the rear side of the game panel 599. A guiding rod 1720 for guiding is provided.

  On the other hand, the front lower member 1708 includes a flange portion 1722 that extends substantially along the front surface of the game panel 599, and a general winning opening 1702 is formed so as to extend forward from the flange portion 1722. In addition, on the rear side of the general winning opening 1702 in the front lower member 1708, the game ball won in the general winning opening 1702 with a length protruding rearward from the rear surface of the gaming panel 599 is guided to the rear side of the gaming panel 599. A guide rod 1724 is provided.

  The front upper member 1706 and the front lower member 1708 have flanges 1716 and 1722 formed with attachment holes 1726 for attaching the side prize port member 1700 to the front surface of the game panel 599. The side winning opening member 1700 can be fixed by screwing it into the game panel 599 through the mounting hole 1726. Further, the flange portions 1716 and 1722 of the front upper member 1706 and the front lower member 1708 are formed with protrusions 1728 that protrude rearward, and the protrusions 1728 are inserted into predetermined positions of the game panel 599. The side winning opening member 1700 can be positioned at a predetermined position.

  The side prize opening member 1700 has a crocodile skin decoration on the surface of the front upper member 1706 and the front lower member 1708, and a plated layer having a metallic luster is formed. Similar to the attacker unit 1500 and the like, the pachinko machine 1 is characterized.

≪Back unit≫
The configuration of the back unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a front view of the back unit, FIG. 103 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 104 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from an oblique back. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit broken down into a light emitting decorative body, a movable decorative body, a back box, etc. and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 105 viewed from diagonally backward. is there.

  The back unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment supports the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear side, and an opening 2012 that is closed from the rear side by the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear wall 2014. A box-like back box 2002 that is formed and attached to the rear side of the panel holder 600 and whose front side is opened; a plate-like light-emitting decorative body 2004 that is arranged and fixed at the front end of the back box 2002; A movable decorative body 2006 is provided that is disposed in an accommodation space 2010 formed between the body 2004 and the rear wall 2014 of the back box 2002 and is movable in a predetermined direction.

  In this back unit 2000, a liquid crystal display device 640, a light emitting decoration body 2004, and a movable decoration body 2006 are unitized by a back box 2002, and the game can be achieved by simply attaching and fixing the back box 2002 to the rear side of the panel holder 600. The liquid crystal display device 640 and the like can be easily fixed to the rear side of the panel 599, and the movable decoration body 2006 and the liquid crystal display device 640 and the like arranged on the rear side through the ring of the light emitting decoration body 2004 are provided from the player side. It can be visually recognized.

  As will be described in detail later, the back unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 2120 in the light emitting decoration body 2004 so that various light emission effects can be performed according to the gaming state. The movable decorative body 2006 includes a center movable decorative body 2200 disposed on the upper front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, a side movable decorative body 2300 disposed on the left and right front surfaces of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the liquid crystal display device 640. An under movable decorative body 2400 disposed on the lower front surface is provided, and each movable decorative body 2006 is movable in a predetermined direction in accordance with a game state so that various movable effects can be performed. Further, the back box 2002 includes various board boxes in which a control board for controlling a light emission effect and a movable effect is accommodated in addition to the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear side, and a relay board for connecting and relaying the boards. Etc. are fixed.

[Luminous decoration]
A detailed configuration of the light emitting decorative body 2002 in the back unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 111. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the light-emitting decorative body as viewed obliquely from the upper front, FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the light-emitting decorative body as viewed obliquely from the upper rear, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the light-emitting decorative body disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 110 viewed from the oblique rear.

  The light emitting decorative body 2002 in the back unit 2000 of this example includes an annular plate-shaped decorative member 2100, a transparent plate-shaped diffusing lens member 2110 disposed on the rear side of the decorative member 2100, and a rear side of the diffusing lens member 2110. A light emitting decorative substrate 2130 having a plurality of LEDs 2120 mounted thereon and a light emitting decorative base member disposed on the rear side of the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 and supporting at least the decorative member 2100, the diffusing lens member 2110, and the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 2140.

  As shown in the drawing, the decorative member 2100 of the light-emitting decorative body 2002 has an outer shape whose outer shape is substantially in line with the outer peripheral shape of the game area 605 and an inner shape that is substantially circular with the inner shape of the center accessory 1400 in the front view. A plurality of openings 2101 extending in the front-rear direction and formed in the circumferential direction are provided radially extending about the approximate center of the region 605. The decorative member 2100 is composed of a plurality of divided bodies, and is formed of a semicircular arc-shaped upper divided body 2102 that forms the upper half, and a quadrant that forms the outer periphery of the lower half of the decorative member 2100 that continues from the upper divided body 2102. An arc-shaped left lower divided body 2103L and a right lower divided body 2103R; a left arc divided left inner divided body 2104L and a right inner divided body 2104R disposed on the inner peripheral side of the left lower divided body 2103L and the right lower divided body 2103R; It consists of

  The left lower divided body 2103L and the right lower divided body 2103R are formed with through holes 2105 through which guide rods 1720 and 1724 extending from the side prize port member 1700 to the rear side can be inserted. That is, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 1702 is guided to the rear side of the decorative member 2100. In addition, an opening portion of the game panel 599 is provided at an end portion on the center side with respect to the left-right direction of the game area 605 of the lower left divided body 2103L and the lower right divided body 2103R, and the left inner divided body 2104L and the right inner divided body 2104R. A notch 2106 is formed to avoid contact with the casing 1500a of the attacker unit 1500 that protrudes to the rear side of the gaming panel 599 through the 599e. The notch 2106 allows the casing 1500 a of the attacker unit 1500 to extend to the rear side of the decorative member 2100.

  Further, the upper divided body 2102 of the decorative member 2100 is provided with a plurality of fixing portions 2107 extending radially outward from the outer periphery thereof with the center of the game area 605 as the center. The upper divided body 2102 can be fixed to the light emitting decoration base member 2140 and the back box 2002 via the fixing portion 2107.

  Note that the left inner divided body 2104L and the right inner divided body 2104R in the decorative member 2100 are disposed at positions slightly rearward compared to the upper divided body 2102, the left lower divided body 2103L, and the right lower divided body 2103R. The three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the plate-shaped decorative member 2100 as much as possible. In addition, the decorative member 2100 has a surface that is shaped like a rock and is formed with a plating layer having a metallic luster.

  The diffusing lens member 2110 of the light emitting decorative body 2004 has a plate shape with a size and shape substantially corresponding to the decorative member 2100, and is substantially the same size as the upper divided body 2102 of the decorative member 2100 and is located on the rear side of the upper divided body 2102. The lower lens unit 2111, the lower left divided body 2103L, and the lower inner divided body 2104L are arranged on the rear side of the lower left divided body 2103L and the left inner divided body 2104L with approximately the same size as the combined size of the left lower divided body 2103L and the left inner divided body 2104L. A lower right lens member disposed on the rear side of the lower right divided body 2103R and the right inner divided body 2104R and having the same size as the left lens member 2112L, the right lower divided body 2103R, and the right inner divided body 2104R. 2112R.

  The diffusing lens member 2110 includes a lens portion 2113 that extends radially from the center of the game area 605 in the front and includes a plurality of small-diameter lenses arranged in the circumferential direction. The lens portion 2113 is arranged and formed so as to correspond to the opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100. In the assembled state, only the lens portion 2113 of the diffusing lens member 2110 passes through the opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100. To be exposed. Further, the lens portion 2113 diffuses light emitted from the LED 2120 of the light emitting decoration board 2130 disposed on the rear side widely to the player side, so that even with a small number of LEDs 2120 (LEDs 2120 that emit point light). The opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100 can emit light in a planar shape.

  Similarly to the decorative member 2100, the diffusing lens member 2110 is formed with a through hole 2114 through which guide rods 1720 and 1724 extending from the side prize port member 1700 can be inserted.

  The light emitting decorative substrate 2130 of the light emitting decorative body 2004 is disposed on the rear side of the diffusing lens member 2110, and a plurality of LEDs 2120 are mounted on the surface thereof. The light emitting decorative substrate 2130 includes an upper left substrate 2131L disposed on the rear side of the left half of the upper lens member 2111, and an upper portion disposed adjacent to the upper left substrate and on the rear side of the right half of the upper lens member 2111. The right substrate 2131R, the left lower substrate 2132L disposed at a position corresponding to the left lower divided body 2103L on the rear side of the lower left lens member 2112L, and the right lower divided body 2103R corresponding to the rear side of the lower right lens member 2112R. A right lower substrate 2132R disposed at a position, a left inner upper substrate 2133L disposed at a position corresponding to the upper half of the left inner divided body 2104L on the rear side of the lower left lens member 2112L, and a rear of the lower right lens member 2112R. The right inner upper substrate 2133R disposed at a position corresponding to the upper half of the right inner divided body 2104R on the side, and the lower left lens member 2112 The left inner lower substrate 2134L is arranged at a position corresponding to the lower half of the left inner divided body 2104L on the rear side, and is arranged at a position corresponding to the lower half of the right inner divided body 2104R on the rear side of the lower right lens member 2112R. And a right inner lower substrate 2134R.

  The light emitting decorative substrate 2130 has LEDs 2120 mounted on the surface corresponding to the lens portion 2113 of the diffusing lens member 2110 disposed on the front side, and one lens portion 2113 has a size corresponding to the size of the lens portion 2113. On the other hand, one or a plurality of LEDs 2120 are provided. Specifically, as shown in the drawing, the LED 2120 disposed on the rear side of the lens portion 2113 having a long extension with respect to the lens portion 2113 extending radially about the substantially center of the game area 605 in front view is a lens. A plurality of rows are provided in substantially the same direction as the direction in which the portion 2113 extends. That is, a plurality of LEDs 2120 are arranged in a radial pattern.

  Note that the front side of the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 is painted white, so that the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 is not conspicuous, and the opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100 can emit light more planarly. In addition, the LED 2120 mounted on the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 can emit light in various colors, and can perform various light emission effects depending on the light emission color as well as lighting and blinking.

  The light emitting decoration base member 2140 of the light emitting decoration body 2004 has a rectangular outer shape and a circular inner shape, and is entirely formed in a frame shape with an open upper side. And a right base member 2140R. The light emitting decorative base member 2140 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes and mounting bosses at predetermined positions for fixing the decorative member 2100, the diffusing lens member 2110, the light emitting decorative substrate 2130, and the like.

  Similarly to the decorative member 2100 and the diffusing lens member 2110, the light emitting decorative base member 2140 is formed with a through hole 2141 through which the guide rods 1720 and 1724 extending from the side prize port member 1700 can be inserted. In addition, a notch 2142 is formed to avoid contact with the casing 1500a of the attacker unit 1500 that protrudes to the rear side of the gaming panel 599 through the opening 599e of the gaming panel 599. The through holes 2141 and the notch portion 2142 allow the guide rods 1720 and 1724 of the side prize opening member 1700 and the casing 1500a of the attacker unit 1500 to extend to the rear side of the light emitting decoration base member 2140.

  In addition, the light emitting decorative body 2004 of this example is fixedly supported on the rear side of the light emitting decorative base member 2140 and guided by the guide rods 1720 and 1724 of the side winning port member 1700 and the guide rod 1522 of the attacker unit 1500. A ball guiding member 2150 for receiving the game ball and guiding and discharging it to a predetermined position below is further provided. The ball guiding member 2150 includes a left ball guiding member 2150L corresponding to the side winning port member 1700 disposed on the left side, and a right ball guiding member 2150R corresponding to the side winning port member 1700 and the attacker unit 1500 disposed on the right side. It has.

  The ball guiding member 2150 is provided with a general winning port sensor 2151 for detecting a game ball guided by the guiding rods 1720 and 1724 of the side winning port member 1700 so as to correspond to each guiding rod 1720 and 1724. . The right ball guiding member 2150R of the ball guiding member 2150 is provided with a first start port sensor 2152 that detects a game ball guided by the guide rod 1522 of the attacker unit 1500.

  The light emitting decorative body 2004 further includes a frame-shaped light emitting partition member 2160 disposed between the diffusing lens member 2110 and the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 and configured to shield and partition the plurality of LEDs 2120 between the adjacent lens portions 2113. I have. More specifically, the light emitting section member 2160 is disposed on the rear side of the lower left lens member 2112L at a position corresponding to the left inner divided body 2104L of the decorative member 2100, and the left inner upper substrate 2133L and the left inner lower substrate 2134L. The left light-emitting partition member 2160L disposed on the front side and the rear inner side of the lower right lens member and the right inner divided body 2104R of the decorative member 2100 are disposed at positions corresponding to the right inner upper substrate 2133R and the right inner lower substrate 2134R. And a right light-emitting partition member 2160R disposed on the rear side.

  As shown in the figure, the light-emitting partition member 2160 is formed in a frame shape having an opening having substantially the same shape as the lens portion 2113 of the diffusing lens member 2110, and is thereby arranged on the rear side of a certain lens portion 2113. The light emitted from the LED 2120 is prevented from irradiating the other lens part 2113 so that each lens part 2113 (each opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100) can produce an independent light emission effect. It has become.

  The light-emitting decorative body 2004 of this example is configured in a plate shape by assembling the decorative member 2100, the diffusing lens member 2110, the light-emitting decorative substrate 2130, the light-emitting decorative base member 2140, and the like, as described above, and also as viewed from the front. In FIG. 2, the player can visually recognize from the player side through a transparent game panel 599 on the outer periphery of the center accessory 1400. And, by the three-dimensional light emitting decoration body 2004 that can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 599, compared with the conventional flat decoration in which the front of the game panel on the outer periphery of the center object is provided with a picture or a pattern, etc. It can attract the player's interest strongly.

[Center movable decorative body in movable decorative body]
A detailed configuration of the center movable decorative body 2200 in the movable decorative body 2006 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 117. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the center movable decorative body as viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the center movable decorative body as viewed from an oblique rear. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the center movable decorative body exploded and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the center movable decorative body disassembled and viewed obliquely from the diagonal front. It is. 116A is a perspective view showing a moving mechanism of the center movable decorative body, and FIG. 116B is a left side view showing a rotation mechanism of the center movable decorative body. FIG. 117 is a side view for explaining the movement of the buttocks of the center movable decorative body.

  The center movable decorative body 2200 of the present embodiment includes a hammer-shaped flange 2202 that can be moved in the left-right direction and can be rotated around an axis in the same direction as the moving direction. As shown in the figure, the flange 2202 has a cylindrical and bellows-shaped flange main body 2204 having a substantially flat striking surface 2206 formed at the tip thereof. The center movable decorative body 2200 can rotate the collar portion 2202 as if the display screen of the liquid crystal display screen 640 is struck by the striking surface 2206 of the heel portion 2202.

  Specifically, the center movable ornament 2200 includes a guide member 2208 extending in the left-right direction, a center base member formed of a metal plate that supports both ends of the guide member 2208 and can be fixed in the back box 2002. 2210, a motor base member 2212 fixed to the center base member 2210, a center moving motor 2214 fixed to the motor base member 2212 so that the rotation axis is directed in the vertical direction, and the rotation shaft of the center moving motor 2214 A moving drive gear 2216 fixed to the pin, a pinion gear 2218 that meshes with the moving drive gear 2216, has a larger diameter than the moving drive gear 2216, and is rotatably supported by the motor base member 2212. The direction substantially the same as the axial direction in which the guide member 2208 extends. A sliding body 2222 having an extended rack gear 2220 and guided by a guide member 2208, a heel support member 2224 fixed to the approximate center of the sliding body 2222, and a rotational axis of the heel support member 2224 in the axial direction of the guide member 2208 And the second gear 2230 meshing with the first gear 2228, the second gear 2228, and the second gear 2230 meshing with the first gear 2228. 2230 is fixed to the base end side, and is pivotally supported by the heel support member 2224 so that the distal end side extends substantially in the same direction as the axial direction of the guide member 2208, and on the distal end side of the rotation shaft 2232 And a handle 2234 to which the base is fixed and the flange 2202 is fixed to the tip.

  The guide member 2208 in the center movable decorative body 2200 is constituted by a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 2208a made of metal, and the guide shafts 2208a are center base members so as to be substantially parallel to the horizontal direction. 2210 is supported. Further, the surface of the guide shaft 2208a is subjected to a predetermined plating process, so that the sliding resistance of the sliding body 2222 is reduced.

  As shown in the drawing, the center base member 2210 is formed by bending a sheet metal, and extends from the both ends of the main body portion 2210a extending in the substantially horizontal direction and extending in the left-right direction, and the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the main body portion 2210a. A support portion 2210b that is bent so as to hang downward and supports a pair of guide shafts 2208a as a guide member 2208 substantially parallel to each other at a predetermined interval, and is bent and formed so as to hang downward from the rear end of the main body portion 2210a. A fixing portion 2210c fixed to the box 2002, and a reinforcing piece 2210d that is bent so as to rise upward from the front end of the main body portion 2210a and have the same length as the main body portion 2210a are provided.

  The center base member 2210 is formed with a plurality of through holes 2210e penetrating in a predetermined shape in the main body portion 2210a and the fixing portion 2210c. With this through hole 2210e, the center base member 2210 can be reduced in weight. Some of the through holes 2210e are used to avoid interference with other parts.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, an attachment hole and a positioning hole for fixing other components are appropriately formed in each part of the center base member 2210. In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, a collar decoration board 2626 having an LED 2122 is provided inside the collar section 2202 (see FIG. 132), and light emission of the LED 2122 on the decoration board 2626 for the collar The collar 2202 can be decorated with light emission.

  The motor base member 2212 is formed of resin and supports the center moving motor so as to hang down. Further, the motor base member 2212 is located on the rear side of the guide member 2208 so that the pinion gear 2218 rotatably supported by the shaft is disposed at a position corresponding to the approximate center of the guide member 2208 in the axial direction. The base member 2210 is fixed to the lower side. As a result, the sliding body 2222 having the rack gear 2220 that meshes with the pinion gear 2218 can move over substantially the entire length of the guide member 2208.

  As shown in the drawing, the sliding body 2222 has a rectangular shape extending in the same left-right direction as the extending direction of the guide member 2208, and a rack gear 2220 is formed at the rear end thereof over the entire length. The sliding body 2222 is disposed between the main body 2210a of the center base member 2210 and the guide member 2208, and can rotate a roller 2236 that rolls on the guide shaft 2208a in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction). I support it. The sliding body 2222 is provided with a protruding portion 2222a that protrudes from the lower surface between the pair of guide shafts 2208a. A sliding body presser 2238 disposed on the opposite side of the roller 2236 with the guide shaft 2208a interposed therebetween is fixed to a lower portion of the protrusion 2222a corresponding to the position where the roller 2236 is disposed. . The roller 2236, the protruding portion 2222a of the sliding body 2222, and the sliding body presser 2238 allow the sliding body 2222 to move smoothly without dropping on the pair of guide shafts 2208a.

  The sliding body 2222 is provided with a cylindrical protrusion 2222b that protrudes upward from a substantially center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and penetrates in the vertical direction inside. The cylindrical protrusion 2222b faces upward from a rectangular through hole 2210e extending long in the left-right direction of the main body 2210a of the center base member 2210. The cylindrical protrusion 2222b has a wiring cord connected to a hook motor 2226 and the like supported by a hook support member 2224 fixed to the lower surface of the sliding body 2222 inserted therethrough, and is used for the center. By extending the wiring cord upward through the through hole 2210e of the base member 2210, the wiring cord is prevented from coming into contact with the through hole 2210e of the center base member 2210.

  Further, the sliding body 2222 is provided with a moving position detecting piece 2222c that protrudes rearward above the rack gear 2220. The movement position detection piece 2222c can be detected by a center movement detection sensor 2240 fixedly supported by the motor base member 2212, and the movement position of the sliding body 2222 can be detected by being detected by the center movement detection sensor 2240. It is like that.

  The heel support member 2224 is fixed to the lower surface of the sliding body 2222 at the substantially center in the left-right direction corresponding to the space between the pair of guide shafts 2208a. The heel support member 2224 pivotally supports a pivot shaft 2232 for pivoting the heel portion 2202 at a rear position adjacent to the liquid crystal display device 640 disposed on the rear side (see FIG. 79). The motor 2226 is supported at a front position farther from the liquid crystal display device 640 than the rotation shaft 2232. Further, the heel support member 2224 is supported by a cylindrical portion 2224a that supports the rotation shaft 2232 so that the rotation shaft 2232 extends to the right in front view, and can cover the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 2232 that extends to the right. Is formed. A rotating shaft 2232 is pivotally supported by bearings 2242 fitted to both ends of the cylindrical portion 2224a. Further, the bag support member 2224 includes a board housing portion 2224b that opens to the left side of the bag and can store and hold the bag relay board 2244 for connection to the bag motor 2226 and the like.

  The center movable decorative body 2200 of this example has a front decorative member 2246 fixed on the surface so as to cover the front side of the heel support member 2224 with a relief-like idol, and the left side of the heel support member 2224. It further includes a left decorative member 2248 that is fixed so as to cover, and a right decorative member 2250 that is fixed so as to cover the right side surface side of the heel support member 2224. The front decorative member 2246, the left decorative member 2248, and the right decorative member 2250 cover the front and lower sides of the heel support member 2224, and both the left and right sides. The design is improved.

  The front decorative member 2246 in the center movable decorative body 2200 is provided with a through hole 2246a penetrating through a portion corresponding to the eye of an idol shaped in a relief shape, as shown in the figure. A lens member 2252 having translucency is disposed on the rear side of the front decoration member 2246, and a lens portion inserted into the through hole 2246a of the front decoration member 2246 on the front surface of the lens member 2252. 2252a is formed. Further, on the rear side of the lens member 2252, a heel support portion decoration board 2254 on which the LEDs 2122 are mounted at a position corresponding to the lens portion 2252 a on the front surface is provided. The LED 2122 of the heel support portion decoration board 2254 allows the decoration of the idol of the front decoration member 2246 to be lit and blinking.

  Further, the right decorative member 2250 in the center movable decorative body 2200 is formed with an outer cylindrical portion 2250a extending rightward so as to surround the cylindrical portion 2224a of the heel support member 2224 as shown in the figure. The outer cylindrical portion 2250a has an inner shape that is large enough to form a predetermined gap with respect to the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 2224a, and has a shape extending in the vertical direction. In addition to the cylindrical portion 2224a, a predetermined wiring cord for connecting the flange relay board 2244 and the flange portion 2202 can be inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (B), the first gear 2228 in the center movable decorative body 2200 is formed with tooth portions 2228a formed only within a rotation angle range of about 90 degrees and tooth portions 2228a. And a rotation detecting piece 2228b protruding radially outward from the non-existing portion. The center movable decorative body 2200 is further provided with a rotation detection sensor 2256 that is fixed to the heel support member 2224 and can detect the rotation detection piece 2228b of the first gear 2228. The rotation position of the collar 2202 can be detected by the rotation detection piece 2228b and the rotation detection sensor 2256.

  Further, the second gear 2230 has a tooth portion 2230a meshing with the first gear 2228 formed only within a rotation angle range of about 90 degrees, and a position separated by a predetermined distance in the circumferential direction across the plurality of tooth portions 2230a. And a pair of rotation restricting pieces 2230b protruding outward in the radial direction. On the other hand, the collar support member 2224 is disposed below the shaft center of the second gear 2230, that is, the shaft shaft of the rotating shaft 2232 in FIG. A first abutting portion 2224c that abuts against the movement restricting piece 2230b, and a second abutting portion 2224d that is disposed on the left side of the axis of the rotation shaft 2232 and abuts against the other rotation restricting piece 2230b of the second gear 2230 from above. And. The rotation angle of the second gear 2230, that is, the rotation shaft 2232, by the pair of rotation restricting pieces 2230 b in the second gear 2230 and the first contact portion 2224 c and the second contact portion 2224 d in the heel support member 2224. Are now regulated.

  Specifically, when the one rotation regulating piece 2230b of the second gear 2230 and the first contact portion 2224c of the heel support member 2224 are in contact, the flange portion 2202 is interposed via the rotation shaft 2232. In FIG. 116 (B), further rotation in the clockwise direction can be restricted. As a result, the striking surface 2206 of the collar 2202 rotates toward the liquid crystal display device 640 rather than the striking position (see FIG. 117B) that is as close as possible to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. Thus, the flange 2202 can be reliably rotated and stopped at the striking position. On the other hand, when the other rotation restricting piece 2230b of the second gear 2230 and the second contact portion 2224d of the heel support member 2224 are in contact with each other, the heel portion 2202 is interposed via the rotation shaft 2232 in FIG. B) In the middle, it is possible to restrict further rotation in the counterclockwise direction. This restricts the striking surface 2206 of the collar 2202 from rotating to the opposite side from the striking position (see FIG. 117 (A)) farther from the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. In this state, the flange 2202 can be reliably rotated and stopped at the swing-up position.

  The center movable decorative body 2200 is configured such that a handle 2234 that supports the collar 2202 is bent and extended in a “<” shape on a surface orthogonal to the rotation shaft 2232, as shown in the figure. The striking surface 2206 of the collar portion 2202 can support the collar portion 2202 so as to substantially coincide with the surface passing through the axis of the rotating shaft 2232 (see FIG. 117). In this manner, the handle portion 2234 is bent, so that the striking surface 2206 of the collar portion 2202 rotated by the rotation shaft 2232 can be brought as close as possible to the liquid crystal display device 640. Yes. Further, the turning range of the heel portion 2202 can be made as small as possible, and the heel portion 2202 can be relatively enlarged to attract the player's interest strongly.

  The center moving motor 2214 and the scissors motor 2226 in the center movable decorative body 2200 of this example are stepping motors that can be stopped at every predetermined rotation angle, and their rotational positions can be finely controlled. The moving position of the sliding body 2222 and the rotational position of the collar 2202 can be finely controlled.

  Further, the center movable decorative body 2200 is arranged on the rear side of the heel support member 2224 and is fixed to the lower side of the center base member 2210 so that a predetermined decoration is formed on the surface thereof. Is further provided. As shown in the figure, the center back decoration member 2258 is formed to extend in the left-right direction, and is a box-shaped upper decoration part 2258a and a plate that hangs downward from the rear end of the upper decoration part 2258a. And a lower decorative portion 2258b. The center back decoration member 2258 has a plating layer with a silver metallic luster formed on the surface of the upper decoration portion 2258a, and the lower half of the surface of the lower decoration portion 2258b is gold and the upper half of the surface is copper. Each of the plated layers having the metallic luster is formed, and a transparent layer (not shown) having translucency is formed between the plated layers.

  In addition, a cutout portion 2258c opening upward is formed in the upper decoration portion 2258a of the center back decoration member 2258. The center moving motor 2214 and the like can be inserted into the upper decorative portion 2258a through the notch 2258c, and the center moving motor 2214 and the like are inserted into the upper decorative portion 2258a, whereby the center moving motor 2214 is inserted. Can be concealed from being seen from the player side by the upper decoration portion 2258a. The center back decoration plate 2258 is arranged at a position substantially along the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 74 and the like).

  Further, the center movable decorative body 2200 includes a diffusing lens member 2260 disposed on the rear side of the upper half side having the transmission layer of the lower decorative portion 2258b in the center back decorative member 2258, and a rear side of the diffusing lens member 2260. And a center back substrate 2262 on which the plurality of LEDs 2122 are mounted. Although not shown, the diffusion lens member 2260 includes a plurality of small-diameter lenses so that light from the LEDs 2122 on the center back substrate 2262 can be diffused widely. The member 2258 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the center back substrate 2262 is divided into a center back left substrate 2262a and a center back right substrate 2262b.

  In the center movable ornament 2200, the pinion gear 2218 that meshes with the movement drive gear 2216 is rotated by the movement drive gear 2216 being rotated by the center movement motor 2214. At this time, the pinion gear 2218 has a larger diameter than the movement drive gear 2216, so that the rotation speed of the pinion gear 2218 is higher than that of the movement drive gear 2216. That is, the rotational speed of the pinion gear 2218 is faster than the rotational speed of the center moving motor 2214. Then, the sliding body 2222 having the rack gear 2220 that meshes with the pinion gear 2218 by the rotation of the pinion gear 2218 moves in a direction corresponding to the direction in which the pinion gear 2218 rotates. At this time, the sliding body 2222 provided with the rack gear 2220 is guided in a state where the sliding resistance is as small as possible by a roller 2236 rolling on the pair of guide rods 2208a, and smoothly on the pair of guide rods 2208a. Can be moved to. The sliding body 2222 is configured such that both ends in the longitudinal direction (both ends in the left-right direction) are in contact with the support portion 2210b of the center base member 2210, and both the moving ends in the left-right direction are brought into contact with the support portion 2210b. Are now regulated.

  Further, in the center movable decorative body 2200, the first gear 2228 fixed to the rotation shaft thereof is rotated by the rotation of the heel motor 2226 of the heel support 2224 fixed to the sliding body 2222. When the second gear 2230 that meshes with the first gear 2228 is rotated, the rotation shaft 2232 is rotated together with the second gear 2230, and the hook 2234 is fixed to the distal end side of the rotation shaft 2232. The part 2202 is configured to rotate. As shown in FIG. 117, the flange 2202 is moved up from the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 by rotating the hammer motor 2226 so that the striking surface 2206 becomes substantially horizontal (see FIG. )), And the striking surface 2206 is substantially vertical, the reciprocating rotation between the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 and the striking position close to the striking position (see FIG. 5B) can be performed. Note that the flange portion 2202 has an oscillating position and an impact position by the pair of rotation restricting pieces 2230b of the second gear 2230 and the first contact portion 2224c and the second contact portion 2224d of the support member 2224 for the flange. Rotation to the outside rather than between is regulated.

[Side movable decorative body in movable decorative body]
A detailed configuration of the side movable decorative body 2300 in the movable decorative body 2006 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123. FIG. 118 (A) is a perspective view of the left side movable decorative body as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 118 (B) is a perspective view of the left side movable decorative body as seen from an oblique rear. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the left side movable decorative body exploded and viewed from obliquely front, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view showing a side moving mechanism of the left side movable decorative body. FIG. 121 (A) is a perspective view of the right side movable decorative body viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 121 (B) is a perspective view of the right side movable decorative body viewed from an oblique rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the right side movable decorative body disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 123 is a perspective view showing a side moving mechanism of the right side movable decorative body.

  The side movable decorative body 2300 of the present embodiment includes a left side movable decorative body 2300L disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 640 in front view and a right side movable decorative body 2300R disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 640. It is configured. The left side movable decorative body 2300L and the right side movable decorative body 2300R have substantially the same member configuration although they have different shapes. Hereinafter, the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the right side movable decorative body 2300R are side movable. The decorative body 2300 will be described.

  The side movable decorative body 2300 of this example includes a side decorative member 2302 that extends in the vertical direction and has a predetermined three-dimensional decoration formed on the surface, a side moving mechanism 2304 that moves the side decorative member 2302 in the left-right direction, A side base member 2306 that supports the moving mechanism 2304 is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 119 and 122, the side decorative member 2302 in the side movable decorative body 2300 is a relief-shaped upper shape member 2308 which is shaped into a predetermined shape and has substantially translucency, and an upper decorative member 2308. A lower decorative member 2312 that is arranged on the lower side and is formed so that a plurality of transmissive portions 2310 having translucency are continuous with a part of the opening 2101 of the decorative member 2100 in the light emitting decorative body 2004; A diffusing lens member 2314 disposed on the rear side of the member 2308 and the lower decorative member 2312; a side decorative substrate 2316 disposed on the rear side of the diffusing lens member 2314 with the surface facing forward and a plurality of LEDs 2124 mounted on the surface; It is mainly equipped with.

  The upper decorative member 2308 has a green crocodile character with a yellow hammer as a relief in the left side movable ornament 2300L, and a flame in red on the right side movable ornament 2300R. It is formed in a relief shape. In addition, the lower decorative member 2312 has a metallic luster (silver) plating layer formed on the surface other than the transmission portion 2310.

  The diffusing lens member 2314 is provided with a lens portion 2314a in which a plurality of small-diameter lenses are arranged at positions corresponding to the upper decorative member 2308 and the transmitting portion 2310 of the lower decorative member 2312, and from the LED 2124 of the side decorative substrate 2316. Light is diffused widely, so that the upper decoration member 2308 and the transmission part 2310 of the lower decoration member 2312 can emit light in a planar shape.

  Further, the side decoration member 2302 is arranged on the lower side of the upper decoration member 2308 and has a side upper decoration substrate 2318 in which a plurality of LEDs 2124 are mounted on the surface facing upward, a diffusing lens member 2314 and a side decoration substrate 2316. A frame-shaped light-emitting partition member 2320 that is arranged at a position corresponding to the lower decorative member 2312 between and the plurality of LEDs 2124 on the side decorative substrate 2316 and shields between the lens portions 2314a of the adjacent diffusion lens members 2314. Are further provided. The side upper decorative substrate 2318 is arranged at a predetermined position by supporting the left and right ends thereof by a pair of substrate support portions 2314b formed so as to protrude forward on the front surface of the diffusing lens member 2314. ing. Further, the light emitting partition member 2320 is formed in a frame shape having an opening having substantially the same shape as the transmission portion 2310 of the lower decorative member 2312, and is emitted from the LED 2124 disposed on the rear side of a certain lens portion 2314a. The light is prevented from irradiating the other lens portion 2134a, and each lens portion 2314a can perform an independent light emission effect.

  The side decorative member 2302 is configured such that the upper decorative member 2308, the lower decorative member 2312, the side decorative substrate 2316, the side upper decorative substrate 2318, the light emitting partition member 2320, and the like are fixed to the diffusing lens member 2314. The diffuser lens member 2314 plays a role as a base of the side decoration member 2302.

  The side moving mechanism 2304 in the side movable decorative body 2300 is fixedly supported by the side motor base 2322 fixed to the upper front portion of the side base member 2306 and the side motor base 2322 so that the rotation axis faces the front-rear direction. Side motor 2324, pinion gear 2326 fixed to the rotation shaft of side motor 2324, and pinion gear 2326 and side motor base 2322 are fixed to side motor base 2322 so as to cover the front side, and a predetermined decoration is provided on the front side. The side motor base cover 2328, the side motor base cover 2328, and the side motor base 2322 are guided in the left-right direction and support the upper part of the diffusing lens member 2314 in the side decoration member 2302, and the pinion gear 23 A 6 meshed with the sliding member 2332 having a rack gear 2330 extending horizontally mainly provided.

  The side moving mechanism 2304 is formed on each of the side motor base 2322 and the side motor base cover 2328, and is disposed so as to face each other with the slide member 2332 interposed therebetween. The side moving mechanism 2304 extends in the left-right direction and has a flat upper surface. Guide portions 2322a and 2328a, two roller shafts 2334 that are inserted into and supported by bearing holes 2332a that extend above the guide portions 2322a and 2328a and are provided near the both ends in the left-right direction below the rack gear 2330 of the slide member 2332; And a plurality of rollers 2336 that are inserted into both ends of the roller shaft 2334 and roll on the guide portions 2322a and 2328a.

  In the side moving mechanism 2304, a plurality of rollers 2336 that are pivotally supported by a slide member 2332 via a roller shaft 2334 roll on the guide portions 2322 a and 2328 a of the side motor base 2322 and the side motor base cover 2328. Thus, the slide member 2332 is guided in the left-right direction in which the guide portions 2322a and 2328a extend. The guide portions 2322a and 2328a of the side motor base 2322 and the side motor base cover 2328 are disposed below the pinion gear 2326 fixed to the rotation shaft of the side motor 2324, and the side motor 2324 is disposed. Are fixed to the side motor base 2322 so that the rotation axis thereof is substantially in the same position as the center of the guide portions 2322a and 2328a in the left-right direction.

  The side moving mechanism 2304 includes a movement detection piece 2332b (see FIGS. 120 and 123) formed so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the slide member 2332, and a lower side of the side motor base 2322 by detecting the movement detection piece. And a side movement detection 2338 sensor fixed to the head. By detecting the movement detection piece 2332b of the slide member 2332 by the side movement detection sensor 2338, the movement position of the slide member 2332 in the left-right direction can be detected.

  The side movable decorative body 2300 of this example further includes a rectangular decorative plate 2340 extending in the vertical direction and fixed to the front surface of the side base member 2306 on the rear side of the side decorative member 2302. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the decorative plate 2340 is formed with a locking piece 2340a protruding outward in the left-right direction on one side in the left-right direction, and a side where the locking piece 2340a is formed. On the opposite side, an elastic locking piece 2340b protruding rearward is formed. Each of the locking pieces 2340a and the elastic locking pieces 2340b is formed two by two, and is arranged with a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction. It can be fixed to the base member 2306 for use. The decorative plate 2340 has a copper-colored metallic luster and has a predetermined pattern. When the side decorative member 2302 is moved by the side moving mechanism 2304, the side base member 2306 is moved from the player side. It can be made invisible.

  The side movable decorative body 2300 includes a plate-shaped guide plate 2342 fixed to the lower end of the diffusing lens member 2314 in the side decorative member 2302, and a guide in a state where the guide plate 2342 can move within a predetermined range with respect to the front-rear direction. It further includes a guide box 2344 that guides the plate 2342 in the left-right direction and is fixed to the lower portion of the side base member 2306. The guide box 2344 has a guide groove 2344a extending in the left-right direction with a predetermined amount of clearance in the front-rear direction with respect to the guide plate 2342. The guide groove 2344a allows the guide plate 2342a (side decoration) The lower end of the member 2302 can move within a predetermined range with respect to the front-rear direction.

  The side base member 2306 in the side movable decorative body 2300 of this example is formed by bending a sheet metal, as shown in the drawing, and a main body 2306a that extends long in the vertical direction with the surface facing forward, and a main body It mainly includes a guide support portion 2306b that is bent so as to be substantially horizontal from the lower end of the portion 2306a and supports the guide box 2344. The main body 2306a of the side base member 2306 is formed with a rectangular decorative plate locking hole 2306c into which the locking piece 2340a and the elastic locking piece 2340b of the decorative plate 2340 are inserted and locked. A plurality of through holes 2306d penetrating in the shape are formed. The side base member 2306 is reduced in weight by the through hole 2306d.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the main body 2306a of the side base member 2306 is formed such that the long side on the side away from the liquid crystal display device 640 is linearly arranged in the back box 2002 of the back unit 2000. In addition, the long side closer to the liquid crystal display device 640 is formed in a non-linear shape. The side base member 2306 further includes a reinforcing piece 2306e that is bent so as to extend forward from the long side of the main body 2306a that is formed in a straight line, and has substantially the same length as the main body 2306a. . The rigidity of the side base member 2306 is enhanced by the reinforcing piece 2306e.

  Note that a mounting hole, a positioning hole, and the like for fixing the side motor base 2322, the guide box 2344, and the like are formed at appropriate positions in the main body 2306a of the side base member 2306.

  In the side movable decorative body 2300 of this example, when the pinion gear 2326 is rotated by the side motor 2324 that is a stepping motor, the slide member 2332 having the rack gear 2330 that meshes with the pinion gear 2326 is moved to the left and right corresponding to the rotation direction of the pinion gear 2326. Will move in the direction. At this time, the slide member 2332 slides as much as possible by rolling a roller 2336 rotatably supported on the guide portions 2322a and 2328a of the side motor base 2322 and the side motor base cover 2328. It is guided in a state of low resistance and can move smoothly in the left-right direction. As the slide member 2332 moves, the side decoration member 2302 supported by the slide member 2332 moves in the left-right direction.

  The side movable decorative body 2300 is fixedly supported by the back box 2002 so that the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the right side movable decorative body 2300R are located near the left and right ends of the liquid crystal display device 640 in a front view, Each side moving mechanism 2304 moves in the left-right direction between an approach position in which the side decoration members 2302 move in the approaching direction and a separation position in which the side decoration members 2302 move away from each other. Can be done. When the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the right side movable decorative body 2300R are positioned at the approach positions, the side decorative members 2302 cover the liquid crystal display device 640 in the vicinity of the left and right ends. The display screen of the display device 640 becomes a state narrowed in the left-right direction. In addition, when the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the right side movable decorative body 2300R are positioned at the separated positions, both sides of the display screen covered by the respective side decorative members 2302 are less than the approach position, and the display screen is displayed. It will be in the state where it became wide in the left-right direction. Accordingly, the visible region of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be narrowed or widened by the movement of the side movable decorative body 2300.

  Further, the side movable decorative body 2300 includes a side decorative member 2302 having a side moving mechanism 2304 configured by a slide member 2332 having a side motor base 2322, a side motor 2324, a pinion gear 2326, a rack gear 2330, and the like. Only the upper part is supported, and the lower part is moved in the left-right direction with a predetermined play by the guide box 2344, and the side decoration member 2302 can be moved in a flared state. It can be done.

  The slide member 2330 is configured such that both ends in the left-right direction are restricted by both ends in the left-right direction coming into contact with the inner sides of the left and right side surfaces of the side motor base 2322 formed in a box shape. Yes.

[Under movable decorative body in movable decorative body]
A detailed configuration of the under movable decorative body 2400 in the movable decorative body 2006 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126. FIG. 124 (A) is a perspective view of the under movable decorative body viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 124 (B) is a perspective view of the under movable decorative body viewed from an oblique rear. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the under movable decorative body as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 126 is a perspective view showing an under movement mechanism of the under movable decorative body.

  The under movable decorative body 2400 of the present embodiment is disposed at the front center and the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 640 in the front view and at the approximate center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 131) and has a predetermined three-dimensional shape on the outer periphery. The under decoration member 2402 in which the decoration is formed, an under movement mechanism 2404 that moves the under decoration member 2402 in the vertical direction, and an under base member 2406 that supports the under movement mechanism 2404 are mainly provided. The under movable decorative body 2400 includes a lower position where the under decorative member 2402 is disposed below the liquid crystal display device 640 and a front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 (and the liquid crystal). The display screen of the display device 640 and a part where the under decoration member 2402 overlaps can be moved (moved up and down) between the ascending positions.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the under decorative member 2402 in the under movable decorative body 2400 includes an annular window frame-shaped decorative member 2408 having a three-dimensional decoration formed on the surface, and a ring inside the window frame-shaped decorative member 2408. And a transparent lens member 2410 inserted from the rear side so as to be closed. The window frame-shaped decorative member 2408 is formed with a substantially circular window portion 2408a, and the lens member 2410 is fixed from the rear side so as to close the window portion 2408a. In addition, character bodies 2408b formed with a crocodile motif are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the window portion 2408a so as to face each other.

  The under movement mechanism 2404 in the under movable decorative body 2400 includes an under movement motor 2412 that is fixed to the rear side of the under base member 2406 and whose rotation shaft projects to the front side of the under base member 2406, and an under movement motor. A pinion gear 2414 fixed to the rotation shaft 2412, a rack gear 2416 (see FIG. 126) meshing with the pinion gear 2414, and a rack member 2418 formed so as to extend in the vertical direction, are fixed to the upper portion of the rack member 2418. A sliding body 2420 that can be guided in the vertical direction by the under base member 2406 and supports the under decoration member 2402 is mainly provided.

  As shown in the drawing, the sliding body 2420 in the under movable decorative body 2400 includes an annular decorative body support portion 2420a that supports and fixes the under decorative member 2402, and an arm portion 2420b that extends in the left-right direction from the lower end of the decorative body support portion 2420a. , And a rack fixing portion 2420c that is disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction below the arm portion 2402b and the decorative body support portion 2420a and to which the upper portion of the rack member 2418 is bonded and fixed. The decorative body support portion 2420a of the sliding body 2420 has a concave portion 2420d that is recessed toward the rear side on the front surface side, and the outer periphery of the lens member 2410 of the under decorative member 2402 is fitted into the concave portion 2420. The lens frame 2410 is sandwiched between the window frame-shaped decorative member 2408 and the decorative body supporting portion 2420a by fixing the window frame-shaped decorative member 2408 to the decorative body supporting portion 2420 from the front side. An under decorative member 2402 is fixed to the portion 2420a. The sliding body 2420 is formed with through holes 2420e penetrating in the front-rear direction in the left and right arm portions 2420b. Note that a movement detection piece 2420f that extends in the vertical direction and protrudes rearward is formed on the rear side of the sliding body 2420 (see FIG. 126).

  The under movement mechanism 2404 has a support pin 2422 inserted into the through hole 2420e of the slide body 2420 so as to protrude rearward from the rear side of the slide body 2420, and a rear end of the support pin 2422 and is attached to the front end. It further includes a bushing 2424 having a flange portion 2424a projecting outward, and a washer 2426 attached to the support pin 2422 from the rear side of the bushing 2424 and having a larger diameter than the bushing 2424. In addition, a groove in which a stop ring (not shown) such as a C ring or an E ring can be attached is formed at both ends of the support pin 2422. By attaching a stop ring to both ends of the support pin 2422, The support pin 2422 can be prevented from coming out of the through hole 2420e, and the bush 2424 and the washer 2426 can be prevented from coming off from the support pin 2422.

  On the other hand, the under base member 2406 in the under movable decorative body 2400 is larger in the left-right direction than the sliding body 2420, and a long hole 2406a extending in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 2420e of the sliding body 2420. It is formed to penetrate. Then, the bush 2424 and the washer 2426 supported by the support pin 2422 of the under movement mechanism are disposed forward and backward with the long hole 2406a of the under base member 2406 interposed therebetween, so that the support pin 2422 is vertically moved by the long hole 2406a. Thus, the sliding body 2420 having the support pins 2422, that is, the under decorative member 2402 is guided in the vertical direction by the under base member 2406.

  The under movable decorative body 2400 further includes an under movement detection sensor 2428 that is fixed to the under base member 2406 and that can detect the movement detection piece 2420f of the sliding body 2420. By detecting the movement detection piece 2420f by the under movement detection sensor 2428, the movement position (upward position) of the sliding body 2420, that is, the under decoration member 2402 can be detected.

  Furthermore, the under movable decorative body 2400 further includes an under cover member 2430 that is fixed to the front side of the under base member 2406 and covers the front side of the under movement mechanism 2402. The under cover member 2430 and the under base member 2406 cover the lower part of the arm portion 2420b of the under movement mechanism 2402.

  In the under movable decorative body 2400 of this example, when the pinion gear 2414 is rotated by the under motor 2412 made of a stepping motor, the sliding body 2420 fixed to the upper portion of the rack member 2418 having the rack gear 2416 meshing with the pinion gear 2414 is It moves up and down corresponding to the direction of rotation of 2414. At this time, the sliding body 2420 moves smoothly in the vertical direction by the bush 2424 and the washer 2426 supported by the support pins 2422 being guided by the elongated holes 2406a extending in the vertical direction of the under base member 2406. Can be done. In addition, since the rack gear 2414 is disposed at substantially the center of the two long holes 2406a extending in the vertical direction, the force acts substantially equally on the left and right support pins 2422 inserted into the long holes 2406a. The sliding body 2420 can be moved up and down without rattling. As the sliding body 2420 moves, the under decorative member 2402 fixed to the sliding body 2420 can move in the vertical direction.

  The under movable decorative body 2400 can move in the vertical direction between a lowered position where the under decorative member 2402 is lowered most and an elevated position where the under decorative member 2402 is raised most. In the state where the under decorative member 2402 is lowered to the lowered position. The under decorative member 2402 is positioned below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the under decorative member 2402 is positioned at the front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 when the under decorative member 2402 is raised to the raised position. It has become. Although details will be described later, when the under decorative member 2402 is located at the raised position, there are other parts located on the rear side of the window portion 2408a of the window frame-shaped decorative member 2408 of the display screen in the liquid crystal display device 640 It is possible to display an image different from the display portion of the display part, and this makes it appear to the player as if the image is displayed on the window 2408a of the window frame-shaped decorative member 2408. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Note that the bush 2424 supported by the support pin 2422 is in contact with the upper end and the lower end of the long hole 2406a, so that both the upper and lower moving ends of the sliding body 2420, that is, the under decorative member 2402 are regulated. .

[Back box]
A detailed configuration of the back box 2002 in the back unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. FIG. 127A is a perspective view of the back box in a state where the liquid crystal display device or the like is supported as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 127B is a perspective view of the back box of FIG. 128 is a rear view of the back box of FIG. 127 viewed from the back, and FIG. 129 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view in which the back box of FIG. 127 is disassembled for each main member and viewed obliquely from the front.

  The back unit 2000 of this embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 640 that is fixedly supported from the rear side on the rear surface side of the rear wall 2014 in the back box 2002 so as to close the opening 2012 of the rear wall 2014, and a liquid crystal display device 640. A panel relay board 1352 that is fixed to the left side in the rear view and connected to the main control board 1350 and the like of the main control board box 624 and a panel relay board 1352 that is fixed to the right side in the rear view and connected to the panel relay board 1352. The first decoration control board box 1356 that houses the first decoration control board 1354 that controls the light emission effects and the movable effects of the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006, and the first decoration control of the first decoration control board box 1356. The light emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 200 are connected to the substrate 1354 and cooperate with the first decorative control substrate 1354. The second decoration control board 1358 for controlling the light emission effect, the movable effect, etc. is mainly accommodated, and the second decoration control board box 1360 having one end fixed to the back box 2002 and the other end fixedly supported by the liquid crystal display device 640 is mainly provided. ing.

  The back unit 2000 is fixed to the rear side of the rear wall 2014 in the back box 2002 on the left side in the rear view of the opening 2012, and supports a liquid crystal display device 640 on one side, and a liquid crystal support member 1370 is further provided with a liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 that is disposed on the opposite side of the opening 2012 and detachably supports the other side surface of the liquid crystal display device 640.

  The back box 2002 in the back unit 2000 of this example has a rectangular shape in front view, a rectangular tube-shaped outer tube portion 2016 extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width, and a flange shape extending outward from the front end of the outer tube portion 2016. A plurality of fixing portions 2018, a rear wall 2014 that closes the rear end opening of the outer cylinder portion 2016, and a substantially rectangular opening 2012 that penetrates the rear wall 2014. The fixing portion 2018 is formed with a fixing hole 2020 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and a positioning projection 2022 that protrudes forward. After the fixing portion 2018 is brought into contact with the rear surface side of the panel holder 600, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting holes 600j and 635a of the panel holder 600 and the panel back plate 635 through the fixing hole 2020. The box 2002, that is, the back unit 2000 can be attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 600.

  Further, the positioning protrusion 2022 is fitted into positioning holes 600k and 635b formed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 and the panel back plate 635 so that the relative position between the panel holder 600 and the back unit 2000 can be positioned. It has become. As shown in the figure, the positioning holes 600k and 635b are square holes with respect to the columnar positioning protrusion 2022, and the contact area between the positioning protrusion 2022 and the positioning holes 600k and 635b is reduced. The insertion resistance can be reduced, and the insertion can be easily performed.

  The back box 2002 has a mounting hole for mounting and fixing the light emitting decorative body 2004, the movable decorative body 2006, and the like on the front side of the rear wall 2014 and the inner peripheral side of the outer cylinder portion 2016, and a mounting hole at the tip. The provided bosses and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the back box 2002 of this example has a distance (depth) from the front surface to the rear wall 2014 in the range of 50 mm to 100 mm.

  Further, the back box 2002 includes a liquid crystal support shelf 2024 that extends in the left-right direction substantially along the lower side of the opening 2012 below the opening 2012 on the rear side of the rear wall 2014, and extends rearward by a predetermined amount. A plurality of positioning bosses 2026 arranged substantially along the side of the opening 2012 on the left side of the opening 2012 and projecting rearward to position the liquid crystal support member 1370, and the side on which the positioning boss 2026 is arranged are the opening. And a lock mechanism fixing portion 2028 that is arranged on the opposite side with a predetermined distance apart on the opposite side of 2012 and to which the liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 is fixed. By placing the lower end of the liquid crystal display device 640 on the liquid crystal support shelf 2024, the weight of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be supported.

  Further, the positioning boss 2026 can be inserted and fitted into a positioning hole (not shown) formed on the front side of the liquid crystal support member 1370 so that the liquid crystal support member 1370 can be positioned at a predetermined position, and the positioning boss 20 A mounting hole is formed at the center of the rear surface of 2026, and a predetermined mounting screw is screwed into the mounting hole from the rear side through the liquid crystal support member 1370, thereby fixing the liquid crystal support member 1370 to the rear side of the rear wall 2014. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 130, the liquid crystal support member 1370 is provided with a concave groove 1370a that is arranged at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction and opens on the front side and the left and right sides. The concave groove 1370a has a position and a size corresponding to the fixing piece 640a extending outward from one side surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. By fixing the liquid crystal support member 1370 to the back box 2002, the concave groove 1370a is obtained. And the rear wall 2014 of the back box 2002 is such that one fixed piece 640a of the liquid crystal display device 640 is restricted from moving in the vertical and left directions and further in the front and rear direction when viewed from the back. Although illustration is omitted, two fixing pieces 640 a are also provided on the other side surface of the liquid crystal display device 640.

  The liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 fixed to the lock mechanism fixing portion 2028 of the back box 2002 is slidable in the left-right direction by the lock base 1372a having a guide portion fixed to the lock mechanism fixing portion 2028 and extending in the left-right direction. And a lock slider 1372b supported by the robot. When the liquid crystal display device 640 is set on the rear surface of the back box 2002 while the lock base 1372a of the liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 is fixed to the back box 2002, the other fixed piece 640a (not shown) of the liquid crystal display device 640 is locked. The base 1372a is in a state where movement in the vertical and right directions is restricted in rear view, and the movement in the forward direction is restricted by the rear wall 2014 of the back box 2002. In this state, by sliding the lock slider 1372b toward the liquid crystal display device 640 along the lock base 1372a (leftward in rear view), the other fixed piece 640a is moved backward by the lock slider 1372b. Being regulated.

  Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 640 can be fixedly supported on the rear surface of the back box 2002 by the liquid crystal support member 1370 and the liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 fixed on the rear surface side of the back box 2002. Further, by sliding the lock slider 1372b of the liquid crystal lock mechanism 1372 away from the liquid crystal display device 640 (rightward in rear view), the other fixed piece 640a can be moved backward, and in this state, the liquid crystal display By moving the other fixed piece 640a side of the device 640 rearward and detaching the other fixed piece 640a from the lock base 1372a, the liquid crystal display device 640 is moved diagonally right rearward in rear view, The fixing piece 640a can be removed from the concave groove 1370a of the liquid crystal support member 1370 so that the liquid crystal display device 640 can be removed from the rear surface side of the back box 2002. That is, the liquid crystal display device 640 can be detachably supported with respect to the back box 2002.

  In the back box 2002 of this example, as shown in FIG. 130, a panel relay substrate fixing portion 2030 for fixing the panel relay substrate 1352 on the rear surface side of the rear wall 2014 and below the liquid crystal support shelf 2024, and a first A first decoration control board box fixing portion 2032 for fixing the decoration control board box 1356 is provided. In addition, a rectangular opening 2034 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed on the rear wall 2014 of the back box 2002 between the panel relay board fixing portion 2030 and the first decoration control board box 2032. It is possible to prevent the under motor 2412 of the under movable decorative body 2400 fixed in the back box 2002 from protruding rearward and coming into contact with the rear wall 2014 (see FIG. 104).

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 130, the back box 2002 is disposed above the opening 2012 on the rear surface side of the rear wall 2014 and supports the upper end of the second decoration control board box 1360. Is provided. The back box side support portion 2036 is formed in a hook shape with the upper side opened, and two back box side support portions 2036 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In addition, on the rear surface side of the liquid crystal display device 640, the lower end of the second decoration control board box 1360 is supported at a position below the back box side support portion 2036 while being fixed to the rear surface side of the back box 2002. A display-side support 640b is provided. The display side support portion 640b is formed in a box shape whose upper side is open. On the other hand, the second decoration control board box 1360 has a shaft-like locking portion 1360a that is disposed at the upper end portion and is supported by the back box side support portion 2036, and a display-side support portion 640b that is disposed at the lower end portion. And an elastic locking portion 1360b to be stopped. The locking part 1360a of the second decoration control board box 1360 is locked and supported by the hook-like back box side support part 2036 from above, so that it can be attached to and detached from the back box side support part 2036 and can be rotated. It has come to be supported. The elastic locking portion 1360b of the second decoration control board box 1360 is formed with a locking projection 1360d protruding downward on the lower surface of the elastic piece 1360c that can be elastically deformed in the vertical direction. The rearward movement of the lower end of the second decoration control board box 1360 is restricted by abutting with the rear wall inner side (front side) of the display side support portion 640b.

  Accordingly, the second decoration control board box 1360 is supported by the back box side support part 2036 of the back box 2002 and the display side support part 640b of the liquid crystal display device 640, so that the back box 2002 is supported. It is fixed to the rear side. The second decoration control board box 1360 may be fixed and supported on the rear surface side of the back box 2002 and the liquid crystal display device 640 after the liquid crystal display device 640 is fixed to the rear surface side of the back box 2002, or When the upper end of the second decoration control board box 1360 is previously supported by the back box support 2036 of the back box 2002 and the liquid crystal display device 640 is fixed to the back box 2002, the back box support 2036 is fixed. The liquid crystal display device 640 is fixed to the rear surface side of the back box 2002 with the lower end thereof being pivoted upward so that the second decoration control board box 1360 is substantially horizontal about The lower end portion of the decoration control board box 1360 is pivoted downward so that the decoration control board box 1360 becomes substantially vertical, and the elastic locking portion 1360b of the lower end portion is supported on the display side support of the liquid crystal display device 640. The second decorative control board box 1360 by engaged in part 640b may be fixed to the rear side of the back box 2002.

  Accordingly, when removing the liquid crystal display device 640 from the back box 2002, it is necessary to remove at least the elastic locking portion 1360b of the second decoration control board box 1360 from the liquid crystal side support portion 640b, and the liquid crystal display device 640 can be easily removed. It can be prevented from being removed. Further, the second decoration control board box 1360 is supported by the back box 2002 for the time being by supporting the locking part 1360a of the second decoration control board box 1360 with the back box side support part 2036 of the back box 2002. Even when the liquid crystal display device 640 is not fixed, the operation of the light emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006 provided in the back unit 2000 can be confirmed.

  The back box 2002 is connected to the rear surface side of the rear wall 2014 so that the base end side protrudes from the rear surface of the rear wall 2014 to the rear side, and the front end side is connected to the rear surface of the rear wall 2014 with a wiring cord ( (Not shown) is a free end that forms a gap that cannot pass, and a plurality of substantially linear cord holding pieces 2038 that can form a gap through which the wiring cord can pass are provided between the base end side and the distal end side. ing. These cord holding pieces 2038 are formed integrally with the back box 2002 and are arranged so as to hold the wiring cords substantially along the outer periphery of the opening 2012 of the back box 2002.

  The back unit 2000 of this example has a center movable decorative body 2200, a side movable decorative body 2300, and an under movable decorative body 2400 in the movable decorative body 2006 on the front side (inside the back box 2002) of the rear wall 2014 of the back box 2002 described above. The center base member 2210, the side base member 2306, and the under base member 2406 are fixed at predetermined positions, and the light emitting decorative body 2100 is fixed to the front side of the back box 2002 on the front side of the movable decorative body 2006. As a result, an integrated unit is configured.

<Control configuration with main board and peripheral control board>
A detailed control configuration by the main board 2500 and the peripheral control board 2600 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. FIG. 131 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the main board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 132 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the peripheral control board in the pachinko machine. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  The control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is roughly divided into a group of main boards 2500 including a main control board 1350 and a payout control board 1186, and peripheral control including a first decoration control board 1354, a second decoration control board 1358, and the like. It is shared by a group of substrates 2600. The group of main boards 2500 controls gaming operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral control boards 2600 has stage effects (light emitting decoration, movable effects, sound output, liquid crystal) Display etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 131, the main control board 1350 of the main board 2500 includes a CPU 2502 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2504 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2506 as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 2502 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 2504, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral control board 2600 and the payout control board 1186. The RAM 2506 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 1350. The main control board 1350 is connected to the power supply board 2530 via the relay terminal board 625, the payout control board 1186, and the power supply relay terminal board 2528, so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 2530. ing.

  The input interface of the main control board 1350 includes a general-purpose gate sensor 1612 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 1602 of the general-purpose gate 1600 and a gate portion of the special-purpose gate A1900 via the panel relay terminal board 1352. Special figure gate sensor A 1901 that detects the game ball that has passed, Special figure gate sensor B 1911 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion of the special figure gate B 1910, and general prize port sensor that detects the game ball that won the general prize opening 1702 2151, a first start port sensor 2152 that detects a game ball won in the first start port 1502, a second start port sensor 1516 that detects a game ball won in the second start port 1506, and a big winning port 1510 of the attacker unit 1500. Count sensor 1518 for detecting game balls that won a prize, and All winning opening winning number detection sensor 2508 for counting the prize number is connected.

  In addition, an operation sensor 2510 for detecting an operation state of an operation handle portion 461 operated by a player for driving a game ball into the game area 605 via a relay terminal board 625 is provided as an input interface of the main control board 1350. A body frame opening switch 2512 for detecting the opening state of the body frame 3 and a door frame opening switch 2514 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5 are also connected.

  On the other hand, the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 1352 includes an opening / closing solenoid 1512 that opens and closes a pair of movable pieces 1504 that can open / close the second starting opening 1506 and an opening / closing that can close the special winning opening 1510 of the attacker unit 1500. An attacker solenoid 1514 that opens and closes the member 1508 is connected, and a drive signal is output from the main control board 1350. The output interface of the panel relay terminal board 1352 includes a normal symbol display 1806, first and second special symbol displays 1802 and 1804, and a normal symbol memory number display via a normal symbol / special symbol display board 2516. 1812, first and second special symbol memory number indicators 1808, 1810 are connected, and from the main control board 1350, the normal symbol indicator 1806 provided in the symbol display device 1800 and the first and second special symbol displays. It is possible to output drive signals to the devices 1802, 1804, etc.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 1186 includes a CPU 2518 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2520 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2522 as a readable / writable memory. The payout control board 1186 processes the command signal input from the main board 1350 and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 and the firing motor 695 connected to the firing control board 2524. Accordingly, the payout motor 815 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch motor 695 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  The payout control board 1186 is connected to a ball break switch 778 that detects that there are no more game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720. Based on the detection of the ball break switch 778, the player In addition, the ball side is notified to the hall side (hall computer). The payout control board 1186 is connected to a full tank switch 916 for detecting that the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is full. Based on this, a notification that “please take out the game ball from the storage unit 381” is made.

  In addition, bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main board 1350 transmits a prize ball command, payout is made in response thereto. An ACK signal is returned from the control board 1186 to the main control board 1350.

  Further, an external terminal board 2526 is connected to the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186, and the winning state to the start opening 1502, 1506, the big winning opening 1510, etc., the fluctuation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, and the big hit Various information such as a special lottery result related to the execution of a game and a game state based on each lottery result such as a normal lottery result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the game facility.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 132, the peripheral control board 2600 has electronic components such as a CPU 2602, a ROM 2604, a RAM 2606, etc., and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components. . In addition, the peripheral control board 2600 is provided with a ROM 2608 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 2610 that outputs the sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 2608. It has been. The peripheral control board 2600 is provided with drive circuits 2611 for driving the center moving motor 2214, the scissors motor 2226, the side motor 2324, and the under motor 2412, respectively. Note that communication is performed in only one direction between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main board 2500 and the peripheral control board 2600 and the main control board 2500 to the peripheral control board 2600. Even if the command is sent, the reverse is not performed. The peripheral control board 2600 is also supplied with operating power from the power supply board 2530 via the power supply relay terminal plate 2528.

  Note that either the first decoration control board 1354 and the second decoration control board 1358 constituting the peripheral control board 2600 may be provided with the CPU 2602 or the sound source IC 2610, or only one of them may be provided with the CPU 2602 or the sound source IC 2610. You may do it.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to a liquid crystal display control board 2612 that controls display of effect images on the liquid crystal display device 640. A liquid crystal display device 640 is connected to the liquid crystal display control board 2612. The liquid crystal display control board 2612 processes a command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 2600, and outputs a drive signal to the liquid crystal display device 640. To do. More specifically, the liquid crystal display control board 2612 includes a CPU 2614, a RAM 2616, a ROM 2618, a VDP 2620, and an image ROM 2622.

  The CPU 2614 of the liquid crystal display control board 2612 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 2600 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 2620. The RAM 2616 provides a work area for the CPU 2614 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 2618 holds a program for the CPU 2614 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 2620 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 640. A register is provided in the VDP 2620, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 2620, setting information of various display functions, and the like. The CPU 2614 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be changed variously. The image ROM 2622 is a nonvolatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display designs, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 2600 and the liquid crystal display control board 2612 with each input / output interface. The liquid crystal display control board 2612 is also supplied with operating power from the power supply board 2530 via the peripheral control board 2600 and the power supply relay terminal plate 2528.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to a door frame decoration lamp 2624 provided in the door frame 5 and a speaker 163 via a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290. From the peripheral control board 2600, these lamps are connected. A drive signal is output to the speaker 163 and the like.

  The peripheral control board 2600 has operation buttons 330 including three push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c (signs are in order from the left) arranged on the front surface of the door frame 5 through the frame decoration relay terminal plate 290. These are connected to each other so that operation signals of the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c are inputted.

  Further, the peripheral control board 2600 includes the upper left board 2131L, the upper right board 2131R, the lower left board 2132L, the lower right board 2132R, the upper left board 2133L, and the upper right board as the light emitting decoration board 2130 in the light emitting decoration body 2004. The board 2133R, the left inner lower board 2134L, and the right inner lower board 2134R are connected to each other, and each LED 2120 is appropriately driven to emit light by outputting a driving signal from the peripheral control board 2600 to the LED 2120 mounted on each board. Thus, the light emitting decoration body 2004 can be decorated with light emission (light emission effect).

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to the center moving motor 2214, the center movement detecting sensor 2240, and the center back board 2262 of the center movable decoration body 2200 in the movable decoration body 2006, and the relay board 2244 for the bag. The bag motor 2226, the rotation detection sensor 2256, the bag support part decoration board 2254, and the bag decoration board 2626 are connected to each other. Then, signals from the center movement detection sensor 2240 and the rotation detection sensor 2256 are input to the peripheral control board 2600, and based on those signals, the sliding body 2222 that moves in the left and right directions by the center movement motor 2214, The heel portion 2202 that rotates as if the liquid crystal display device 640 is struck by the heel motor 2226 can be returned to the origin. Further, by outputting a driving signal from the peripheral control board 2600 to the LED 2122 mounted on the heel support decoration board 2254 or the heel decoration board 2626, each LED 2122 is appropriately driven to emit light, and the front decoration member 2246 or the center back decoration is obtained. The member 2258 can be decorated with light emission (light emission effect).

  Further, a side decoration board 2316, a side upper decoration board 2318, a side motor 2324, and a side movement detection sensor 2338 of the side movable decoration body 2300 in the movable decoration body 2006 are connected to the peripheral control board 2600. By outputting a drive signal to the LEDs 2124 mounted on the board 2316 or the side upper decoration board 2318, each LED 2124 can emit light appropriately, and the side decoration member 2302 can be illuminated (light emission effect). Yes. Further, when a detection signal from the side movement detection sensor 2338 is input to the peripheral control board 2600, the side decoration member 2302 that moves in the left-right direction by the side motor 2324 can be returned to the origin based on the signal. The peripheral control board 2600 can control the light emission effect and the movable effect independently of the left side movable decorative body 2300L disposed on the left side and the right side movable decorative body 2300R disposed on the right side. It is like that.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected with an under motor 2412 and an under movement detection sensor 2428 of the under movable decoration body 2400 in the movable decoration body 2006. A detection signal from the under movement detection sensor 2428 is connected to the peripheral control board 2600. Is input, the under decorative member 2402 moved in the vertical direction by the under motor 2412 can be returned to the origin based on the signal.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 2500 according to the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 144.

[About main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by the CPU 2502 mounted on the main control board 1350 of the main board 2500.

  In the main control board 1350, various game controls, presentation controls, and the like are realized by the CPU 2502 executing a predetermined program stored in advance in the ROM 2504 with a periodic timer interrupt every 4 ms.

  As shown in FIG. 133, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 2502 (see FIG. 131) executes power-on processing (step S10). In this power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 2506 (see FIG. 131) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM 2506 (data memory) of this embodiment has a backup area in which various control data are backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the processing area of the RAM 2506 to the backup area, and the temporarily saved data when the power is restored. Is read out into the processing area of the RAM 2506, so that a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the process of returning to the power supply stop state according to the backup data stored in the RAM 2506 (power recovery) Time processing). On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 2506 is deleted. And then, in the processing area of the RAM 2506, for example, the winning probability in the success / failure determination processing for the random number for the determination of the success / failure of the special symbol (hereinafter, “special random number” is used as a generic name of the first special random number and the second special random number) Various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as control data indicating the current game state, are written with respective initial parameters (initialization process). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  The current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600, and the display on the liquid crystal display device 640 as an effect display device is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of a power failure is stored in the RAM 2506 of the main control board 1350, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 after power recovery, so that even if there is a power failure, The game state displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 can be matched (the peripheral control board 2600 does not store the game state at the time of power failure). By the way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol and the special symbol corresponding symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 with the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started. Send information about the command. Immediately after transmitting the command, a command for the current game information is transmitted from the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 2600 each time. Thereby, even the peripheral control board 2600 can always grasp the current gaming state.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM erase switch that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM 2506 is on. That is, even when the RAM erase switch is on, the backup data stored in the RAM 2506 is erased. In addition, in the processing area of the RAM 2506, various control data necessary for the progress of the game such as winning probability in the determination process of special random numbers and control data indicating the current gaming state are written with respective initial parameters. (Initialization process).

  In the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 1350 (see FIG. 131) is activated when such an initialization process is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 2600 (FIG. 132). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 2600 that the main control board 1350 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 2506, and when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again, the power is supplied. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 2502 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop processing, the CPU 2502 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 2530. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board is equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 1350 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure warning signal is detected by the CPU 2502 mounted on the main control board 1350 in step S20, a power failure occurrence process is executed (step S40).

  The process at the time of the power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as “recovery”). This is a process of temporarily saving data to the backup area of the RAM 2506 in order to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  When the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number used in the game is updated. A random number update process is performed (step S30). The random numbers updated in the non-win / fail determination random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 134 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 2502 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, a checksum in the processing area of the RAM 2506 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored in the backup area of the RAM 2506 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 2506 before the power failure is properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 2502 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 2506 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 2502 prohibits access to the RAM 2506 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to an extremely short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 2502 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, the power interruption occurrence processing is entered due to a momentary power interruption, and even when the infinite loop shown in FIG.

  Note that a rewritable nonvolatile memory (such as EEPROM) may be provided instead of the backup area of the RAM 2506. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 2506 may be a backup area in which data is backed up by constantly supplying power. In this case, there is no need to save data stored in a specific area of the RAM 2506 to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 2502 mounted on the main control board 1350 of the main board 2500 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 2502 executes the process of steps S60 to S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, the above-described various sensors (general-purpose gate sensor 1612, special-purpose gate sensor A 1901, special-purpose gate sensor B 1911, first start-up port sensor 2151, second start-up port sensor 1516, count sensor 1518, and the like). ) Is executed to monitor the detection signal.

  In the success / failure determination random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated by the randomness determination random number update process is different from the random number updated by the random determination random number update process described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the validity determination random number update process may be updated in the non-correction determination random number update process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 1186 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 1806 is executed based on the signal detected from the general gate sensor 1612 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). Then, a process for performing opening / closing control of the pair of movable pieces 1504 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processes from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the start of the jackpot game are executed, and the game ball can be won in the big prize opening 1510. Processing for performing opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 1510 is executed.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 2600 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 2600 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 2502 in the non-win / fail determination random number update process (step S30) and the correct / fail determination random number update process (step S70) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, special random numbers, design random numbers, reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, round number determination random numbers, and normal symbol determination random numbers (hereinafter, “normal random numbers”) are used as various random numbers used in the game. And so on). Among these random numbers, a special random number, a design random number, a reach determination random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired based on the winning of a game ball at the start ports 1502 and 1506. The round determination random number is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 when the condition device is operating. The ordinary random number is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary gate 1600.

  The special random number is a random number that is used to determine whether or not to activate a conditional device that is one of the conditions for executing a jackpot game (determination of whether or not a winning game is won). In the present embodiment, when a game ball is won at the first start port 1502, any one random number is acquired from random numbers with a random number range of 0 to 633. If the low probability state in which the probability variation function does not operate, it is determined that the special lottery result of the first special random number is “special hit” when the acquired first special random number is 7 or 77. . Similarly, when a game ball is won at the second start port 1506, one random number is acquired from random numbers with a random number range of 0 to 633. If the probability is low, the acquired random value is 7 or When it is 77, it is determined that the special lottery result of the second special random number is “special hit”. In addition, if the probability change function is in a high probability state, the first special random numbers acquired based on the start winning to the first start port 1502 are 3 to 7, 73 to 77, 173 to 177, 273 to 277. When it is one of the above, it is determined that the special lottery result of the first special random number is “special hit”. Similarly, when a game ball is won at the second start opening 1506 in the high probability state, the second special random numbers acquired based on the start win are 3 to 7, 73 to 77, 173 to 177, and 273 to 277. When it is one of the above, it is determined that the special lottery result of the second special random number is “special hit”.

  In this embodiment, a gaming state in which both the probability changing function and the time-shortening function are operating is a high-probability time-shortening state, and a gaming state in which the probability-changing function is operating but the time-shortening function is not operating is a high-probability non-timeless state. Although the probability variation function is not activated, the gaming state in which the time shortening function is playing is a low probability short time state, and the gaming state in which both the probability variation function and the time shortening function are not activated is a low probability non-short state (normal gaming state). Called. Also, a generic term that includes both the high-probability short-time state and the high-probability non-time-short state is a high-probability state, and a generic term that includes both the low-probability short-time state and the low-probability non-time-short state is a low-probability state.

  The symbol random number is used to determine the winning type (whether it is a normal winning or a probable winning) when it is determined that the condition device is activated (the special lottery result is “special winning”). It is a random number (also used to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol change stops). In the present embodiment, when a game ball starts winning at the start ports 1502 and 1506, one of the design random numbers is acquired from among the random numbers of the design random number range 0 to 99. Of the 0 to 99 symbol random numbers, 63 of these are set to specific symbol random numbers (the remaining 37 symbols are normal symbol random numbers), and the gaming state when the symbol random numbers are acquired is low probability or high Regardless of the probability state, if the acquired symbol random number is one of the above specific symbol random numbers, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is a high probability state in which the probability variation function is activated. Controlled. In addition, regardless of whether the gaming state when the symbol random number is acquired is a low probability state or a high probability state, if the acquired symbol random number is one of the above normal symbol random numbers, After the game is executed, the gaming state is controlled to a low probability state in which the probability changing function is not activated.

By the way, in the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed, the time-saving function is operated from the time when the jackpot game is finished until the special lottery is performed 100 times (until the special symbol is changed 100 times). When the time reduction function is activated, the frequency of “ordinary hit” is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the pair of movable pieces 1504 that close the second start port 1506 is expanded for a predetermined time to be able to win a prize is increased. The following first to third methods can be considered as a method for increasing the frequency of “ordinary hits”, and any of them may be adopted.
A first method that increases the probability of determining “normal hit” when the time-shortening function is not activated than when the time-shortening function is activated.
・ When the time-shortening function is activated and when the time-shortening function is not activated, the probability of being judged as “ordinary hit” is the same, but when the time-shortening function is not activated The second technique is shortened when the time reduction function is activated.
A third method that employs both the first method and the second method.

  In the present embodiment, when the acquired symbol random number is one of the above-mentioned specific symbol random numbers, after the execution of the jackpot game is finished, a high probability that the probability variation function and the time-shortening function operate together. It is controlled by the CPU 2502 functioning as a game state control means in a short time state. On the other hand, when the acquired symbol random number is one of the above normal symbol random numbers, after the execution of the jackpot game is finished, the probability variation function does not operate and only the time shortening function operates so that the low probability time-short state is reached. Be controlled. However, as for the game state after the execution of the jackpot game, unless the specific condition is satisfied (the specific condition will be described later), the appearance is grasped whether it is the high probability short time state or the low probability short time state. It is kept secret so that it cannot be done (it is kept secret by the game state concealment means which is one function by the CPU 2602 of the peripheral control board 2600).

  As a mode of keeping secret the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is over, whether it is a high probability time short state or a low probability time short state, it is an opportunity to start the jackpot game execution start In the variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, the background image, etc. A mode in which the acquired symbol random number is the same or approximated when the specific symbol random number is a normal symbol random number corresponds to the case. Further, even after the execution of the jackpot game is finished, the special symbol variation pattern displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 and the decoration displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 are also displayed. The pattern variation pattern, the background image, and the like are the same or approximate in the high probability time-short state and the low probability time-short state.

  Regardless of whether the acquired symbol random number is a specific symbol random number or a normal symbol random number, the operation of the time reduction function will continue until a maximum of 100 special lotteries are performed unless the result of the special lottery is successful. When the special lottery is performed 100 times, the operation of the time reduction function is stopped.

  Therefore, when the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is in a high probability short-time state, both the probability variation function and the short-time function are operated until the special lottery is performed 100 times, and the special lottery result is won. After the special lottery is performed 100 times without any change, a high-probability non-time-short state in which only the probability-changing function among the probability-changing function and the time-shortening function is activated.

  In addition, when the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is in a low probability short-time state, only the short-time function of the probability variation function and the short-time function operates until the special lottery is performed 100 times, and the special lottery result After the special lottery is performed 100 times without winning, both the probability changing function and the time-saving function are not activated, and a low probability non-time-saving state is entered.

  However, as described above, the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is kept secret so that it cannot be visually recognized whether the gaming state is a high-probability time-short state or a low-probability time-short state. Therefore, even if the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is in a high probability short-time state, the gaming state after the special lottery is performed 100 times is a high probability non-short time state or a low probability non-short time state. Whether it is in a state is also kept secret.

  Whether or not the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is set to the high probability short-time state or the low probability short-time state is not necessarily determined based on the fact that the game ball is won at the start ports 1502 and 1506. For example, a design random number may be acquired and determined based on the passing of the game ball through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910. At this time, during the change of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, it is not determined whether the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is to be the high probability short-time state or the low probability short-time state. There is no reason to know whether the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is a high-probability short-time state or a low-probability short-time state from the variation pattern of the special symbol or decorative symbol in the variation that triggers the start . Therefore, the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 during the jackpot game, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 after the execution of the jackpot game, and the jackpot A mode in which the decorative pattern variation pattern and the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 after execution of the game are the same or similar in the high-probability time-short state and the low-probability time-short state By doing so, it is kept secret so that it cannot be visually recognized whether the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is the high probability short time state or the low probability short time state.

  The reach determination random number is a random number that is used for determining whether or not to perform a highly anticipated effect such as a reach effect without winning a jackpot (that is, losing) in the success / failure determination. The variation pattern random number is a random number used to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804. The round number determination random number is a random number used to determine the number of rounds when the jackpot game is executed in the round number determination process A (step S2009) or the round number determination process B (step S2012). The ordinary random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 1504 to be in an open state. When the time-shortening function is activated, the probability of winning in the determination process of normal symbols is increased, and thus the frequency with which the pair of movable pieces 1504 are released is increased. As a result, the second start is compared with the state where the time-shortening function is not activated. It becomes easy for a game ball to win the mouth 1506.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern of the decorative design controlled by the liquid crystal display device 640 may be determined by a random number for variation pattern, and the CPU 2602 mounted on the peripheral control board 2600 or the CPU 2614 mounted on the liquid crystal display control board 2612. (Both may be determined according to FIG. 132). Further, the random number for the variation pattern is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the random number for reach determination.

  Among these random numbers, in the success / failure determination random number update process in step S70, whether or not the pair of movable pieces 1504 are controlled to be opened and closed in an open state in which special random numbers, symbol random numbers, and game balls related to the operation of the condition device are easily received Update ordinary random numbers related to Here, the normal random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit game and whether to open / close the pair of movable pieces 1504 is updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability determined to activate the conditional device, probability determined to control opening / closing of the pair of movable pieces 1504) in each random number in a predetermined period is made constant (ie by aiming, etc.) Occurrence of bias in the probability) and a player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-win / fail determination random number update process, the reach determination random number and the variation pattern random number irrespective of the occurrence of the winning game and the normal symbol display result are updated. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 1350 are not limited to those described above. In the non-win / fail determination random number update processing, whether or not the counter for updating the pass / fail determination random number makes one round starts counting next. The initial value determining random number and the like for determining the initial value of the random number for determination are also updated.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

  In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is completed, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120), Assuming that the change start condition (predetermined start condition) is satisfied, the change start process (step S130) is executed.

  In the variation start process (step S130), setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol is performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not to activate a condition device that is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), it is determined that the change start condition (predetermined start condition) is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 and the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 is determined, and the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. Corresponding variable time (the time from the start of the special symbol variable display to the stop display in either the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined that it is a win in the fluctuation start process (step S130) described later (more specifically, if the special win flag is turned on in step S1312), the process selection flag is set. The process selection flag is updated to “0”, and the process selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a round number lottery process (step S200) is executed. As will be described in detail later, before starting the jackpot game, the number of rounds required to execute the jackpot game is determined, the determined number of rounds is set, and the processing flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, the CPU 2502 determines whether the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S220) is performed and a jackpot game (jackpot game process) is executed (jackpot game execution means).

  In the special electric utility big hit control process, first, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 1508 per round and the maximum number of winning balls of the game balls per round are set. Thereafter, the jackpot game over the number of rounds set in step S2010 is executed based on the operation mode of the opening / closing member 1508 per round set in this way and the maximum number of winning balls of the game balls per round. In this way, the CPU 2502 can immediately start executing the jackpot game simply by setting the operation mode of the opening / closing member 1508 per round and the maximum number of winning balls of the game balls per round. .

  Note that “the operation mode of the opening / closing member 1508 per round” is, for example, when the opening / closing member 1508 is opened and closed once per round, for example, when the opening / closing member 1508 is opened / closed to the big prize opening 1510. This corresponds to the time required to facilitate the winning of the game balls. Further, when the opening / closing member 1508 is opened / closed a plurality of times per round, for example, the number of opening / closing operations of the opening / closing member 1508 and the opening / closing time of the opening / closing member 1508 are determined as follows. Corresponds to “operation mode”.

  In addition, when ending the jackpot game, the CPU 2502 determines whether or not to activate the probability changing function (that is, whether or not the symbol random number acquired based on the winning to the start ports 1502 and 1506 is a special symbol random number). ), And if it is determined that the probability variation function is to be activated, the probability variation function is activated. In addition, the time-shortening function is activated and the number of time-shortenings (100 in this embodiment) is set, and the special hit flag is turned OFF with the end of the big hit game. Further, it is determined whether or not a special figure B flag, which will be described later, is in an ON state. When the special figure B flag is in an OFF state (that is, the game is executed by the special figure A gate sensor 1901 while the condition device is operating). When the passage of the sphere is detected), the secret flag is turned on and the processing flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, when a special figure B flag to be described later is in the OFF state, the secret trap flag is set in the OFF state.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned secret trap flag is in the ON state, it is a secret so that it cannot be visually recognized whether the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is a high probability short time state or a low probability short time state Be trapped.

  Then, when any of the various processes from step S130 to step S240 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[About the 1st and 2nd starting prize winning process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second start-up prize winning processes.

  In the first / second start opening winning process, the CPU 2502 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 1506 (step S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 1516 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 1516, it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 1506 (YES in step S1101). If no game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 1516, it is determined that no game ball is won at the second start port 1506 (NO in step S1101).

  When the CPU 2502 determines in step S1101 that the game ball has won the second starting port 1506, the CPU 2502 acquires various data (second special random number, symbol random number, variation pattern random number, special symbol type). Next, as the processing of step S1102, it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols is less than the upper limit of 4.

  If it is determined in step S1102 that the number of reserved special symbols is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 2502 next performs a second reserved storage process in step S1103. In the process of step S1103, the acquired various data (second special random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) are stored in a second special symbol random number storage area (not shown). At the same time, the process proceeds to step S1104 when the number of reserved special symbols is added by one. The second special symbol random number storage area has a second special random number storage area, a symbol random number storage area, and the like, and various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second start port 1506 are: It is stored in each storage area in the second special symbol random number storage area.

  However, when it is determined in step S1101 that a game ball has not won in the second starting port 1506 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the number of reserved special symbols reaches the upper limit of 4. If it is determined that the process is present (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104 without performing the process in step S1103.

  In step S1104, the CPU 2502 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 1502 (step S1104). Specifically, the presence or absence of detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 2152 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 2152, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 1502 (YES in step S1104). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that no game ball has been won in the first start port 602 (NO in step S1104).

  When the CPU 2502 determines in step S1104 that a game ball has won the first start port 1502, the CPU 2502 acquires various data (first special random number, symbol random number, variation pattern random number, special symbol type). Then, as the processing of step S1105, it is determined whether or not the number of first special symbols held is less than the upper limit of 4.

  If it is determined in step S1105 that the number of first special symbol holds is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 2502 next performs a first hold storage process in step S1106. In the process of step S1106, the acquired various data (first special random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) are stored in a first symbol random number storage area (not shown). At the same time, when the number of first special symbols on hold is added, the first and second start-up prize winning processes are terminated. Similar to the various data acquired by winning the game ball at the second starting port 1506, the various data acquired by winning the game ball at the first starting port 1502 is the random number for the first special symbol. It is stored in each storage area in the storage area.

  However, when it is determined in step S1104 that the game ball has not won in the first start port 1502 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the number of reserved first special symbols reaches the upper limit of 4. When it is determined that the first start port winning process is not performed, the first and second start-up winning process is terminated (step S1105: NO).

  When it is determined in step S1102 that the number of reserved second symbol symbols is the upper limit of 4, the various data acquired in the process of step S1101 is discarded. Similarly, when it is determined in step S1105 that the number of reserved first special symbols is the upper limit of 4, various data acquired in the process of step S1104 will be discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second starting port 1506, acquisition of various data (second special random number, symbol random number, variation pattern random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1101. What is necessary is just to perform between step S1101-step S1103. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1101, it is possible to acquire various data after determining in step S1102 that the number of reserved second special symbols is less than the upper limit, or in step S1103, the second reserved You may make it acquire by a memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won at the first start port 1502, it is not necessary to acquire various data (first special random number, symbol random number, variation pattern random number, special symbol type) in step S1104. There is no problem between step S1104 and step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining in step S1105 that the number of reserved first special symbols is less than the upper limit value, or in step S1106, the first reserved You may make it acquire by a memory | storage process.

  Thus, in this embodiment, after performing the winning process (steps S1101 to S1103) to the second starting port 1506, the winning process (steps S1104 to 1106) to the first starting port 1502 is performed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process to the first starting port 1502 is executed, the winning process to the second starting port 1506 may be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability for winning is the same regardless of whether the winning / failing determination process using the first special random number or the winning / failing determination process using the second special random number is performed. Not limited to this. For example, the winning probability when the success / failure determination process for the first special symbol is performed may be different from the winning probability when the success / failure determination process for the second special symbol is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is no difference between the winning probability in the success / failure determination process for the first special symbol and the winning probability in the success / failure determination process for the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning probability in the success / failure determination process for the first special symbol may be set relatively higher than the winning probability in the success / failure determination process for the second special symbol, or vice versa.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 2502 first has the number of random numbers (starting storage number) stored in the special symbol random number storage area being zero. Whether or not (step S1301). The number of starting memories stored in the special symbol random number storage area being zero means that the number of reserved special symbols and the number of second special symbols are both zero. In the special symbol random number storage area, the number of reserved special symbols and the order in which they are reserved are stored separately from the number of reserved special symbols and the order in which they are reserved.

  If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), the special symbol random number storage area is shifted (step S1302). This shift processing is performed by the first special random number acquired based on winning of the game ball at the first starting port 1502 and the first special number acquired based on winning of the game ball at the second starting port 1506. This is a process for reading one of the two special random numbers from each storage area in the special symbol random number storage area and storing the read random number in a processing area (not shown).

  More specifically, in the shift processing according to this embodiment (step S1302), first, the second special random number is stored in the area (second area) where the second special random number is stored in the special symbol random number storage area. A determination is made as to whether it is stored. As a result, when it is determined that the second special random number is stored in the second area, the first special random number is stored in the special symbol random number storage area (first area). Regardless of whether or not the special random number is stored, only the second special random number of the first special random number and the second special random number is read from the second area. Accordingly, the second special random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1506 is later than the first special random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1502. Even if it is acquired, it is read out from the second area preferentially over this first special random number, and is further subjected to a success / failure determination process to be described later. Note that when both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored, the second special random number is given priority over the first special random number determination process. It does not depend on whether the function is activated or not.

  However, at this time, when two or more second special random numbers are stored in the second area, the second special random number stored earliest in the second area among these two or more second special random numbers is stored. Only random numbers are read. Then, the second special random number read out from the second area in this way is stored in the processing area, and further used for determining whether or not the winning device is won with the condition device. Whether or not the second special symbol is won is determined in the order in which the game balls are won in 1506.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the second special random number is stored in the second area, it is determined whether or not the first special random number is stored in the first area. However, in this embodiment, since the shift process is performed on the condition that the starting storage number is not 0 in step S1301, it is not determined that the second special random number is stored in the second area. In this case, the first special random number is stored in the first area. Therefore, when it is not determined that the second special random number is stored in the second area, it is determined that the first special random number is stored in the first area, and the first special random number is received from the first area. Read out.

  However, also in this case, when two or more first special random numbers are stored in the first area, the first special random number stored in the first area among these two or more first special random numbers Only random numbers are read. Then, the first special random number read out from the first area in this way is stored in the processing area, and is further used for determination processing whether or not the winning operation is accompanied by the operation of the condition device. Whether or not the first special symbol is won is determined in the order in which the game balls are won at the start port 1502.

  When it is determined in step S1301 that the start memory number is 0 (YES in step S1301), such a process (step S1302) is not performed, and the variation start process is terminated at that time.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 2502 determines the type (whether it is the first special random number or the second special random number) stored in the processing area (step S1303). If the type is the second special random number (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned on (step S1304), and the number of reserved special symbols is subtracted by one ( Step S1305) and the process proceeds to Step S1308. On the other hand, if the type stored in the processing area is the first special random number (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1306), and the number of first special symbols held is reduced to one. (Step S1307), the process proceeds to step S1308. Note that the random numbers stored in the special symbol random number storage area are erased when read from the special symbol random number storage area.

  In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the gaming state (that is, the high probability state) in which the probability changing function is operating (step S1308). Here, if the gaming state is that the probability variation function is operating (YES in step S1308), the first probability variation special figure determination table or the second probability variation special figure determination table is selected (step S1309). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is in the ON state, the first probability variation special figure determination table is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is in the ON state, the second certain probability variation figure determination table is selected.

  On the other hand, if the probability changing function is not activated in step S1308 (NO in step S1308), the first normal special figure determination table or the second normal special figure determination table is selected (step S1310). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is ON, the first normal special symbol determination table is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is ON, the second normal special symbol determination table is selected.

  The first probability variation special table determination table is used when performing the determination processing (step S1311) for the first special random number acquired based on the winning to the first start port 1502 in the gaming state in which the probability variation function is operating. It is a table that is referred to. The second probability variation special table determination table is used when performing the determination processing (step S1311) for the second special random number acquired based on the winning to the second start port 1506 in the gaming state in which the probability variation function is operating. It is a table that is referred to. The first normal special figure determination table is used for performing the determination process (step S1311) for the first special random number acquired based on the winning to the first start port 1502 in the gaming state where the probability changing function is not activated. It is a table that is referred to. The second normal special figure determination table is used when performing the determination process (step S1311) for the second special random number acquired based on the winning to the second start port 1506 in the gaming state where the probability changing function is not activated. It is a table that is referred to.

  In step S1311, the determination is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the first and second special random numbers stored in the processing area.

  Note that the success / failure determination process (special lottery process) in step S1311 is performed as a control process of the CPU 2502 functioning as the first special symbol determination unit if the first special symbol flag is ON. On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is in the ON state, it is performed as a control process of the CPU 2502 functioning as the second special symbol determination unit.

  In step S1311, the first special random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1502 or the second special random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1506 is If it is determined that it is a win (YES in step S1311), the special hit flag corresponding to the type of the random number for determination of success / failure is turned on (step S1312). That is, when it is determined that the first special random number is winning, the first special symbol flag is turned on, and when it is determined that the second special random number is winning, the second special symbol flag is set. Turn on. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “1” (step S1313), and the variation start process is terminated.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The variation pattern setting process is performed according to the determination result of the first special symbol acquired based on the winning at the first starting port 1502 or the second special symbol acquired based on the winning at the second starting port. This is a process of setting a variation pattern. In this process, the CPU 2502 first determines whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1510). That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation is based on a right / fail determination random number extracted based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 2152.

  When CPU 2502 determines in step S1510 that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1510), CPU 2502 determines whether or not the special hit flag for the first special symbol is ON (step S1520). That is, it is determined whether or not it is derived that the winning is made when the fluctuation of the first special symbol this time is stopped, and whether or not the special winning flag corresponding to the first special symbol is turned on in step S1312. . If the special special flag for the first special symbol is ON (YES in step S1520), the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1530), and then the variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1530). Step S1580). On the other hand, if the special special flag for the first special symbol is not ON (NO in step S1520), the first special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1540), and then the variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1540). S1580).

  If the CPU 2502 determines that the first special symbol flag is not in the ON state in the special hit flag determination process in step S1510 (NO in step S1510), the CPU 2502 determines whether or not the second special symbol flag is in the ON state ( Step S1550). That is, it is determined whether or not to derive a winning when the variation of the second special symbol this time is stopped, and whether or not the special winning flag corresponding to the type of the second special symbol is turned on in step S1312. to decide. Here, if the special special flag for the second special symbol is ON (YES in step S1550), the variation pattern setting process for the second special symbol is performed (step S1560), and then the variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1550). S1580). On the other hand, if the special special flag for the second special symbol is not ON (NO in step S1550), the second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1570), and then the variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1550). S1580).

  In the variation pattern determination process in step S1580, the CPU 2502 determines a variation pattern based on the variation pattern table set in each variation pattern table setting process (steps S1530, 1540, 1560, 1570). Next, when the variation pattern is determined in step S1580, the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1590), and the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1600). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1610), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  The CPU 2502 controls the variation pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 based on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process. In the present embodiment, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 depending on the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs.

[Round lottery processing]
Next, the round number lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the round number lottery process.

  In this round number lottery process, the CPU 2502 first determines whether or not the variation of the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 has stopped (step S2001). .

  When CPU 2502 determines that the variation of the special symbol has stopped (YES in step S2001), it activates the condition device (step S2002). This round number lottery process is a process that is performed when the process flag is 3, that is, a process that is performed when the special winning flag is in the ON state in step S1312, and therefore the first special symbol display. The special symbol variably displayed on the device 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 is stopped in a mode (winning symbol) indicating that it is a win.

  When the condition device is activated, the CPU 2502 first controls the gaming state to a low probability non-time saving state in which neither the probability changing function nor the time saving function is activated. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2003). When it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S2003), the probability variation function is stopped (step S2004). . Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is in operation (step S2005). When it is determined that the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S2005), the time reduction function is stopped (step S2006). If it is determined in step S2003 that the probability variation function is not in operation (NO in step S2003), the process in step S2004 is skipped. At this time, the state where the probability changing function is not activated is maintained. Similarly, when it is determined in step S2005 that the time reduction function is not operating (NO in step S2005), the process of step S2006 is skipped. At this time, the state where the time reduction function does not operate is maintained.

  In this way, after being controlled to the low probability non-short-time state based on the operation of the condition device, the CPU 2502 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the special figure gate A1900, that is, the special figure gate sensor A1901. Whether or not is detected is determined (step S2007).

  When the CPU 2502 determines in step S2007 that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate A1900, the CPU 2502 turns on the special figure A flag and determines the number of rounds in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 1508 is controlled in the big hit game. The round decision random number A is acquired (step S2008). This round determination random number A is acquired from any one of random number widths 0 to 255, and the CPU 2502 determines the number of rounds for determining the number of rounds in the jackpot game based on the acquired round determination random number A. Processing A is performed (step S2009).

  In the round number determination processing A (step S2009), the CPU 2502 determines the number of rounds in the jackpot game by referring to the round determination table A using the acquired round determination random number A. When determining the number of rounds in the jackpot game with reference to this round determination table A, if the obtained round determination random number A is one of 0 to 255, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is determined to be 8 rounds (That is, it is determined to be 8 rounds with a probability of 100%).

  In this way, when a game ball passes through the special gate A1900 on condition that the condition device is operating, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is always 8 as long as the gaming machine is operating normally. To be determined. If the obtained round decision random number A is not any of 0 to 255, error processing is performed without proceeding to step S2010.

  In step S2007, when CPU 2502 determines that the game ball has not passed through special figure gate A1900 (NO in step S2007), whether or not the game ball has passed through special figure gate B1910, that is, a special figure gate sensor. It is determined whether or not a game ball is detected in B1911 (step S2010).

  When CPU 2502 determines that the game ball has passed through special figure gate B1910 in step S2010 (YES in step S2010), it sets the special figure B flag to the ON state and controls the opening / closing operation of opening / closing member 1508 in the big hit game. A round determination random number B used for determination of the number of rounds is acquired (step S2011). This round determination random number B is acquired from any one of random number widths 0 to 255, and the CPU 2502 determines the number of rounds for determining the number of rounds in the jackpot game based on the acquired round determination random number B. Process B is performed (step S2012).

  In the round number determination process B (step S2012), the CPU 2502 determines the number of rounds in the jackpot game by referring to the round determination table B using the acquired round determination random number B. According to this round determination table B, if the acquired random number is one of 198 to 255, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is determined to be 15 rounds, and the acquired random number is one of 0 to 197. If there is, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is determined to be 4 rounds.

  When the CPU 2502 determines the number of rounds in the jackpot game by referring to the round determination table B using the round determination random number B, whether the acquired random number is any of 198 to 255 first. Judge whether or not. If the obtained round determination random number B is any one of 198 to 255, the number of rounds is determined to be 15 rounds.

  On the other hand, in the above round number determination process B (step S2012), when it is determined that the acquired round determination random number B is not one of 198 to 255, it is one of 0 to 197. Determine whether. If the obtained round determination random number B is any of 0 to 197, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is determined to be 4 rounds. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2012, and the processing flag is updated to “4”. If the obtained round decision random number A is not any of 0 to 197 (that is, not 0 to 255), error processing is performed without proceeding to step S2010.

  When the number of rounds is determined in step S2009 or step S2012, the CPU 2502 sets the number of rounds determined in step S2009 or step S2012 so that a jackpot game corresponding to the determined number of rounds is executed. Then, the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S2011).

  Although the condition device is activated in step S2002, the passage of the game ball to the special figure gate A1900 is not detected (NO in step S2007), and the passage of the game ball to the special figure gate B1910 is also detected. If not (NO in step S2010), the progress of the game is stopped unless the passing of the game ball to at least one of the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 is detected, and the process proceeds to the next step. I can't. That is, a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game is not executed smoothly until the end, but is temporarily stopped in the middle stage of the series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game.

  Thus, on condition that the condition device is operating, if the game ball passes through the special figure gate B 1910 without passing through the special figure gate A1900, the probability is 93/256. A round jackpot game is executed, and a four-round jackpot game is executed with a probability of 163/256.

-
In this embodiment, the average number of prize balls that can be paid out to a player per round is the same for all “per 4R”, “per 8R”, and “per 15R”. . In other words, regardless of whether “per 4R”, “per 8R”, or “per 15R” (regardless of the type of hit), the operation of the attacker unit 1500 (specifically, the opening / closing member 1508) as one round The aspect is the same. Accordingly, the degree of profit for the player differs depending on which jackpot game is executed among “per 4R”, “per 8R”, and “per 15R”.

  However, as described above, the average value of the number of prize balls that can be paid out to the player per round is the same, and the number of rounds is changed according to the type of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot game executed It is not limited to a mode in which the degree of profit for a player differs depending on the type of game, and a prize ball that can be paid out to the player per round with the same number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot game The degree of profit for the player may be changed by changing the average value of the numbers. For example, instead of the above “per 4R”, “per 8R” and “per 15R”, the maximum operation time of the attacker unit 1500 is 2000 msec and the maximum winning number is 3 balls “A per 15R”, and the maximum operation time of the attacker unit 1500 Even if there are three types of big wins, “B per 15R” with 5000 msec and maximum winning number of 6 balls, and “C per 15R” with maximum operating time of 30000 msec and maximum winning number of 10 balls with attacker unit 1500 Although the win is a big hit of 15 rounds, the average value of the number of winning balls that can be paid out to the player differs depending on the type of the big win.

  By the way, the game ball passage determination (step S2003) to the special figure gate A1900 is performed earlier than the game ball passage determination (step S2006) to the special figure gate B1910. From the point of view. That is, for example, even if a game ball is fired in the area on the right side of the center actor 1400 against the intention of the player trying to fire the game ball toward the left side of the center actor 1400, the condition When the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 pass at the same time while the apparatus is operating (it is determined that the game ball has passed both the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 within the same process) Case), it is ensured that the 8-round jackpot game is played. Thus, contrary to the will of the player, it is possible to avoid making the player angry by executing a 4-round jackpot game with less expected value to be paid out as a winning ball than an 8-round jackpot game. . In addition, a player who has passed a game ball to the special figure gate A1900 almost simultaneously with the passage of the game ball to the special figure gate B1910 even though the special ball B1910 tried to pass the game ball. However, although the possibility of a 15-round jackpot game is eliminated, at least 8 rounds of a jackpot game are executed, so it seems that the player will not be offended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the success / failure determination process using the first and second special random numbers acquired based on the winning at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506 (step S1311). Even if it is determined that a win is made (even if it is determined that the special lottery result is a win), the jackpot game is not immediately executed.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the lottery process related to the execution of the jackpot game includes a special symbol determination process (step S1311) as a special lottery process and a stop symbol determination process (not shown). ) And the round number determination process (step S2009, step S2012). When the result of the special symbol success / failure determination process (step S1311) related to the operation of the condition device is correct, these series of processes are performed. Instead of unilaterally (i.e., automatically) by the control on the gaming machine side regardless of the player's intention as in the conventional gaming machine, only a part of the series of processing is performed on the gaming machine side. Control is performed, and the player's intention can be reflected in the remaining processing. That is, the lottery process related to the jackpot execution can be stopped in the course of the lottery process by the player's intention instead of unilaterally executing the lottery process by the control of the pachinko machine 1 side. In other words, even if the condition device is activated, it does not proceed to the next processing stage unless the player fires the game ball and passes it through the special figure gate A1900 or special figure gate B1910.

  For example, when a special symbol win / fail determination process (step S1311) or a stop symbol determination process, which is a part of a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game, is performed, a variation pattern setting process (step S150) and a variation Even if the process (step S180) is performed, unless the round number determination process (step S2009, step S2012) which is a part of a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game is performed by the player's intention, The control beyond that does not proceed and the jackpot game is not executed. That is, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, a “winning symbol” indicating that the result of the success / failure determination process (special lottery result) is a win is displayed (YES in step S2001), and the condition device is activated (step Even if S2003), the round number determination process (step S2009, step S2012) is not performed unless the player interrupts the launch of the game ball and passes the game ball to one of the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910. The lottery process relating to the execution of the jackpot game is interrupted. Thereby, in spite of the fact that the condition device is operating, the round number determination process, which is one of the lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game, is unprocessed, and the process related to the outgoing ball such as the round number determination process. It is possible to enjoy the time until the jackpot game is executed while leaving

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1311 that the game is lost in the success / failure determination process (special lottery process), since the condition device does not operate, has the game ball passed through the special figure gate A1900 or special figure gate B1910? Regardless of whether or not the lottery process for the execution of the jackpot game is not interrupted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the result of the determination process is “special hit” and the symbol random number is one of the specific symbol random numbers (that is, “probability hit”), The game state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to a high probability short-time state in which both the probability changing function and the short-time function are activated. The timing when the operation of the probability changing function and the time shortening function is started and the timing when the operation is stopped will be described later.

  By the way, regardless of whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state, when the result of the success / failure determination process performed based on winning the start opening 1502 1506 is “special hit”, the hit is Regardless of whether it is a normal win or a probable change, the period from the activation of the condition device to the execution of the jackpot game is a low probability non-temporal state even though the jackpot game has not started. Become. Then, regardless of whether the result of the success / failure determination process in the high-probability state is successful or the result of the success / failure determination process in the low-probability non-short-time state is successful, the round number determination process ( Round determination processing A (step S2009) or round determination processing B (step S2012)) is performed.

  In the conventional gaming machine, the success / failure determination process, the stop symbol determination process (probability variation lottery process), and the round number determination process are all performed at the timing when the symbol variation start condition is satisfied. That is, even if the result of the success / failure determination process is lost, both the stop symbol determination process and the round number determination process are performed using the symbol random number. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the result of the determination process is a loss, the round number determination process (round determination process A (step S2009) or round determination process B (step S2012)) is not performed. The control processing is simplified without performing unnecessary processing.

  In addition, when the result of the success / failure determination process (step S1311) of another symbol is a win, a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game interrupted in the middle is, in other words, canceled by the player's intention Thus, a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game can be ended (by passing the game ball through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910).

  In this way, when the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination process (step S1311) is a win, the series of lottery processes are all performed even though the series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game is started. Even if a part of the process is left without being executed and can be interrupted in the course of the series of lottery processes by the player's intention, the execution of the jackpot game is also confirmed. Regardless, it is possible to create a period of tension (a period in which a series of lottery processes are interrupted in the course of executing a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game). In the case of a conventional gaming machine, a series of lottery processes (win / fail determination process, stop symbol determination process and round number determination process) are performed without being interrupted in the middle. When the number of prize balls that could be paid out to the player was small, the player was disappointed to dismiss the player even though he had been a big hit. In this regard, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above tension period (period in which the series of lottery processes are interrupted in the course of the series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game) By creating, every time the result of the success / failure determination process (step S1311) is a win, the player can be surely pleased. In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the player can grasp whether or not the probability variation function is activated after the jackpot game is executed in the period of tension, the probability variation function is activated. When it comes to winning, the effect is significant.

  Further, when the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination process (step S1311) is a win, the series of lottery processes are executed even though the series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game is started. By leaving the part of the process without being interrupted in the course of executing the series of lottery processes, the player himself can place a game ball in either the special gate A1900 or the special gate B1910. It becomes possible to provide a grace time that can be considered whether to pass. In other words, with a conventional gaming machine, the execution of the jackpot game has started regardless of the player's intention when the condition device is activated, so even if you want to reflect the player's own intention, it is enough to think Was not able to give the player time. However, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery process related to the execution of the interrupted series of jackpot games can be restarted at the player's own intention, so that the player can It becomes possible to give the player sufficient selection time to consider which execution mode of the desired jackpot game is desired.

  Note that when the result of the special symbol win / fail determination process (step S1311) is a loss, the above round number determination process (step S2009, step S2012) is not performed, and thus a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game are performed. It cannot be interrupted in the course of the series of lottery processes by the player's intention.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unless a specific condition is satisfied, it is kept secret whether the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is the high probability short time state or the low probability short time state. When a specific condition is satisfied, it is disclosed whether the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is a high probability time-short state or a low probability time-short state (one function by the CPU 2602 of the peripheral control board 2600) The concealment state is released by the gaming state disclosure means). Specifically, when the special figure B flag is turned on (that is, it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate A in the state where the condition device is operating (NO in step S2003)). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate B1910 (YES in step S2006), the gaming state after the above specific condition is satisfied and the execution of the jackpot game is disclosed is disclosed. Thus, for a player who is uneasy about having to continue the game without knowing the game state, the player hits the right hand (the game ball is the special gate A1900 while the condition device is operating). The above-mentioned anxiety is resolved by performing a special gate B1910 without passing through the game. For those who prefer, the above-mentioned thrilling can be achieved by making a left-hand strike (how the game ball can pass through the special gate A1900 without passing through the special gate B1910) while the condition device is operating. Note that the method for disclosing the gaming state may be a method of displaying the current gaming state in the liquid crystal display device 640, or the display on the liquid crystal display device 640. Alternatively, the game state may be grasped, and the method is not particularly limited, and for example, if the current game state is disclosed in the liquid crystal display device 640, the liquid crystal display device The CPU 2614 that controls display at 640 corresponds to the gaming state disclosure means.

  In this way, whether or not the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is a high-probability short-time state or a low-probability short-time state is basically kept secret, but when a specific condition is met (When the condition device is in operation, it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate A1900 (NO in step S2003), and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate B1910) (YES in step S2006)) is a game state that has been kept secret as a price for the player taking the risk of being determined as a 4-round jackpot game with the fewest number of balls that can be obtained as a prize ball Is disclosed. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the right strike (how the game ball can pass through the special figure gate B1910 without passing through the special figure gate A1900) while the condition device is operating. .

  In addition, in a state where the condition device is operating, the player makes a left strike (how the game ball can pass through the special figure gate A1900 without passing through the special figure B gate 1910) or a right strike (the game ball has Regardless of whether or not the player can continue to play the special figure gate B1910 without passing through the special figure gate AB1900), as long as the player continues to play, there will be no profit or loss on the player and the hole side. Thus, it is possible to realize a gameability such that the number of prize balls given to a player differs depending on whether the player is divided. In addition, the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is disclosed as a compensation for taking the risk of being determined as the four round jackpot game with the least number of prize balls given to the player. The hitting can be promoted, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can be fully exhibited. Moreover, even if the game state after the execution of the jackpot game has been disclosed as a price taking the risk of being determined as a four-round jackpot game with the fewest number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player, As long as the player continues to play in the pachinko machine, there is no actual loss on the hall side.

  In addition, in a state where the condition device is operating, the player makes a left strike (how the game ball can pass through the special figure gate A1900 without passing through the special figure B gate 1910) or a right strike (the game ball has Regardless of whether or not the player can continue to play the special figure gate B1910 without passing through the special figure gate AB1900), as long as the player continues to play the game, both the player and the hole will have a profit or loss. For example, the player may be forced to stop playing the pachinko machine. In such a case, in a state where the condition device is operating, the player makes a right strike (how the game ball can pass through the special figure gate B1910 without passing through the special figure gate AB1900). In spite of the high probability state, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game is stopped because the game state cannot be grasped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first random number for the first special symbol acquired based on the winning at the first starting port 1502 or the first acquired based on the winning at the second starting port 1506. Whether or not to operate the probability changing function is determined based on the symbol random numbers for the two special symbols. That is, the player can grasp whether or not the probability changing function is activated after the jackpot game is executed when the variation of the special symbol and thus the decorative symbol (or the special symbol corresponding symbol) is stopped. . Therefore, after grasping whether or not the probability change function is activated after the jackpot game is executed, the player can interrupt the lottery process related to the execution of the jackpot game on his / her own will. Become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the passage detection of the game ball to the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 is validated based on the activation of the condition device, and the validation is at least the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate A1900. The process continues until the passing of the game ball to the figure gate B1910 is detected. That is, once the condition device is activated, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is determined based on the passing of the game ball to the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 (the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 has a game). Since the jackpot game is executed when the ball passes, that is, until the jackpot game is executed), the passing detection of the game ball to the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 is validated. If the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 while the detection of the passage of the game ball to the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 is enabled, the number of rounds is determined and the jackpot game is played. Executed. In other words, the detection of the passing of the game ball to the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 is not validated unless the condition device is operated, so that the detection of the passage of the game ball to the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 is valid. Even if the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 while it is not being played, the jackpot game is not executed.

  However, the detection of the passing of the game ball to the special gate A1900 and the special gate B1910 that is activated based on the activation of the condition device is performed as described above. It is not limited to the one in which the activation continues until the passage of the first is detected. For example, the activation may be valid only for a predetermined period after the condition device is activated.

  Also, in this embodiment, whether or not the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is a high-probability short-time state or a low-probability short-time state is kept secret in principle, but the condition device is activated. In the state where the game ball is not passing through the special figure gate A1900 and the game ball has passed through the special figure gate B1910, the game state which is kept secret is disclosed. Not limited to this. For example, in a state in which the condition device is operating, it is detected that the game ball has not passed through the special figure gate A1900 and has passed through the special figure gate B 1910, and the round number determination process B (step S2012) As a result, only when the number of rounds is determined to be 15 rounds, the gaming state that is kept secret may be disclosed, so that undulations may be given to the game. Further, in a state where the condition device is in operation, it is detected that the game ball has not passed through the special figure gate A1900 and has passed through the special figure gate B1910, and further the round number determination process B (step S2012). As a result, only when the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, a relief measure for the player may be achieved by disclosing the gaming state kept secret.

<Game contents>
The game content of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 and 141. FIG. 141 is a front view of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Although not shown in FIG. 141, a decorative symbol composed of three symbol rows is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640.

  First, when a game ball wins the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506, a special random number is acquired separately from the winning start port. That is, when a game ball wins the first start port 1502, the first special random number is acquired, and when the game ball wins the second start port 1506, the second special random number is acquired.

  The special random number acquired based on the winnings at the start ports 1502 and 1506 is temporarily held before being subjected to the determination process. When the start condition is satisfied and the hold is released, the special symbol variation display is started, and the decorative symbol displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640 is produced in synchronism with the special symbol variation display. The CPU 2614 functioning as a display control means performs variable display. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with this, and when the second special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in synchronization with this. . At this time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the determination process for the first special random number. Similarly, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with this, and when the second special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in synchronization with this. The At this time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the determination process for the second special random number. In this way, the decorative symbol functions as a symbol common to both the variation display and stop display of the first special symbol and the variation display and stop display of the second special symbol. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, whether or not to operate the probability changing function is determined based on the symbol random number acquired based on the winning at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the result of the determination of whether or not the special random number is true is a special hit, the jackpot game is not executed only by this. That is, as described above, the lottery process related to the execution of the jackpot game includes at least a special symbol determination process (step S1311), a stop symbol determination process (not shown), and a round number determination process (step S2009). , Step S2012). However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not all the lottery processes related to the execution of the series of jackpot games are performed based on winning at the start ports 1502 and 1506, but when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The lottery process related to the execution of the jackpot game is stopped midway. However, even if the lottery process related to the execution of the jackpot game is stopped in the middle of the process, at this time, it is determined whether or not to operate the probability changing function in the game state after the jackpot game is executed. Yes. This is because whether or not to operate the probability changing function is determined by the symbol random number acquired based on the winning at the first starting port 1502 or the second starting port 1506. Therefore, the player is stopped in the middle of the lottery process related to the execution of the jackpot game, and all the conditions for executing the jackpot game are not yet satisfied (the conditions for executing the jackpot game are not yet executed). Whether or not the probability change function is activated in the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed, even though the round number determination process which is one of the above is not performed) It can be grasped by visual recognition.

  In this way, by stopping a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game, any one of the round number determination process A (step S2009) and the round number determination process B (step S2012) is executed. Whether to do so can be selected according to the player's intention.

  Specifically, after the condition device is activated, when a player fires a game ball so as to flow down the left side of the center object 1400, the fired game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 and the number of rounds is determined. Process A (step S2009) is performed. In the round number determination process A, it is always determined that the 8-round jackpot game is executed. Further, after the condition device is activated, when the player fires a game ball so as to flow down the right side of the center bonus 1400, the fired game ball passes through the special figure gate B1910, and the round number determination process B (step S2012) is performed. In this round number determination process B, it is determined by lottery which of the four round jackpots and the 15 round jackpots will be executed.

  In this way, immediately after the round number is determined in the round number determination process A (step S2009) or the round number determination process B (step S2012), the round number determination process A or the round number determination process B immediately. Until the determined number of rounds is reached, a jackpot game is started in which the opening and closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 serving as an accessory is continuously opened. That is, once the jackpot game is started, the opening operation of the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 is not interrupted until the number of rounds determined by the round number determination process A or the round number determination process B is reached. It will operate continuously.

  However, the detection by the special figure gate sensor A1901 of the game ball that has passed through the gate portion of the special figure gate A1900 is not always valid, but only when the condition device is operating. Similarly, the detection by the special figure gate sensor B 1911 of the game ball that has passed through the gate portion of the special figure gate B 1910 is not always valid, but only when the condition device is operating. That is, both the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 have the function of determining the number of rounds in the jackpot game when the condition device is operating, but when the condition device is not operating, It does not fulfill its function.

  Thus, based on the activation of the condition device, the player is guaranteed to execute the jackpot game for at least four rounds. That is, the player always executes a jackpot game to which a prize ball of at least a certain amount (award ball quantity that can be obtained in the four round jackpot game) is awarded when the condition device is activated. Further, it is possible to realize a game characteristic that a further prize ball can be given to the certain amount by the player's game. Moreover, allowing the player to change the amount of award balls that can be given to the player, for example, by the player himself, will affect the starting rate, and the player himself will change the specs specific to the pachinko machine. It might be. However, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the special gate A1900 without passing through the special gate B1910, and when the game ball does not pass through the special gate A1900, the special gate B1910. The pachinko machine 1 is set to perform the determination process related to the number of rounds so that the expected value for the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is the same when passing Unique specs will not change. That is, when a lottery related to the execution of the jackpot game is won, the jackpot game to which at least a certain amount of prize balls can be awarded is always executed, and the fixed amount described above is not affected even though it does not affect the pitch rate. On the other hand, it is possible to realize a game characteristic in which a further prize ball can be awarded by the player's farewell.

  In addition, by allowing the player to distinguish the launch of the game ball after the condition device is activated, the round number determination process A (step S2009) and the round number determination process B (step S2012) Since it is possible for the player to select which process to execute by his / her own intention, a player who prefers a game rich in gambling is aimed at the right side of the center bonus 1400. It can be considered that a player who prefers a solid game will launch a game ball aiming at the left side of the center object 1400. When a game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the center object 1400, among the 4-round jackpot game, the 8-round jackpot game, and the 15-round jackpot game, the 4-round jackpot game having the smallest expected value of the ball While considering the risk to be determined, it can be said that the game is rich in gambling because it is likely to be determined as a 15-round jackpot game with the largest expected value of the ball. On the other hand, when a game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center role 1400, the expected value of the ball is not as large as when the 15-round jackpot game is executed, but a certain amount of ball It can be said that it is a solid game in that it can be expected.

  In the present embodiment, when round number determination processing B (step S2012) is performed, 15 rounds are determined with a probability of 93/256, and 4 rounds are determined with a probability of 163/256. The number distribution probability is only one embodiment and is not limited thereto. However, it is necessary to prevent a difference in the degree of advantage for the player between when the round number determination process A is performed and when the round number determination process B is performed. Specifically, the expected value of the number of rounds when the jackpot game is executed (and thus the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player) is determined when the round number determination process A and the round number determination process B are performed. (The average number of rounds determined in the round number determination process B is the average number of rounds determined in the round number determination process A (in this embodiment, it is always not an average but always an average). It must be the same as or almost the same as round 8). In this way, when the round number determination process A is performed and when the round number determination process B is performed, the expected value for the number of rounds when the jackpot game is executed (the number of winning balls to be paid out to the player) Despite having the same or nearly the same expected value), the player's advantage of the player (the number of rounds and thus the prize ball to be paid out to the player) It is possible to provide an amusing game machine in which jackpot games having different numbers (expected values) can be executed.

  However, the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B are arranged at the upper left side or upper right side of the center accessory 1400, that is, the position where the game ball launched into the game area 605 can pass immediately. Therefore, if the game balls are continuously fired (usually, the game is performed so that the game balls are continuously fired), the result of the success / failure determination process for the random numbers for the success / failure of the special symbol is a hit. After the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner to inform the player, the game ball may pass through the special gate on the side contrary to the player's will. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the condition device is activated, a device is devised to prevent the game ball from passing through the special gate on the side contrary to the player's will (described later). ).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the result of the success / failure determination process for the first special symbol or the second special random number is correct, the CPU 2614 displays the decorative symbol variably displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640. Is displayed in such a manner that the player is informed in advance that the result of the determination process is successful. As an aspect to inform the player in advance that the result of the success / failure determination process is a win, for example, the decorative symbol consisting of three symbol rows is temporarily stopped and displayed in a so-called double eye where all the decorative symbols are the same symbol, and thereafter This corresponds to an aspect in which after the variable display is performed again, the final symbol is stopped. The CPU 2614 confirms that the result of the pass / fail determination process for the special random number is correct in a manner in which the result of the pass / fail determination process can be grasped by displaying the decoration symbol once again after stopping and displaying it with a flat eye. The player can be informed before the display.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the probability variation function is activated after the jackpot game is executed is determined based on the design random number, and the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 40 corresponding to the design random number is determined. Stopped display. That is, the player can grasp whether or not the probability changing function is activated according to the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the above-mentioned decorative symbol re-variable display is performed when the result of the success / failure determination process relating to the operation of the condition device is correct, the display is stopped once with a normal symbol indicating that the probability variation function does not operate. Thereafter, a probability change promotion effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that is stopped and displayed with a probability variation symbol indicating that the probability variation function is activated by performing re-variation display may be performed.

  Further, when the peripheral control board 2600 receives a command indicating that the result of the special symbol success / failure determination process (step S1311) is a win, the CPU 2614 displays “big hit game” in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640. The effect image indicating that a series of lottery processes related to the execution of “is in progress” is displayed. When such a “effect image indicating that a series of lottery processes relating to the execution of the jackpot game is in progress” is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640, the player can perform a series related to the execution of the jackpot game. Using the period during which the lottery process is interrupted, it can be understood that the current lottery situation, that is, the result of the success / failure determination process for the special random number is correct. And the player seems to be seen in the conventional gaming machine by launching the game ball after grasping the current lottery situation using the period in which the series of lottery processing related to the execution of the jackpot game is interrupted In addition, it is possible to avoid the game from proceeding without understanding the meaning of the effect image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640. In order to effectively exhibit such an effect, the detection of the game ball to the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 is enabled after a predetermined time has elapsed since the activation of the condition device. It is good to.

  In this manner, the special figure gate sensor A 1901 and the special figure gate sensor are notified by notifying the player of the result of the success / failure determination process before the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed in a manner in which the result of the determination process is determined. Before the detection of the passing of the game ball by B1911 is validated, the player can release the game ball by releasing his hand from the operation handle portion 461. In this way, after the condition device has been activated by encouraging the player to stop firing the game ball before the detection of the passing of the game ball by the special figure gate sensor A 1901 and the special figure gate sensor B 1911 is enabled, It is possible to avoid a situation in which a game ball passes through a special figure gate on the side of the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B that is against the player's will.

  In addition, after the condition device is activated, a measure for avoiding a situation in which a game ball passes through a special figure gate on the side of the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B that is against the player's will, It is not restricted to said aspect. For example, instead of immediately activating the special figure gate sensor A 1901 and the special figure gate sensor B 1911 based on the activation of the condition device, the special figure gate sensor A 1901 and the special figure gate sensor A 1901 An embodiment in which the special figure gate sensor B 1911 is activated may be used. The above-mentioned “predetermined time” is a time that at least the passage of the game ball cannot be detected even if the already launched game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 after the condition device is activated. There must be. Further, for example, when the result of the success / failure determination process for the first special symbol or the second special random number is a win, before the special symbol that is variably displayed and thus the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the liquid crystal display device 640 Even when the operation of the effect button that can change the effect displayed in the display area is performed using both hands, for example, after the condition device is activated, the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate are operated. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a game ball passes through a special gate on the side of B and against the player's will.

  In the present embodiment, the special figure gate A1900 is arranged on the left side of the center character 1400, and the special figure gate B1910 is arranged on the right side of the center character 1400. This is contrary to the intention of the player in view of the fact that the player usually fires a game ball toward the left side of the center role 1400 unless the condition device is in operation. Thus, it is possible to avoid making the player angry by executing a 4-round jackpot game in which the number of prize balls to be paid out is smaller than the 8-round jackpot game. In this case, even if the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1910 even though the player has an intention to pass the special ball to the special figure gate B1910 when the condition device is activated, at least Since eight rounds of jackpot game will be executed, it seems that it will not be necessary to offend the player. As long as the condition device is not activated, for example, the player may play a game ball by firing the game ball toward the left side of the center accessory 1400. It is preferable that the start ports 1502 and 1506 are arranged so that winning can be made to the start ports 1502 and 1506 only when they are fired.

  By the way, as described above, the special figure gate A1900 is arranged on the lower left upper shoulder of the center accessory 1400, and thus on the flow path of the game ball fired on the left side of the center accessory 1400. In addition, when a game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 in a state where the condition device is operating, the game ball that has passed through the special figure gate A1900 flows down the game area 605 and reaches the grand prize opening 1510. The CPU 2502 performs the round number determination process A (step S2009) and starts executing the jackpot game based on the number of rounds determined in the round number determination process A (opening the big prize opening 1510 as a round operation). To do. Further, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 in a state where the condition device is operating, the CPU 2614 flows down the game area 605 and reaches the grand prize opening 1510 when the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900. In the meantime, the effect image indicating that the execution of the jackpot game is started is controlled to be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640. Therefore, when a game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 with the condition device operating, the game ball that has passed through the special figure gate A1900 is located downstream of the special figure gate A1900 in the flow-down direction of the game ball. It is possible to win a prize at the arranged large winning opening 1510. In other words, a game ball (game ball that has passed through the special figure gate A1900) that triggered the execution of the jackpot game after the conditional device has been activated may win the big prize opening 1510 when it passes through the special figure gate A. Since it is left, waste balls can be reduced. In particular, the effect is remarkable when “4R jackpot” is executed with a small amount of prize balls paid out to the player even though the jackpot game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the right side of the center accessory 1400 is configured to always pass through the special-purpose gate A. As a result, a player who tries to pass a game ball through the special gate A1900 in order to immediately execute a jackpot game even though the result of the success / failure determination process (special lottery result) for the special random number is a win. It is possible to avoid a situation where the jackpot game is not executed against the intention of the player.

  The point that waste balls can be reduced is the same for the game balls that have passed through the special-purpose gate B1910. In other words, the special figure gate B 1910 is arranged on the lower right upper shoulder of the center accessory 1400 and thus on the flow path of the game ball fired on the right side of the center accessory 1400 as described above. Then, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate B1910 in a state where the condition device is operating, the game ball that has passed through the special figure gate B1910 flows down the game area 605 and reaches the big prize opening 1510. The CPU 2502 performs the round number determination process A (step S2009) and starts executing the jackpot game based on the number of rounds determined in the round number determination process B (opening the big prize opening 1510 as a round operation). To do. Further, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate B1910 while the condition device is operating, the CPU 2614 flows down the game area 605 and reaches the big prize opening 1510 when the game ball passes through the special figure gate B1910. In the meantime, the effect image indicating that the execution of the jackpot game is started is controlled to be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640. Therefore, when a game ball passes through the special figure gate B1910 with the condition device operating, the game ball that has passed through the special figure gate B1910 is located downstream of the special figure gate B1910 in the flow-down direction of the game ball. It is possible to win a prize at the arranged large winning opening 1510. In other words, a game ball (game ball that has passed through the special figure gate B 1910) that has triggered the execution of the jackpot game after the condition device has been activated may win the big prize opening 1510 when it passes through the special figure gate B. Since it is left, waste balls can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left side of the center accessory 1400 is configured to always pass through the special-purpose gate B. As a result, as in the case of the special figure gate A1900, the special figure gate B1910 is made to execute the jackpot game immediately even though the result of the success / failure determination process (special lottery result) for the special random number is win. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a big hit game is not executed against the player's intention to pass the game ball.

  By the way, the method in which the player hits the game ball after the condition device is activated is not limited to the method in which the player hits the right side or the left side of the center accessory 1400 as described above. For example, the number of rounds may change according to the timing at which the game ball passes through the special figure gate, instead of the special figure gate through which the game ball passes as described above. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate between T1 and T2 [msec] after the condition device is activated, the round number determination process A in step S2009 is performed, and the condition device is activated. Then, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate between T2 and T3 [msec], the round number determination process B in step S2012 may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball fired to the right side of the center bonus 1400 is configured to always pass through the special figure gate A, and similarly, the game launched to the left of the center bonus 1400. The sphere is always configured to pass through the special figure gate B, but is not necessarily “always”. In spite of the result of the success / failure determination processing (special lottery result) for the special random number, the special ball A1900 or the special gate B1910 tries to pass the game ball immediately to execute the big hit game. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that a game ball can pass through special figure gate A1900 or special figure gate B1910 to such an extent that the situation where a jackpot game is not performed contrary to a player's intention can be avoided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the condition device is activated, the jackpot game is configured to be executed when the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910. There is not limited to the passing of a ball-passing special figure gate as a trigger for the execution of a big hit game, but there is provided a reception port for collecting the game ball in the rear, and the fact that the game ball has been received at the reception port of the jackpot game It is good also as an execution opportunity.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “special win” means that the winning / non-winning determination process for the special random number acquired based on the starting winnings at the starting ports 1502 and 1506 is won (the winning condition is that the condition device operates). And the condition that the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 is continuously operated after the condition device is activated (the game ball has passed through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 after the condition device is activated). )) As “big hit”.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special random number in the high probability state is special hit, the condition device is activated, and accordingly, the execution of the jackpot game is still started. When there is no stage, the probability changing function stops and the high probability state shifts to the normal gaming state. In addition, when the time reduction function is operating in the high probability state, the time reduction function is also stopped along with the operation of the condition device. As described above, even if the determination result of special random numbers is a special hit, a series of lotteries related to the execution of the jackpot game will be performed as long as the game ball does not pass through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910. Processing remains interrupted. Therefore, when the determination result of the special random number in the high probability state is a special hit, the high probability state is changed to the normal state in the middle of a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game. In particular, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special random number in the high-probability time-short state is a special hit, the operation of the time-shortening function is also stopped. Will fall. Here, the winning rate to the first starting port 1502 is the same regardless of whether or not the time-shortening function is operating, but the winning rate to the second starting port 1506 is reduced by the operation of the condition device. Therefore, the winning rate as a whole of the start ports 1502 and 1506 is lowered. The player can be urged to stop the launch of the game ball by utilizing the decrease in the winning rate for the start ports 1502 and 1506 as a whole. By continuing to fire the game ball, it is possible to avoid passing the game ball to a special gate not intended by the player among the special gate A1900 and the special gate B1910. In other words, a player who determines which of the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910 is to pass the game ball by utilizing the fact that the winning rate to the whole of the starting openings 1502 and 1506 is reduced as described above. It will be possible to avoid losing the opportunity for selection.

  By the way, as described above, when the result of the success / failure determination for the special random number in the high-probability short-time state is a special hit, the condition device is activated, and accordingly, both the probability variation function and the short-time function are deactivated, It is controlled to the normal gaming state by a gaming state control means (a CPU function that manages the operation of the probability changing function and the time shortening function). However, even if the time-shortening function is stopped, if the normal hit occurs immediately before the time-shortening function stops, the start-port opening / closing control means 2558 also controls the start-port solenoid after the time-shortening function is stopped based on the normal hit. A situation may occur in which 1512 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 1504. That is, when the condition device is activated in a special win, there may be a state in which the winning rate for the second start port 1506 is increased even though the time reduction function is stopped. In such a case, when the execution of the jackpot game is started immediately based on the special hit (the operation of the condition device), the game ball that has been launched is the big prize port 1510 even though the big prize port 1510 is opened with great effort. Prior to reaching the winning prize opening 1510, the game ball may win a prize at the second starting opening 1506 disposed upstream of the winning prize opening 1510, and the winning rate to the big winning opening 1510 during the jackpot game may decrease. . In order to suppress such a decrease in the winning rate to the big winning opening 1510 during the jackpot game, until the expansion of the pair of movable pieces 1504 is completed (the winning rate to the second start opening 1506 is increased). For example, it is necessary to perform an interval effect before the start of the jackpot game so that the execution of the jackpot game is not started. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the result of the determination of whether or not the special random number in the high-probability short-time state is a special hit and the condition device is activated, at this point in time, Since the lottery process is interrupted and the execution of the jackpot game is reserved until the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910, immediately after the series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game is completed (special As soon as the game ball has passed through the figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910), the execution of the jackpot game can be started. In addition, since the special gate A1900 and the special gate B1910 are both arranged at the shoulders above the center accessory 1400, and the special prize opening is arranged below the center accessory 1400, the special gate A1900. Alternatively, as soon as the game ball passes through the special figure gate B1910, the execution of the big hit game is started, and the game ball that has passed the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 has an opportunity to win the big prize opening 1510. Can be granted.

  Further, in a gaming machine in which an interval effect is performed before the execution of the jackpot game is started as in a conventional gaming machine, the prize winning opening 1510 is not opened during the interval effect. Even if a game ball was fired during the performance, it was often wasted without winning the grand prize opening 1510. Even if the launch of the game ball is stopped during the interval effect, it is difficult to fire the game ball at the timing when the execution of the jackpot game is started. In particular, when the big prize opening 1510 is arranged below the center bonus 1400, it takes time for the launched game ball to reach the big prize opening 1510. Therefore, the continuous opening process of the big prize opening 1510 is performed. It is extremely difficult to fire a game ball so that the game ball is near the grand prize winning opening 1510 when it is started. In this regard, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the execution of the jackpot game is started immediately after the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910, the player launches the game ball. The execution of the jackpot game will be started only in the state in which it is allowed. Thereby, there is a low possibility that the game balls launched toward the game area 605 will be wasted, and a decrease in the winning rate of the big winning opening 1510 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the shortest shortest time among the variation times of the special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506 is T [sec], and the game ball is fired. Assuming that the longest time required to reach the out port 606 (see FIG. 31) is t [sec], in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the relationship of T [sec]> t [sec] is established. That is, if the player stops firing the game ball when the game ball wins the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506, the game area 605 has no game ball when the change in the special symbol stops. One ball will not exist. As a result, when the game ball is won at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506, the player stops firing the game ball, and the start win is given to the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506. When the result of the success / failure determination process for the special symbol acquired by the above is a special hit, the game ball passes to the special signal gate A1900 or the special signal gate B1910 (that is, waits for a new launch of the game ball by the player). After that, the execution of the jackpot game will be started.

  Next, internal control according to the progress of the game will be described along the flow of time in FIG. FIG. 142 is a time chart showing internal control in accordance with the progress of the game.

  The flag indicating the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 includes a start flag indicating whether the start condition is satisfied, a probability change flag indicating whether the probability change function is operating, and whether the time reduction function is operating. It includes at least a time saving flag and a jackpot game execution flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed.

  The start flag is OFF when the special symbol is fluctuating or the condition device is operating (that is, the start flag is OFF even when the big hit game is being executed), and the start flag is OFF (the start condition is not satisfied) ), Even if a game ball wins or is put on hold at the start ports 1502 and 1506, the special symbol change and the special lottery are not newly executed. Then, when the change of the special symbol is finished and the condition device is not operating, the change of the special symbol and the special lottery can be executed unless the start flag is turned on (unless the start condition is satisfied).

  Further, the probability variation flag is turned on when the probability variation function is activated, the hourly flag is turned on when the hourly function is activated, and the jackpot game execution flag is turned on when the jackpot game is being executed. Therefore, if the gaming state is a low probability non-short-time state, both the probability change flag and the time-short flag are OFF, and if the gaming state is a high probability time-short state, both the probability variation flag and the time-short flag are ON, and the gaming state is a high probability non-short time. If it is in the state, the probability change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is OFF, and if the game state is the low probability time reduction state, the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON. In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game, both the probability variation flag and the hourly flag are OFF, and the jackpot game execution flag is ON.

  In the present embodiment, as a flag indicating the internal state of the pachinko machine 1, there is a condition device operation flag. This condition device operation flag is ON if the condition device is operating. Therefore, it is OFF when the gaming state is any one of the high probability short time state, the high probability non-time short state and the low probability short time state. In addition, when the gaming state is a low probability non-temporal state (including the low probability non-temporal state during execution of a jackpot game), the condition device operation flag is a special hit because the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It is turned on when the mode indicating the effect is displayed, and turned off when the jackpot game is finished. The condition device operation flag is turned on only after the special symbol change is stopped and the mode indicating that the special winning is displayed until the execution of the jackpot game is ended.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, even if the condition device is activated, since the big hit game is not started unless the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B, the condition device is activated. In spite of the fact that the game is not progressing (the execution of the jackpot game is not started) may occur. In this special state, the jackpot game execution flag is not automatically turned ON with the condition device operation flag being ON, but only when the above-described specific condition is satisfied. Is turned on, and the execution of the jackpot game is started. In the special state described above, both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are OFF.

  In FIG. 142, the start flag is turned ON / OFF (start condition is established / not established), the special symbol is fluctuated / stopped, the probability change flag is turned ON / OFF (probability change function is activated / stopped), and the time reduction flag is turned ON / OFF (time reduction). ON / OFF of the jackpot game execution flag, ON / OFF of the accessory continuous operation device (and consequently the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500), and ON / OFF of the condition device operation flag (ON / OFF of the condition device) Operation / stop) is control by the main control board 1350. The disclosure / confidentiality of the liquid crystal display indicates whether the gaming state is disclosed or concealed, and this is control by the peripheral control board 2600.

  First, when a game ball wins at the start ports 1502 and 1506 while the start condition is satisfied (see T1 in FIG. 142), the special symbol starts to change based on this and the start condition is not set. Established. This start condition is not satisfied when the special symbol is changing or the condition device is operating (that is, the start condition is not satisfied even when the jackpot game is executed), and the start condition is not satisfied. As long as game balls win or hold at the start ports 1502 and 1506, special symbol changes and special lotteries are not newly executed. Then, when the variation of the special symbol is finished and the condition device is not operating, the start condition is established, and the variation of the special symbol and the special lottery can be executed. The liquid crystal display device 640 displays the decorative symbols in a manner that is synchronized with the changes in the special symbols, but this is not shown in FIG.

  Then, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the stopped special symbol is in a state indicating that it is a special hit (see T2 in FIG. 142), the condition device is activated. There are two types of special hits: probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots. Here, it is assumed that the variation of the special symbol stops in a manner indicating that the result of the special lottery is a probability variation jackpot (see T2 in FIG. 142). The condition device operates based on the special lottery result being a special win, and operates at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  When the condition device is in operation, when the game ball passes through the special gate, the accessory continuous operation device is activated, that is, the execution of the jackpot game in which the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 is continuously operated is started. (See T3 in FIG. 142). The jackpot game ends when the number of rounds determined in the round number determination process (steps S2009 and S2012) is reached, and the operation of the condition device is also stopped (see T4 in FIG. 142). Note that the special figure gate through which the game ball has passed is a special figure gate B1910 (see T3 in FIG. 142).

  When the game ball passes through the special figure gate B1910 and the execution of the jackpot game is started when the condition device is operating, it is normal whether the special hit type that triggered the jackpot game is the probability variable jackpot It is disclosed whether it is a big hit. As described above, when a big hit game in which at least a certain amount of prize balls are awarded to the player when a special win is achieved, only the minimum amount of prize balls is given to the player. The condition device is operating by disclosing the special hit type (ie, the gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is finished) as a price that the player has taken the risk of being executed. The player can be encouraged to make a right strike (how the game ball can pass through the special gate B1910 without passing through the special gate A1900), and the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the characteristics. Can be demonstrated in minutes. Moreover, even if the game state after the completion of the jackpot game is disclosed as a compensation for taking the risk of being determined as the four round jackpot game with the fewest number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player, as described above In addition, as long as the player continues to play the game in the pachinko machine, there is no actual loss on the hall side. However, some players wish to continue the game while the game state is kept secret. This is because it is possible to play a game with an expectation of the possibility of being in a high probability state, rather than being disappointed that the state is not in a high probability state. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, whether or not to disclose the gaming state is determined by the player's assignment, so that such a player's request can be met.

  Note that, although not shown in FIG. 142, when the special symbol is stopped in a mode indicating that it is a normal jackpot, the probability changing function does not operate after the execution of the jackpot game is completed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time-shortening function always operates after the execution of the jackpot game is finished, so that the low-probability non-short-time state is entered after the execution of the jackpot game. The operation of the time reduction function stops when the special lottery is performed 100 times (when the special symbol is changed 100 times).

  When the execution of the jackpot game is finished and the start condition is satisfied in the high probability short-time state where both the probability variation function and the short-time function are operating, and when the game ball wins further at the first start ports 1502 and 1506 (Refer to T5 in FIG. 142) Based on this, the change of the special symbol is started and the starting condition is not established. After that, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the stopped special symbol is in a mode indicating that the special symbol is a special hit (here, a probable big hit), the condition device is activated (see T6 in FIG. 142). When the condition device is activated, both the probability changing function and the time reduction function that are in operation are stopped.

  When the game ball passes through the special-purpose gate during the operation of the condition device, execution of the jackpot game in which the accessory continuous operation device is activated, that is, the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 is continuously activated (FIG. 142). See T7). When the execution of the jackpot game ends, the start condition is satisfied and the operation of the condition device stops (see T8 in FIG. 142). In addition, since the above-mentioned jackpot game execution opportunity is a winning game for the probable change jackpot (see T6 in FIG. 142), the probabilistic function is activated when the jackpot game ends. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the time-saving function always operates after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished has the probability changing function and the time-saving function. It becomes a high probability short-time state in which both are activated (see T8 in FIG. 142). However, since the special figure gate through which the game ball has passed is the special figure gate A1900 (see T7 in FIG. 142), the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is not disclosed and is kept secret.

  And although the gaming state is not disclosed, in a high-probability short-time state in which both the probability variation function and the short-time function are operating, if a special lottery is performed 100 times without a special hit (see T9 in FIG. 142) ), The operation of the time reduction function stops. At this time, since the operation of the probability changing function is continued, the gaming state becomes a high probability non-short-time gaming state. However, since the gaming state is kept secret without being disclosed, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the probability changing function is operating.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the main control board 1350 is equipped with a backup function, and the game mode (that is, the state of each flag) at the time when the power is shut off is the main control. The internal state is stored in the RAM 2506 of the substrate 1350. Then, when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 1, an initial process is performed, and the main control board 1350 refers to various flags managed by the backup function, and grasps the gaming state when the power is turned off. Can do. The gaming state that can be grasped in this way is disclosed to the outside. For example, if the probability changing function is activated when the power is turned off, the main control board 1350 displays the status display lamp 1816 with, for example, a red color even after the power is turned on even if the gaming state is kept secret. Turn on. Also, in a special state where the jackpot game is not being executed even though the condition device is operating when the power is turned off, the main control board 1350 displays a status display lamp after the power is turned on, for example. Turn on green.

  Note that the gaming state at the time when the power is turned off is transmitted from the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 2600 after the power is turned on. When the peripheral control board 2600 receives from the main control means 1350 a command indicating that the gaming state at the time when the power is shut off is the special state, the peripheral control board 2600 receives, for example, “ Control is performed so that an image such as “Warning how to hit! Thus, even when the power supply is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the gaming state at the time when the power supply is shut off is a special state, the player can release the game ball after the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to fire a game ball with caution. Specifically, when a game ball passes through special figure gate A1900 or special figure gate B1910 in a special state, a jackpot game with a different number of rounds is executed depending on the tip of the special figure gate through which the game ball has passed. If the power is cut off by the power, the game ball may be fired without paying attention to the launch position after power is restored. Therefore, in order to prevent this, attention is drawn to the liquid crystal display 640 when power is restored.

  Incidentally, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a RAM clear switch (not shown). When this RAM clear switch is operated, the data stored in the RAM 2506 is erased, and the probability change flag OFF, the time reduction flag OFF, the jackpot game execution flag OFF, and the condition device operation flag OFF are set. This RAM clear switch cannot be operated by the player, but must be unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 (see FIG. 71 (B)) so that only the hall side can be operated. It is placed at a position where it cannot be operated.

  Next, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 1350 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 1350 of this example, various game controls and effect controls are realized by the CPU 2502 executing a predetermined program stored in advance in the ROM 2504 with a periodic timer interrupt every 4 ms. . When a game ball detection signal is input from the general-purpose gate sensor 1612 to the main control board 1350, a normal random number generation means 2550 for generating a predetermined normal random number, and a normal random number generated by the normal random number generation means 2550 and Normal symbol variation pattern selection means 2552 for selecting a corresponding normal symbol variation pattern from a predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern table stored in the ROM 2504, and normal symbol hold storage means for temporarily storing the selected normal symbol variation pattern 2555, normal symbol display control means 2556 for variably displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1806 based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern stored in the normal symbol hold storage means 2554, and the normal symbol display by the normal symbol display control means 2556 Normal random number (normal symbol variation pattern) extracted by the device 1806 When it is “normal hit”, the start opening / closing control means 2558 for driving the start opening solenoid 1512 to expand the pair of movable pieces 1504 and the number of normal symbol fluctuation patterns stored in the normal symbol storage memory 2554 are stored. Normal symbol memory number display control means 2560 for displaying on the normal symbol memory number display 1812 as the memory number is provided.

  The normal symbol hold storage unit 2554 described above receives a predetermined number of normal symbol variation patterns selected by the detection signal of the game ball from the general symbol gate sensor 1612 while the normal symbol display is varied by the normal symbol display control unit 2556. (For example, up to four) are stored, and execution of the stored normal symbol variation pattern is suspended until normal symbol variation display becomes possible.

  The main control board 1350 also has first special random number generation means 2562 for generating a predetermined first special random number based on a detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 2152 by a start winning to the first start port 1502. And the first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number generated in the first special random number generation means 2562 (including the variation time of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1802) in the ROM 2504. First special symbol variation pattern selection means 2564 for selecting from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance, and first special symbol variation pattern selected by first special symbol variation pattern selection means 2564 are temporarily stored. First special symbol hold storage means 2566 and first special symbol change pattern stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 2566 The first special symbol display control means 2568 for variably displaying the first special symbol of the first special symbol display 1802 based on the number of the first special symbol fluctuation patterns stored and retained by the first special symbol reservation storage means 2566 Is stored on the first special symbol memory number display 1808 as a memory number, and first special symbol memory number display control means 2570 is provided.

  Further, the second special random number generating means 2572 for generating a predetermined second special random number on the main control board 1350 based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 1516 by the start winning to the second start port 1506. And a second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number generated by the second special random number generator 2572 (including the variation time of the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display 1804) in the ROM 2504. Second special symbol variation pattern selection means 2574 to be selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance, and second special symbol variation pattern selected by second special symbol variation pattern selection means 2574 are temporarily stored. Second special symbol hold storage means 2576 to be stored and second special symbol hold pattern 2576 stored in the second special symbol hold storage means 2576 The second special symbol display control means 2578 for variably displaying the second special symbol of the second special symbol indicator 1804 based on the number of the second special symbol variation patterns retained and stored in the second special symbol reservation storage means 2576 Is stored on the second special symbol memory number display 1810 as a memory number.

  These first special symbol hold storage means 2566 and second special symbol hold storage means 2576 are the first and second special symbol display control means 2568 and 2578, and the first and second special symbols newly display the special symbols variably. When it is not possible (for example, when a variable display is in progress, when neither the special gate A1900 nor the special gate B1910 has passed the game even though the condition device is operating, And a predetermined number (for example, four each) of the first symbol variation pattern and the second symbol variation pattern triggered by the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 2152 and the second starting port sensor 1516. The execution of the first special symbol variation pattern and the second special symbol variation pattern stored until the special symbol variation display becomes possible is suspended.Then, when a predetermined release condition is satisfied, a new special symbol variation display is started. The “predetermined release condition” is satisfied when the variable display ends, the jackpot game ends, or the like. When the condition device is activated and the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910, the execution of the jackpot game is started without satisfying the “predetermined release condition”. Therefore, even if the condition device is operated and the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910, the new special symbol variation display (the lottery process for the new special symbol) is not performed.

  Further, on the main control board 1350, the first special symbol variation pattern (first special random number) and the second symbol variation pattern (the first special symbol retention storage unit 2566 and the second special symbol retention storage unit 2576). Based on the second special random number), an advantageous game state generating unit 2582 that generates an advantageous game state that the player is advantageous to, and an opening / closing member 1508 that closes the prize winning opening 1510 based on an instruction from the advantageous game state generating unit 2582 Is provided with a large winning opening / closing control means 2584 for controlling the driving of the attacker solenoid 1514 so as to open / close the predetermined opening pattern.

  Further, the main control board 1350 includes a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, winning information, and a first special symbol memory corresponding to the ordinary random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number. Number, the number of second special symbols stored, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 2514 (a signal indicating that the door frame 5 is open from the main body frame 3), etc. Command generation means 2586 for generating a control command and command transmission means 2588 for transmitting the command generated by the command generation means 2586 to the peripheral control board 2600 are provided.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 2600 has a command receiving means 2650 for receiving a control command transmitted from the main control board 2500, and a plurality of commands stored in the ROM 2604 based on the command received by the command receiving means 2650. An effect pattern selection unit 2652 that selects one of the effect patterns, and a light emission that causes the light emitting decoration body 2004 to emit light by controlling the light emission drive of each LED 2120 based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection unit 2652 Effect control means 2654, effect display control means 2656 for displaying a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 640, and a movable effect for causing the center movable decorative body 2200, the side movable decorative body 2300, and the under movable decorative body 2400 to have a predetermined movable effect. Performances mainly controlling the control means 2658, etc. And a control means 2659.

  The plurality of effect patterns selected when the result of the determination process is successful among the effect patterns stored in the ROM 2604 includes an effect pattern for executing the movable effect of the under movable decorative body 2400, and the main control board. When it is determined by the control command received from 2500 that the result of the success / failure determination process is successful, the effect pattern selection means 2652 selects an effect pattern including the movable effect of the under movable decorative body 2400 based on the command. In the variation display of the decorative symbol executed in this manner, a movable effect of moving the under movable decorative body 2400 is executed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection unit 2652 when the result of the determination result is other than winning among the effect patterns stored in the ROM 2604 does not include the movable effect of the under movable decorative body 2400. That is, the under movable decorative body 2400 is moved only when the result of the success / failure determination process is a hit, and functions as a so-called one-notification agent (an accessory that notifies that the result of the determination process is a hit by the movement). To do.

  The under movable decoration 2400 is not limited to the under movable decorative body 2400 that is movable only when the result of the success / failure determination process is a win, but is movable at a higher rate than when it is lost when the result of the hit / fail determination process is a win. The body 2400 may be configured such that when the under movable decorative body 2400 is moved, the result of the success / failure determination process improves the expectation for winning. Further, in this example, the movable pattern of the under movable decorative body 2400 is executed by selecting a performance pattern from a plurality of performance patterns including a performance pattern in which the movable pattern of the under movable decorative body 2400 is performed by the performance pattern selection unit 2652. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the command received by the command receiving means 2650, it is determined whether or not to execute the movable effect of the under movable decorative body 2400, and the under movable state is determined. You may comprise so that the effect pattern containing this movable effect may be selected when it determines with performing the movable effect of the decoration body 2400. FIG.

  The peripheral control board 2600 has a center movable decorative body control means 2660 for driving and controlling the center moving motor 2214 and the heel motor 2226 of the center movable decorative body 2200 based on an instruction from the movable effect control means 2658. Side movable decorative body control means 2662 for driving and controlling the side motor 2324 of the side movable decorative body 2300 based on an instruction from the movable effect control means 2658, and an under movable decorative body 2400 based on an instruction from the movable effect control means 2658. The under movable decorative body control means 2664 for driving and controlling the under motor 2412 is provided.

  Further, the peripheral control board 2600 accepts an operation that can accept or cannot accept the operation signal of the operation button 330 based on the edge type control unit that controls the production according to the production pattern selected by the production pattern selection unit 2652. Means 2666, at least the operation signal of the operation button 330 received by the operation receiving means 2666, and a predetermined effect image (for example, a specific effect image (hammer chance reach effect image), a special effect image ( ), Etc.) based on the crocodile panic reach reach image, etc.) and the crocodile part 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 as a design pattern door picture T (see FIG. 146), crocodile picture W (see FIGS. 150 and 151), etc. The hit determination means 2668 for determining whether or not the hit is made and the hit determination means 2668 Then, if it is determined that the striking determination means 2668 has struck, the striking determination means 2668 directs the striking display control means 2656 to change the display mode of the stunning design such as the door design T or the crocodile design W. Stroke number counting means 2672 for counting the number of times is provided. The number of hits counted by the hit number counting means 2672 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 via the effect control means 2659 or by the effect display control means 2656.

  Further, the operation button 330 is provided on the peripheral control board 2600 when the operation accepting unit 2666 can accept the operation of the operation button 330 according to an instruction (by control) of the effect control unit 2659 based on the selected effect pattern. Operation lottery means 2673 is further provided to draw a predetermined operation lottery result when operated. The operation lottery result lottered by the operation lottery means 2673 will be described in detail later, but it is used for hitting judgment by the hitting judgment means 2668 or by the picture changing means 2670 depending on the effect pattern performed by the start winning prize. It is used to change the picture.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 2600 has an appearance pattern table changing means for selecting and changing the appearance pattern table from the appearance pattern table selection table (see FIG. 155) according to the number of impacts counted by the impact count counting means 2672. 2676, a display lottery means 2678 for lottering a predetermined display lottery result (predetermined random number value) in accordance with an instruction of the effect control means 2659 based on the selected effect pattern, and a display lottery result lottery and a lottery drawn by the display lottery means 2678 An appearance pattern selection means 2680 for selecting a predetermined appearance pattern (see FIGS. 157 and 158) from the appearance pattern selection table (see FIG. 156) based on the appearance pattern table selected and changed by the pattern table changing means; Are further provided.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the peripheral control board 2600 is provided with a timer 2682, and the production time and production controlled by the production control unit 2659 based on the production pattern selected by the production pattern selection unit 2652. It is used for image display time, symbol variation time, movable timing of the movable decorative body 2006, operation timing of the operation receiving means 2666, operation lottery means 2675, display lottery means 2678, and the like.

  Then, the game content in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment having the above-described functional configuration will be specifically described. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle unit 461 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game with a game ball is started by being driven into an upper portion of a game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the game panel 599.

  The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the left or right side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 1400 depending on the strength of the game. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461, and the game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 599 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  A game ball flowing down the side of the center combination 1400 passes through the gate 1602 of the general gate 1600 disposed on the side of the center combination 1400 in the game area 605 and is detected by the general gate sensor 1612. Based on the detection signal, the main random number generator 2550 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result on the main control board 1350. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1806 in the symbol display device 1800 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1806 made up of one LED emits light in red and green alternately) The normal symbol extracted after the elapse of time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) and based on the normal random number (normal lottery result) is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 1806 emits red or green light). The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected by the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 2552.

  Specifically, if the drawn random number is an “ordinary winning” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the ordinary symbol display 1806 emits green light), and the drawn ordinary random number is an “ordinary loss” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol display 1806 emits red light). When the normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 1504 that close the second starting port 1506 expands for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 1506.

  It should be noted that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 1504 at the second start port 1506 may be changed according to the result of the determination process of special random numbers (special lottery result) described later. For example, when “short time per hour (including normal time per short, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted as a special lottery result, the variation time or expansion time may be changed to a short time. good. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table used by the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 2552 can be easily changed by replacing it with a different table and selecting it.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, only the general-purpose gate 1600 provided on the left side when viewed from the front is provided with a general-purpose gate sensor 1612. Even if it passes, the above-mentioned ordinary random number is not extracted. Therefore, a player who notices that the right-hand general gate 1600 is not equipped with the general-purpose gate sensor 1612 can adjust the rotation amount of the operation handle portion 461 so that the game ball flows down the left side of the center accessory 1400. The game will be adjusted as appropriate. In other words, if the operation handle portion 461 is rotated too much in the clockwise direction, the game ball is strongly driven and flows only on the right side of the center accessory 1400, and the normal lottery based on the detection of the normal gate sensor 1612 is performed. Since it is not performed and the opportunity to win a prize at the second starting port 1506 can not be obtained, the game operation such as strongly hitting the game ball into the dark cloud is suppressed, and the game by the operation of the operation handle portion 461 of the pachinko machine 1 is enjoyed. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  By the way, in this example, when the normal symbol display 1806 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the passing of the game ball is detected by the general gate sensor 1612, the normal symbol of the fluctuation is stopped and generated / extracted first. Until the result of the normal random number is finalized, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the general-purpose gate sensor 1612 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on a normal symbol storage number display 1812. This normal symbol memory number display 1812 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the memory number by the combination of the light emission state of each LED which is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four Memorize and display. When the number of memories exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the usual gate sensor 1612 is discarded.

  The game ball that has flowed down the side surface of the center bonus 1400 is moved toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 605 below the center bonus 1400 by an obstacle nail (not shown), a guide shelf 1718 of the side prize opening member 1700, or the like. It is like that. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 1702 disposed below the center accessory 1400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2151, the main control board 1350 makes a payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are stored in the storage unit 381. To be paid out.

  If a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general prize opening 1702, the first start opening 1502, the second start opening 1506, and the big prize opening 1510, the game area 605 It is provided at the center lower end in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 1702, the first starting port 1502, the second starting port 1506, or the big winning port 1510, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 605. The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side.

  When a game ball flowing down the side surface of the center accessory 1400 enters the warp inlet 1402 opened on the outer peripheral side surface of the center accessory 1400, a ninety-nine fold guide in the frame of the center accessory 1400 is provided via the warp passage 1404. After being supplied to the path 1410, it is supplied to the stage 1406. The ninety-nine fold guide path 1410 can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling while meandering in the front-rear direction, and can reduce the rolling speed (flowing speed) of the game ball and supply it to the stage 1406. It has become. Then, the game ball supplied onto the stage 1406 first rolls on the first stage 1406a in the stage 1406 in the left-right direction, and then rolls on the second stage 1406b in the left-right direction. The game will be released into the game area 605 below the center bonus 1400. At this time, when a game ball enters the entrance 1414 of the second stage 1406b, it is released into the game area 605 from the discharge port 1416 that opens directly above the first start port 1502 at the center of the lower end of the center accessory 1400. It has become.

  In this example, when a game ball is discharged from the discharge port 1416 of the center accessory 1400 into the game area 605, the first start port 1502 is won with a very high probability, and the game ball is started for the first time. When received by the mouth 1502 and detected by the first starter sensor 2152, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381 via the main control board 1350 and the like. It has become so. It should be noted that a game ball released from the concave groove 1412 of the center accessory 1400 or a game ball flowing down the center accessory 1400 can be awarded to the first start port 1502 with a certain probability. It has become.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the general gate 1600 having the left general gate sensor 1612 and “normal hit” is selected as the normal lottery result, the second starting port 1506 is closed as described above. When the pair of movable pieces 1504 are spread for a predetermined time and can be won, and when the winning is possible, the game ball is received by the second start port 1506 and detected by the second start port sensor 1516. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381 via the control board 1350 and the like.

  Further, in the main control board 1350, when a game ball wins the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506 and is detected by the first start port sensor 2152 or the second start port sensor 1516, the respective start is performed. A predetermined first special random number or second special random number is generated / extracted according to the mouths 1502 and 1506. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the display of the variation of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1802 or second special symbol display 1804 of the symbol display device 1800 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting that “the result of the determination process is successful”, the condition device is activated, Detection of the passage of a game ball to the special figure gate A1900 by the special figure gate sensor A1901 and detection of the passage of the game ball to the special figure gate B1910 by the special figure gate sensor B1911 are validated. Then, after the condition device is activated, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910, the number of rounds in the big hit game is determined, and the big hit game is executed by the CPU 2502 functioning as the big hit game execution means Is done. When the jackpot game is executed, the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and during that time, the game balls are won in the big prize opening 1510, so that more game balls can be obtained. ing. When one game ball wins the big prize opening 1510, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381.

  At the first start port 1502 and the second start port 1506, the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804 in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display by the general gate 1600. When a special symbol such as during a variation display or during a jackpot game as a special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, a game ball wins the start opening 1502 1506 and the first start opening sensor 2152 or the second start opening When the game ball is detected by the sensor 1516, the first extracted from the detection signals from the first start port sensor 2152 and the second start port sensor 1516 until the special symbol change display is possible. The special random number and the second special random number are stored and the display thereof is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers is displayed on the first special symbol memory number display 1808, So as to display in the two special symbol memory number display 1810. Each of these first special symbol memory number display 1808 and second special symbol memory number display 1810 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the memory number by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are memorized and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 1350 (especially the CPU 2502), the first special random number acquired (extracted) based on the detection of the first start port sensor 2152 and the second start port sensor 1516, or the special random number of the second special random number, By comparing with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table) that is determined in advance, the special random number is “lost” and “special hit” that is a condition for operating the condition device. Which one is determined is determined. In addition, by comparing the pattern random number acquired (extracted) based on the detection of the first start port sensor 2152 and the second start port sensor 1516 with a predetermined random number determination table that is set in advance, there is no “high probability time shortening” Also, "winning per chance", "per-time reduction", "high probability per-time reduction", etc. are discriminated.

  On the other hand, based on the fact that the extracted first special random number and second special random number are “special hits”, the conditional device is activated, and then the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 in which the passage detection is validated. When the game ball passes through, the main control board 1350 has a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 is opened, or a predetermined number (for example, 10). When any of the conditions for winning a game ball at the grand prize opening 1510 is satisfied, an open / close pattern in which the open / close member 1508 is closed (one open / close pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). A jackpot game executing means for executing the jackpot game is provided. The jackpot game execution means is advantageous to the player by repeating 4 rounds for “4R jackpot”, 8 rounds for “8R jackpot” and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”. The jackpot game is to be executed. Also, if the probability variation function is activated after the jackpot game is over (determining whether the probability variation function is activated or not is determined according to the symbol random number acquired at the time of winning at the start ports 1502 and 1506). It is controlled to a high probability state in which the probability variation special figure determination table is referred to in the determination process.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the special lottery result on the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506 is used. Accordingly, the first special symbol display 1808 and the second special symbol display 1810 of the symbol display device 1800 are variably displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 640 also displays an effect image corresponding to the special lottery result. It is like that. Specifically, on the liquid crystal display device 640, a series of a plurality of different symbol sequences are displayed (in this example, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in three columns). In this state, the display of the variation of each symbol sequence is started, then it is stopped in sequence, and when all symbol sequences are finally stopped, the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is determined. The result is suggested to the player. In other words, according to the special lottery result of the start winning prize, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed in a variable manner (stop display when the special lottery result is “special win”) Decorative symbols to be played (one of the same combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols, "High Probability Short / No Perpendicular", "Probable Per Change", "Short Time Per Short", "High Probability Short A different winning symbol may be stopped and displayed for each of the “winning”), and a decorative symbol that is stopped when the special lottery result is “losing” (a combination of left, middle, and right decorative symbols) Any one of the combinations including two or more types of symbols) is displayed (the liquid crystal display device 640 is more than the special symbols of the first and second special symbol indicators 1808 and 1810). For easy-to-see large towards the symbol (decorative symbol) displayed, typically the player becomes to note symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the “reach effect image” is displayed so that the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed leaving one variable symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition (reach) As a special lottery result in which this “reach effect image” is displayed, there are “per reach” and “reach lose”. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. Further, the liquid crystal display device 640 can display not only an effect display related to the start winning prize but also a “hit game effect image” displayed during the jackpot game.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1808 and the second special symbol display 1810 is directly controlled by the main control board 1350 (see FIG. 131). The symbol variation display on the liquid crystal display device 640 is performed by the peripheral control board 2600 and the liquid crystal display control board 2612 based on a special lottery result transmitted from the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 2600 or a command related to the normal lottery result. To be controlled. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 640 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 2600 or the like, so that there is a certain lottery result transmitted from the main control board 1350. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command, and the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be increased. In addition, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the jackpot game is controlled by the peripheral control board 2600 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 1350 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and hard to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  Then, the reach development effect in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated concretely. This reach development effect is based on the fact that the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first start opening 1502 and the second start opening 1506 are determined according to a predetermined random number determination table. ”Or“ Leach Loss ”, and an effect that is executed for those that have been determined to perform a reach development effect. In the main control board 1350 of this example, when a special random number for which the reach development effect is performed is extracted, the variation time of the length corresponding to the reach development effect is selected and the special symbol is variably displayed, and the reach development effect is displayed. An effect command to be performed is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600. When the peripheral control board 2600 receives an effect command for performing the reach development effect, the peripheral control board 2600 obtains a predetermined effect random number, and uses the effect random number and the predetermined determination table to generate the reach extension effect image. The reach development effect image is selected and displayed, and the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 of the back unit 2000 are caused to emit light effect and movable effect so as to correspond to the reach development effect image.

  As an example of this reach development effect, when the symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 reach a reach state, the side decoration members 2302 of the left and right side movable decoration bodies 2300 located at the approach positions close to each other are separated from each other. After moving to the separation position, the reach development effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 145). Accordingly, after the reach state is reached, the side decoration member 2302 moves to the separation position, so that the viewing range of the display screen that can be viewed from the player side is expanded in the left-right direction, and the display screen is widened. On the other hand, it is possible to expect an effect that enhances the interest by having a sense of expectation that “the result of the determination process may be successful”. In addition, since the reach development effect image is displayed on a large screen, it is possible to enhance the sense of reality for the effect image, and to entertain the effect image and to suppress a decrease in interest for the game. ing.

  In this embodiment, as another example of the reach development effect, a reach development effect called “hammer chance reach” (hereinafter simply referred to as “hammer chance”) can be performed. When the symbol variably displayed on the display device 640 is in a reach state, the peripheral control board 2600 displays a guidance on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 that prompts the player to repeatedly press the operation button 330 and opens the double door Is displayed (see FIG. 146 (a)). Subsequently, when the operation of the operation button 330 arranged on the front surface of the door frame 5 is accepted by the peripheral control board 2600 and the player operates the operation button 330 in this state, the buttocks of the center movable decorative body 2200 While the striking rotation is performed so that 2202 hits the door design T, an image is displayed such that the door design T displayed as the striking rotation of the collar 2202 opens (see FIG. 146 (a)). ). In addition, the presence of the door pattern in which the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 vibrates in the left-right direction and the moving image is displayed as it opens is further enhanced with the striking rotation of the collar portion 2202. It has become.

  In this reach development effect, the player operates the operation button 330 for a predetermined time, and the effect is performed so that the door design is opened by hitting the door design T with the buttocks 2202 and the operation button 330 is operated. Thus, the interest of the player can be enhanced by whether or not the door pattern T can be opened. In particular, when the result of the success / failure determination process for the special random number is “special hit”, at least two of the three operation buttons 330 are selected so that the player is forced to use both hands. Information on the content that prompts the player to repeatedly strike is displayed. By doing so, the launch of the game ball toward the game area is interrupted before the condition device is activated, and after the condition device is activated, the special gate on the side contrary to the player's will is moved to the game ball. Can be avoided.

  Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the operation of the operation button 330 is made unacceptable, and if the special random number related to this effect is “special hit”, the door design T is opened (FIG. 146 ( C)), an image indicating “special hit” is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640 after the display indicating that “special hit” is made and the reach development effect is finished. On the other hand, if the special random number related to this effect is “losing”, a display suggesting “losing” is made with the symbol door closed, and the reach development effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the start of “hammer chance” is instructed as the reach development effect based on the instruction from the effect control means 2659, the reach development effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 via the effect display control means 2656. Display of the specific effect image (hammer chance effect image) is started. As shown in FIG. 146, the hammer chance effect image is a display of the door picture T, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 for a predetermined display time (for example, about 15 seconds). Yes.

  When the display of the hammer chance effect image is started on the liquid crystal display device 640, the door pattern T is displayed as shown in FIG. 146 (a) until a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) elapses from the beginning. When the display mode is “fully closed” and a predetermined time has elapsed, the door symbol T is changed to a slightly opened display mode (display mode “open small”) and the operation receiving unit 2666 operates the operation button 330. Can be accepted. In this state, even if the lottery is not performed by the operation lottery means 2673 and the door button T is hit by the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 by operating the operation button 330, the door design is changed by the picture change means 2670. The display mode of T is not changed (changed). Even in this state, when the operation button 330 is operated and the door design T is hit by the collar portion 2202, the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 vibrates in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. At the same time, a moving image with a feeling that the door pattern T swings and opens is displayed.

  Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) elapses after the operation accepting unit 2666 can accept the operation of the operation button 330, an operation lottery is performed by the operation lottery unit 2673 according to an instruction from the effect control unit 2659. Thus, when the operation button 330 is operated, an operation lottery is performed simultaneously with the striking rotation of the buttock 2202, and when the operation lottery result is won, the design change means 2670 displays the door design T as “open small”. The display mode is changed to the “open” display mode. When the display mode of the door picture T is changed by the picture changing means, the effect control means 2659 operates the operation button 330 by the operation accepting means 2666 for a predetermined short time (for example, about 0.5 seconds). It is supposed to be unacceptable. As a result, the display mode of the door design T is continuously changed in a short time to prevent the individual display mode from being difficult to recognize, and the display mode of the door design T is completely changed at an early stage. Therefore, it can be prevented from becoming “fully open”.

  In this “hammer chance”, the door design T is struck by the heel portion 2202 by the operation of the operation button 330, and every time the operation lottery selected by the operation lottery means 2673 is won by the operation of the operation button 330, The display mode changes from “open small” to “open”, from “open” to “open large”, and further from “open large” to “full open”. By gradually changing the degree of opening, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for “the result of the success / failure determination process is successful” and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In this “hammer chance”, as shown in FIG. 148, the operation lottery probability that the winning lottery is selected by the operation lottery means 2673 by the effect control means 2659 is varied according to the display mode of the door picture T. Specifically, when the display pattern of the door pattern T is “open small”, the winning probability is 1/3, when “opening”, the winning probability is 1/5, and “open large”. The winning probability is 1/5, and the more the door design T is opened, the harder it is to win.

  Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 7 seconds) has elapsed after the operation control lottery 2647 is enabled by the operation control lottery 2659 by the effect control unit 2659, the operation lottery in the operation lottery unit 2673 is stopped, and the operation receiving unit When a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) elapses after the operation of the operation button 330 can be received by 2666, the operation reception unit 2666 disables the operation of the operation button 330, and then the predetermined time (for example, 2 When the second to 4 seconds) elapses, the display of the hammer chance effect image is ended. That is, as shown in FIG. 147, the operation button 330 is operated during the operation receivable time range (corresponding to the first time range of the present invention) during the display time with respect to the display time of the hammer chance effect image. In addition, the operation lottery is performed by operating the operation button 330 during the lottery available time range (corresponding to the second time range of the present invention) in the operation acceptable time range. When the operation button 330 is operated during the acceptable time range, the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 strikes the door design T, and when the operation button 330 is operated during the lottery available time range, the collar portion 2202 is opened. The design T is struck and an operation lottery is performed. When the operation lottery is won, the display mode of the door design T is changed to a display mode opened one step.

  Also, in this “hammer chance”, when the special lottery result by the start winning is “per reach”, the production control means 2659 displays the door symbol T as “open” when the operation acceptable time range ends. If it is “Large” or “Fully open”, the display mode of the door symbol T is displayed as “Fully open”, the display of the hammer chance effect image is terminated, and the display mode of the door symbol T is displayed at the end of the operation acceptable time range. However, if it is “open small” or “opening”, the display mode of the door pattern T is once set to “fully closed”, then displayed as “fully open”, and the display of the hammer chance effect image is ended. ing. As a result, the “Hammer Chance” ends when the door pattern T is “fully open”, so that the player can feel that the game by the operation of the operation button 330 has been cleared. It has become possible to enhance interest in what is done.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the special lottery result is “per reach” and “hammer chance” ends, an effect image (dungeon mode) that enters the underground labyrinth is then displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 as an effect image. ) Is displayed, and a special lottery result is suggested by a picture (for example, a small crocodile, a treasure box, a treasure, an hourglass, etc.) displayed at the intrusion destination.

  On the other hand, when the special lottery result by the start winning is “Leach Loss”, the production control means 2659 changes the display mode of the door pattern T to the “fully closed” display mode when the operation acceptable time range ends, and the hammer chance The display of the effect image is terminated. As a result, the “Hammer Chance” ends when the door design T is “fully closed”, and the player recognizes that the game by the operation of the operation button 330 cannot be cleared and the special lottery result is “losing”. It can be made to.

  As described above, in the above-described reach development effect, the operation of the operation button 330 can be accepted, and the operation of the operation button 330 causes the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 to strike the door design T, and simply the design. Compared with the case where the hammer is displayed on the display screen, the three-dimensional heel part 2202 actually moves and hits the door pattern T, so that a sense of reality is increased and the player's interest can be further enhanced. It is possible to improve the interests.

  The reach development effects include various effect patterns other than the effect patterns described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 149 (a), the under decorative member 2402 of the under movable decorative body 2400 is raised, and a predetermined design (for example, a waveform design) is displayed on the rear side of the window 2408a in the liquid crystal display device 640. It may be possible to increase the expectation of “special hit” by suggesting the possibility of “special hit” depending on the color, size, movement, etc. of the symbol. As an effect using the under movable decorative body 2400, in addition to the reach development effect, the same effect may be performed during the variable display of symbols.

  In addition to the above, the reach development effect is omitted in addition to the above, but as an effect of finalizing the last symbol after reaching reach on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, In the state where the symbols are displayed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction, by hitting with the collar 2202 of the front symbol center movable decorative body 2200, the symbols on the near side are destroyed so that the symbols on the rear side appear. Thus, it is also possible to produce such an effect that even the symbol that becomes “special hit” is destroyed by the buttocks 2202.

  In addition, when the symbols of the three symbol sequences are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols suggesting “special hit”, a movable effect is performed in which the symbols are struck by the buttocks 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 and hit. It is also possible to perform an image effect in which the displayed symbol is displayed so as to fly backward, thereby making it possible to entertain the movement of the buttocks 2202 in the center movable decorative body 2200 and to provide “big hit game”. The expectation to be started can be raised, and it can control that interest falls.

  In addition to the above, as a reach development effect, a reach development effect called “crocodile panic reach” (hereinafter simply referred to as “crocodile panic”) shown in FIGS. 150 to 159 can be performed. ing. This “crocodile panic” is controlled by the effect control means 2659 based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 is displayed. In addition, three appearance positions Z1, Z2, and Z3 arranged in the left-right direction are displayed, and a special effect image in which the crocodile pattern W appears and disappears at the appearance positions Z1, Z2, and Z3 is displayed. By operating the push buttons 330 a, 330 b, and 330 c of the operation button 330 disposed on the front surface, the crocodile pattern W that appears and appears is hit with the heel part 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200, and appears at the heel part 2202. When you hit a crocodile pattern W, points will be added, and you will be able to compete for how many crocodile patterns W can be struck during a given time. It has become a production that was.

  Further, in this “crocodile crocodile panic”, a target of 20 hits is set as the number of crocodile patterns W to be hit, and when the target is achieved (cleared), “the result of the success / failure determination process is hit”. Production is to be made. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 152, the display time of “crocodile panic” is divided into the first half and the second half, and the crocodile pattern W appears and disappears during each display time. A plurality of crocodile patterns W (for example, 29 to 35) appear and disappear during the operation receivable time range in which the operation of the operation button 330 can be received by the means 2666 (for example, the first half is about 14 seconds and the second half is about 15 seconds). It is like that. Thereby, the motivation to the second half is heightened by the number of crocodile patterns W hit in the first half. In the latter half of the display time, the operation receivable time range is further divided into three time ranges of A cut, B cut, and C cut (for example, about 5 seconds each).

  Further, the production contents of “crocodile panic” will be described in detail. When the production pattern selecting “crocodile panic” is selected by the production pattern selection unit 2652 based on the command from the main control board 1350, the production control unit 2659 The liquid crystal display device 640 is caused to start displaying the first half of the crocodile panic effect image as the special effect image via the effect display control means 2656. When the display of the effect image in the first half is started, three appearance positions Z1, Z2, and Z3 arranged in the left-right direction are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 150A), and the appearance position. There is a guidance (display or voice guidance) that prompts the user to operate one of the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c in the operation button 330 so that the crocodile pattern W appearing in Z1, Z2, and Z3 is hit with the collar 2202 Made.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the first half effect image is started, the operation accepting unit 2666 operates the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c in response to an instruction from the effect control unit 2659. Can be accepted, and the crocodile pattern W appears and disappears from the predetermined appearance positions Z1, Z2, and Z3 according to the appearance pattern for the first half. As shown in FIG. 153, the crocodile pattern W appears from the lower side toward the upper side where the flange portion 2202 is arranged, and the crocodile pattern W exceeds the line β. When the crocodile pattern W rises (advances) and crosses the line α, the crocodile pattern W opens and bites, and then moves backward and sinks. It is a kind of movement.

  By the way, in the effect control means 2659, prior to displaying the effect image of the first half, one appearance pattern is selected from the plurality of appearance patterns for the first half stored in the ROM 2604 in advance, and the crocodile pattern that appears based on the appearance pattern is displayed. W position, speed, amount of appearance, etc. are controlled. As shown in the example of FIG. 154, the first half of the haunt pattern divides the first half of the acceptable operation time range into 14 stages (for example, 1 stage is about 1 second), and the crocodile pattern W appears and disappears at each stage. Positions Z1, Z2, and Z3, and the speed and amount of appearing and appearing are determined, and multiple types (for example, 8 types) of appearing and appearing patterns are prepared in advance. In this first half infestation pattern, 14 crocodile patterns W appear and appear, and the appearance speed of the crocodile pattern W that appears is only low speed or medium speed. The crocodile pattern W can be hit.

  The crocodile pattern W has a low speed (for example, 1.0 seconds for appearance, 0.5 seconds for backward movement), a medium speed (for example, 0.8 seconds for appearance, 0.4 seconds for backward movement), and a high speed (for example, Appearance is possible at any of the three appearance speeds of 0.5 seconds for appearance and 0.2 seconds for receding. In FIG. 154, “Fake” means that the amount of appearance of the crocodile pattern W is small (for example, in FIG. 153, the crocodile pattern W moves backward immediately after exceeding the line β).

  When the player operates one of the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c with respect to the crocodile pattern W that appears and disappears in a predetermined pattern, the push button 330a and the push button 330a and the hook part 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 are operated. 330b, 330c and corresponding appearance positions Z1, Z2, Z3 are moved and rotated. The operation of the center movable decorative body 2200 will be described in detail. When the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c are operated, the push buttons 330a, 330b, 330c operated by the center movable decorative body control means 2660 via the movable effect control means 2658 are operated. When the center moving motor 2214 is driven so that the sliding body 2222 moves in the direction corresponding to 330 b and 330 c, the saddle motor 2226 is driven so that the flange 2202 strikes the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 at substantially the same time. . After that, when the sliding body 2222 moves to the left and right predetermined positions by driving the center moving motor 2214, the center moving motor 2214 is driven in reverse to stop after the sliding body 2222 returns to the substantially central position in the left and right direction. Let On the other hand, when the eaves part 2202 is rotated to the striking position by the eaves motor 2226, the eaves motor 2226 is reversely driven to return the eaves part 2202 to the swinging position and then stopped. The center movable decorative body 2200 is driven substantially simultaneously from the movement of the sliding body 2222 in the left-right direction to the return to the center, the rotation of the collar 2202 to the striking position, and the return to the swing-up position. In addition, the trajectory of the buttock 2202 appears to rotate diagonally, and the striking action of the buttock 2202 is faster than when each movement is executed in turn. It has become.

  When the intermediate push button 330b is operated, the center moving motor 2214 is not driven, only the heel motor 2226 is driven, and only the heel portion 2202 is hit while the sliding body 2222 is positioned substantially at the center. It is designed to return to the swinging position after turning. Further, while the center moving motor 2214 and the heel motor 2226 are being driven, that is, until the sliding body 2222 is returned to the center position and the heel portion 2202 is returned to the swinging position, the operation of the operation button 330 is not accepted. Until the center movable decorative body 2200 finishes one operation by the operation of the operation button 330, the striking position cannot be changed by the collar 2202. Thereby, if the operation position of the operation button 330 is wrong with respect to the appearance position of the crocodile pattern W, there is a high possibility that the desired crocodile pattern W will not be hit (see FIG. 150 (C)). More accurate operation of the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c can be requested.

  On the other hand, in response to the striking rotation of the collar part 2202 by the operation of the push buttons 330a, 330b, 330c, the striking judgment means 2668 determines whether or not the striking part 2202 that has been struck hits the crocodile pattern W. It has become. The hitting determination of the crocodile pattern W by the flange 2202 is performed on the crocodile pattern W along with the position and operation timing of the push buttons 330 a, 330 b, and 330 c on the operated operation button 330 and the operation of the operation button 330. Whether or not the crocodile pattern W has been hit is determined by the hit determination means 2668 based on the operation lottery result drawn by the lottery means 2673.

  Specifically, it takes about 0.5 seconds from when the operation button 330 is operated to when the heel part 2202 is rotated to the striking position. Time to move to the position (position beyond the line β in FIG. 153) is about 0.7 seconds, and the position at which it becomes impossible to strike after the crocodile pattern W starts to be struck by the heel part 2202 When the time to move to is about 1.0 seconds, the corresponding operation button 330 is operated at a timing within a time range of about 0.2 seconds to 0.5 seconds after the appearance of the crocodile pattern W starts. When this is done, the crocodile pattern W2 and the crocodile pattern W that have been hit and rotated to the hitting position overlap each other, and the crocodile pattern W is hit. In the hit determining means 2668, the corresponding operation button 330 is operated at a timing within the time range, and when the winning operation lottery selected by the operation lottery means 2673 is won, the crocodile pattern W is hit by the buttock 2202. It is determined that In addition, the timing for determining the hit | damage mentioned above becomes a numerical value which changes with the appearance speed of the crocodile pattern W. In the first half of the “crocodile panic”, the operation lottery result lottered by the operation lottery means 2673 is selected at a rate of 100%.

  When the hit determining means 2668 determines that the hook 2202 that is hitting and rotating by hitting the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c hits the crocodile pattern W, the crocodile with the crocodile pattern W hit by the picture changing means 2670 is determined. At the same time as the picture W ′ is changed (see FIGS. 151D and 151E), a sound “It!” Is emitted from the speaker 163, and the crocodile picture W is given to the player at the buttock 2202. It is possible to visually recognize the hit. Further, when it is determined that the crocodile pattern W has been hit by the buttocks 2202 in the hit determining means 2668, one hit count is added by the hit count counting means 2672, and although not shown, it is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. As you can see the number of crocodile patterns W that were hit against the player by displaying an “x” mark on one of the 20 crocodile patterns that were displayed, and the number of remaining crocodile patterns W until they could be cleared It has become.

  In this way, the display of the first half effect image in the “crocodile panic” proceeds, causing the player to perform a batting game in which the crocodile pattern W is hit, and the crocodile pattern W appears and disappears with the end of the operation acceptable time range of the first half Is finished, and a comment corresponding to the number of strikes of the crocodile pattern W that has been struck is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640.

  In the latter half of the “crocodile panic”, the operation acceptable time range is divided into three cuts, and before the start of the display of each cut, the appearance pattern table changing means 2676 counts by the hit number counting means 2672 until then. Based on the number of hits and a predetermined appearance pattern table selection table (see FIG. 155) stored in advance in the ROM 2604, any of the appearance pattern tables from the pattern A to the pattern N is selected, and the appearance pattern selection is performed. It is changed to the appearance pattern table used by the means 2680. Then, based on the appearance pattern table selected / changed by the appearance pattern table changing means 2676, the display lottery means 2678, and the appearance pattern selection table (see FIG. 156) stored in advance in the ROM 2604, the appearance pattern selection means In 2680, a predetermined second-half appearance pattern (see FIGS. 157 and 158) is selected, and the crocodile pattern W is displayed according to the selected appearance pattern.

  As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the appearance pattern for the latter half divides the display time of each cut into five stages (for example, one stage is about 1 second), and the appearance position of the crocodile pattern W at each stage. Z1, Z2, and Z3, and the speed and amount of appearing and appearing are determined. Specifically, in the appearance patterns PTN1 to PTN3, as shown in the example of the appearance pattern PTN1 in FIG. 157 (a), the crocodile pattern W is substantially cut at any one of the appearance positions Z1, Z2 and Z3. The crocodile pattern W is made to appear repeatedly during the period (for example, for 4.2 seconds), and the crocodile pattern W is continuously hit by the player. In this pattern, if the crocodile pattern W is struck six times, it is not counted as the number of strucks even if struck further. In addition, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), examples of the appearance patterns PTN4 to PTN6 cause 3 to 4 crocodile patterns W to appear at low speed and 1 to 2 crocodile patterns W to be intermediate. It is designed to appear at high speed, and it has a very difficult appearance pattern.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 157 (c), examples of the appearance patterns PTN7 to PTN12 are obtained by causing one crocodile pattern W to appear at high speed or high speed fake, and about 4 crocodiles in one cut. The pattern W can be struck, and the pattern has a low difficulty level. In addition, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), the appearance patterns PTN13 to PTN18 cause three crocodile patterns W to appear at low speed or medium speed, and two to three crocodile patterns W are displayed. It is made to appear at high speed or high speed fake, and it is possible to hit about 3 crocodile patterns W in one cut, and it has a moderate appearance level.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 157 (e), the appearance patterns PTN19 to PTN24 are about 2 in one cut so that two or three crocodile patterns W appear and disappear at low speed or medium speed. The crocodile pattern W can be struck, and it is a haunting pattern with high difficulty. In addition, as shown in FIG. 158 (f), an example of the appearance pattern PTN25, the appearance patterns PTN25 to PTN30 cause one crocodile pattern W to appear at low speed or medium speed and about one crocodile pattern in one cut. It is designed to be able to strike W, and has a haunting pattern with extremely high difficulty. In addition, as shown in FIG. 158 (ki), examples of the appearance patterns PTN31 to PTN36 cause 2 to 4 crocodile patterns W to appear at high speed and the remaining crocodile patterns W to be medium-speed fake or high-speed. It is a haunting pattern in which no crocodile pattern W can be struck by fake.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 155, the appearance pattern table selection table used by the appearance pattern table changing means 2676 is such that the pattern I of the pattern table is selected when the number of crocodile patterns W is hit, As shown in FIG. 156, the pattern I of the pattern table can be selected only from one of the appearance patterns PTN31 to PTN36 among the appearance patterns for the second half. The crocodile pattern W that appears in the street cannot be hit. In other words, as the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W increases, a more difficult appearance pattern is selected, and it is difficult to hit 20 crocodile patterns W (clear the hitting game). .

  In the latter half effect image, similarly to the first half effect image, the operation lottery by the operation lottery means 2673 is selected with a probability of 100%.

  In this "crocodile crocodile panic", when the crocodile pattern W that appears at high speed is struck, or when the game lottery result by the start prize is "losing", the crocodile pattern other than high speed (including high speed fake) When the number of hits is 20th when W is hit, the operation lottery probability to win the operation lottery in the operation lottery means 2673 is changed according to the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W as a special performance specification. Thus, the “crocodile panic” is controlled so that it is almost impossible to hit (clear) 20 crocodile patterns W that appear and disappear. Specifically, when the crocodile pattern W with a high appearance speed is hit, the operation lottery means 2673 draws the operation lottery result with a winning probability corresponding to the number of crocodile pattern W hits based on the operation lottery probability selection table. As shown in FIG. 159, the winning probability is 100% until the number of hits is 17, but when the hit number is 18 or more, the winning probability is 80% for the A pattern and 0% for the B pattern. The hit determination means 2668 makes a hit determination. When the game lottery result is “losing”, when the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W is 19, when the crocodile pattern W appears at high speed (including high-speed fake), the winning probability of the operation lottery by the operation lottery means 2673 Is set to 100%, and when the crocodile pattern W appears at a speed other than high speed, the winning determination probability of the operation lottery by the operation lottery means 2673 is set to 0%, and the hit determination means 2668 makes a hit determination (see FIG. 159). B pattern may be applied). As described above, in the special effect specification, the hitting game of the crocodile pattern W cannot be substantially cleared.

  Then, when the above-described effect control is performed and the operation receivable time range in the latter half of the effect image ends, the operation accepting unit 2666 makes the operation of the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c unacceptable, and the illustration is omitted. However, a large crocodile pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 as a boss crocodile, and a comment corresponding to the number of hits is displayed to end the “crocodile crocodile panic”.

  When the result of the round number determination process B (step S2012) is “15R big hit”, the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 moves, hits and destroys the boss crocodile, and ends the “crocodile panic”. It has become a transition to gaming. On the other hand, when the result of the round number determination process B (step S2012) is “4R big hit” and the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W has not reached 20, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 after the comment of the boss crocodile. Is reciprocally moved (vibrated) in the left-right direction, and the “crocodile panic” is terminated while the LED 2122 in the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 is flashing violently, and the game shifts to a big hit game.

  Next, the jackpot game effect will be specifically described. The jackpot game effect of this example is that the result of the success / failure determination process for the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506 is “ “Special hit”, which is caused by the passing of the game ball through the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910, and the opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. It is an effect executed during the execution of In the main control board 1350 of this example, if the result of the determination process for the special random number is “special hit”, an effect command for symbol corresponding to this “special hit” is generated and sent to the peripheral control board 2600. And send. Then, in the peripheral control board 2600, upon receiving an effect command for winning a symbol, a predetermined effect random number is obtained, and a winning game effect image is selected using the effect random number and the predetermined effect effect table. By displaying a “winning effect image” indicating that the result of the determination process for the special random number is winning in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640, the player is informed that the condition device has been activated. It is like that.

  When the passing of the game ball to the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1901 is detected after the condition device is activated, the above “winning effect image” displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640. Instead, a “big hit game effect image” indicating that the big hit game is executed is displayed. Further, in order to correspond to the display of the “big hit game effect image”, the player is informed that the big hit game is executed by causing the light emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006 of the back unit 2000 to emit light and moving effect. It has come to let you know.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 by the player operating the operation handle 461 is received in the general winning opening 1702 or the like, the predetermined ball ball unit 800 has a predetermined value. When a number of game balls are paid out and a game ball is received at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506, a pass / fail determination process for a special random number is performed. If the result of this success / failure determination process is “special hit”, the condition device is activated, and in the state where this condition device is activated, the passage of the game ball to the special figure gate A1900 or the special figure gate B1910 becomes more opportunity. The player's interest can be enhanced by obtaining an opportunity to execute a “big hit game” in which game balls are paid out.

  On the other hand, when the result of the success / failure determination processing for the special random number (“reach per reach” or “reach lose”) is drawn, a special effect in which the crocodile pattern W as a special effect pattern appears on the liquid crystal display device 640 by the effect control means 2659. When the image (crocodile panic reach reach image) is displayed and the operation of the operation button 330 is accepted, and the player operates the push buttons 330a, 330b, 330c of the operation button 330 in accordance with the appearance of the crocodile pattern W, When it is determined that the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 is struck and rotated toward the in / out positions Z1, Z2, and Z3 corresponding to the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c, and the crocodile pattern W is struck by the collar portion 2202. The number of hits of the crocodile pattern W is counted, and then the determination result of the special random number and the number of hits are predetermined conditions. Satisfying (number batting 19) and striking games like stops the striking determination by striking rotation of the hammer portion 2202 is deployed. That is, in the batting game, at least the determination result of the special random number and the number of battings do not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the batting judgment of the special effect image at the buttocks 2202 by the operation of the push buttons 330a, 330b, 330c is simply performed. As a result, the player feels distrust and discomfort compared to the case where the hit is not judged even though the hit is made as before, or the number of hits is different for the pattern hit. It is possible to prevent an uncomfortable feeling of the game of hitting the crocodile pattern W that appears and disappears by operating the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Since the hit judgment is stopped when the number of hits satisfies a predetermined condition, even if you clear the hit game Spruce determination processing result can be prevented from being reduced the interest in the game by discouraging the player without "special hit" occurs because of the "loss".

  Further, at least the result of the determination process for the special random number (result indicating that it is “losing”) and the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W satisfy a predetermined condition (the number of hits is 19), and the hit determination is stopped. Yes. In other words, the hit determination is stopped when the hit number of the crocodile pattern W approaches the hit number (the hit number is 20) at which the hit game is cleared, and the push buttons 330a, 330b, Since the normal hit determination is performed until the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W hit by the buttocks 2202 by the operation of 330c approaches the number of hits to be cleared, it may give a sense of incongruity to the hit of the buttocks 2202 You can entertain the hitting game smoothly. Then, when approaching the number of hits to be cleared, the hit determination is stopped, and it is assumed that no hit is made even if the crocodile pattern W is hit with the buttocks 2202. Since it approaches the number of hits that will be cleared, there is little time that the hit judgment is stopped, and the hit game can be ended with almost no sense of incongruity to the player, and the interest in the game is reduced Can be suppressed. Also, since the batting game cannot be cleared, even if the condition device does not operate after the batting game ends (even if a “special hit” does not occur), the player's interest is avoided from being greatly discouraged. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Further, when the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c of the operation button 330 are operated during a batting game in which the crocodile pattern W appears, a predetermined operation lottery result is drawn, and the operation lottery result and the special lottery result are also used. The crocodile pattern W is determined to be hit. In fact, even if the crocodile pattern 2202 hits the crocodile pattern W, it is determined that the crocodile pattern W is not hit and is not counted as the hit number. It can be suppressed that the number of hits (20 hits) that becomes clear at an early stage is reached and the remaining time of the hit game cannot be enjoyed, and the interest is reduced.

  In addition, since the operation lottery result of the operation lottery means 2684 is taken into consideration for the hitting determination of the crocodile pattern W by the buttock 2202, even if it is thought that the crocodile pattern W was hit by the buttock 2202, it is hitting. The crocodile pattern W can be given a sense of expectation for the next time after making the player feel disappointed for a moment. Expecting the effect of suppressing the player's interests by suppressing the game from becoming monotonous by giving the mood inflection to the repetition with the operation of 330a, 330b, 330c. Can do.

  Further, when the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W by the buttocks 2202 is small, the lottery probability of the operation lottery result determined to have been hit is increased, and when the number of hits is large, the lottery probability is lowered. When the number increases, the probability that it is determined that the crocodile pattern W has been struck is lowered even if the push button 330a, 330b, 330c is operated and the buttock part 2202 is struck and rotated, and the number of hits is a hit that clears the hit game. You can prevent the hitting game from being cleared early by making it difficult to reach the number, and prevent it from being lost early so that you can no longer enjoy the remaining time of the hitting game and lose interest be able to. Further, since it is difficult to clear the batting game and the degree of difficulty can be increased, it is possible to further increase the sense of achievement when the batting game can be cleared and to suppress the player's interest from decreasing.

  Also, depending on the number of strikes of the crocodile pattern W actually hit by the operation of the push buttons 330a, 330b, 330c, the hitting game can be cleared or cannot be cleared by changing to a haunt pattern with different hitting difficulty levels. Compared to the case where the hit is not judged or the number of hits is changed even though the hit is made as in the past, the player feels distrust or discomfort. It is possible to prevent an uncomfortable feeling of the game of hitting the crocodile pattern W that appears and disappears by operating the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. A player who can hit a crocodile pattern W that appears at high speed cannot be regarded as a player who has a high level of skill in the hitting game and can clear the hitting game. Since the way, proficiency high player push buttons until the end of the striking game 330a, 330b, it becomes possible to operate the 330c, interest in the batting game can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 is movable in the direction in which the push buttons 330a, 330b, 330c are arranged, and the crocodile pattern W is pushed by the push button 330a. , 330b, 330c, and the like, and the crocodile pattern W can be struck by the heel portion 2202 at any position, so that the push buttons 330a, 330b of the operation button 330 can be hit. , 330c, it is possible to hit all the appearing crocodile patterns W with the heel part 2202, giving the player an irritation, a feeling of frustration, etc. resulting from the fact that the structure cannot be clearly hit as in the prior art. Can be prevented, and the player's motivation for the batting game is increased to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced. Rukoto can.

  Further, since at least the display of the special effect image is not started, the operation of the operation button 330 is not accepted, so even if the player carelessly operates the operation button 330 during a normal game, It is possible to prevent the collar portion 2202 of the center movable ornament 2200 from moving according to the operation, and to suppress the player's interest from being reduced by the unnecessary movement of the center movable ornament 2200. it can.

  Further, the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W hit by the collar 2202 by the operation of the push buttons 330a, 330b, 330c by the hit number counting means 2672 is counted, and the counted hit number or a predetermined hit number (hit Since the remaining number of hits with respect to the target number of hits in the game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, the target of the hit game can be re-recognized by recognizing the actual number of hits, It can be expected that the player's interest is enhanced toward clearing the hit game.

  Further, since the player's skill level for the batting game can be estimated from the progress of the special effect image and the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W by the operation of the push buttons 330a, 330b, 330c, the number of hits and the special effect image The optimum appearance pattern may be selected from the appearance patterns with different difficulty levels according to the progress of the game.For example, when the number of hits is small with respect to the progress of the special performance image, the player's skill Since the degree is low, the haunting pattern having a low hitting difficulty is selected so that the player can easily hit the crocodile pattern W, and the hitting game can be enjoyed. On the other hand, when the number of hits is large with respect to the progress of the special effect image, it is difficult to hit the crocodile pattern W by selecting a haunting pattern having a high hitting difficulty because the player is highly skilled. Thus, the player can be more concentrated on the batting game, and the interest can be prevented from being lowered.

  Furthermore, since the special effect image is divided into a plurality of cuts, and the appearance pattern is selected for each of the cuts, it is possible to suppress continuous control of the appearance pattern, and the load related to the effect control. It is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of the player's game, and to prevent a player from having trouble during the performance and reducing the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, when the cut of the special effect image is switched, the appearance pattern is selected from the predetermined appearance pattern table according to the display lottery result of the display lottery means 2678 separately from the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W. Therefore, compared with the case where the haunt pattern is selected only by the number of hits, the type of the haunt pattern to be selected can be widened, and the batting game can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Further, as the number of hits of the crocodile pattern W hit by the heel portion 2202 by the operation of the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c on the operation button 330 increases, the hitting pattern table changing unit 2676 changes the hitting pattern table to a higher hitting difficulty table. Since the appearance pattern is selected, it becomes difficult to hit the crocodile pattern W by the buttocks 2202 even if the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c are operated as the target hitting number for clearing the hitting game is approached. The player can concentrate on the operation of the push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c until the batting game is finished, and the game can be enjoyed until the end to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

  Also, if the hitting determination means 2668 determines that the buttock 2202 has hit the crocodile pattern W, the display mode of the crocodile pattern W is changed, so that the crocodile pattern W has been hit against the player. Can be recognized with certainty, and the enjoyment of hitting the crocodile pattern W can be given, and the hitting game can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, when the result of the success / failure determination process for the special random number acquired based on the start winning is “special hit”, the batting game based on the display of the special effect image cannot be cleared. After a large crocodile pattern (boss crocodile) is displayed, an effect image that is hit and destroyed by the buttocks 2202 is displayed, and the display of the special effect image ends. Therefore, even if the player's interest is reduced because the batting game cannot be cleared, the result of the pass / fail determination process for the special random number is given to the player because the boss crocodile is destroyed by the hit of the buttocks 2202 Can be enhanced by recognizing that the game is a “special hit”, and then the “round number determination process B” performed by the player firing a game ball toward the right side of the center bonus 1400. You can expect and maintain your interest in games.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment doors the liquid crystal display device 640 to the liquid crystal display device 640 when the result of the determination process of the special random number (“per reach” or “reach lose”) is drawn by starting winning. A specific effect image (hammer chance) on which the pattern T is displayed is displayed and the operation of the operation button 330 can be accepted. Then, when the player operates the operation button 330 while the specific effect image is displayed, the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 is turned and hits the door pattern T displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. The side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 reciprocates in the left-right direction, a predetermined operation lottery result is drawn, and the display pattern of the door pattern T is moved to the fully open display mode according to the lottery operation lottery result. Change one step. Accordingly, the player is surprised and entertained by the movement of the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 that are struck and rotated by the operation of the operation button 330 and the change of the door pattern T. It is possible to make it appear as if the door pattern T has changed due to the hitting of the buttocks 2202, the real feeling of the specific effect image is increased, the motivation for operating the operation button 330 is increased, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since the door picture T in the closed state is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 by the display of the specific effect image (hammer chance), it may be good if the door picture T is opened to the player at first glance. And the operation button 330 can be operated to hit the door design T by the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 to open the door design T, and display a specific effect image. A player can be actively participated in such an effect, and the effect on the game can be suppressed from deteriorating by making the effect enjoyable.

  Further, when the collar 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 is struck and rotated by the operation of the operation button 330, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 reciprocates in the left-right direction, so that only the collar 2202 is struck. Compared with the case where it is moved, it looks as if the side decoration member 2302 is swaying due to the impact of the impact of the collar 2202, and can improve the realistic feeling of the door design T impact by the collar 2202, It is possible to entertain the effects relating to the display of the specific effect image and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

  Further, the display mode of the door pattern T is changed in accordance with the operation lottery result that is selected based on the operation of the operation button 330. The operation of the operation button 330 causes the collar 2202 to strike the door pattern T. Since the door picture T may change or may not change, the player can continuously operate the operation button 330 so that the door picture T changes, and the specific effect image (hammer chance) ) Can be surely made to participate in the production related to the display, and the production related to the display of the specific production image can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced.

  Furthermore, the operation lottery result is drawn according to the operation of the operation button 330 during the lotterable time range within the operation receivable time range in which the specific effect image (hammer chance) is displayed and the operation of the operation button 330 can be received. Thus, it is possible to prevent the door design T from changing completely and becoming a fully open display mode from the start of display of the specific effect image. Thereby, while the specific effect image is displayed, it is possible to maintain the willingness to operate the operation button 330, and to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered, and to further reduce the door pattern T having a different display mode. Since it is not necessary to prepare many, it becomes possible to suppress an increase in the load on the ROM 2604, the CPU 2602, and the like, and the above-described control can be performed smoothly.

  Further, when the display mode of the door pattern T is changed by one step by the pattern changing means 2670, the operation of the operation button 330 cannot be accepted for a predetermined short time, and even if the operation button 330 is operated during that time, the center movable decorative body The barbed portion 2202 of 2200 does not rotate and the display mode of the door pattern T does not change. This allows the player to visually recognize the changed display pattern of the door picture T for at least a predetermined short period of time, and can recognize that the display pattern of the door picture T has changed, and entertain the door pattern T itself. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  In addition, when the display mode of the door pattern T changes, the operation of the operation button 330 is not accepted for a predetermined short time, and it is likely that the time until the display mode of the door pattern T changes next becomes longer. . As a result, the player can operate (operate repeatedly) the operation buttons 330 so that the display mode of the door pattern T changes quickly, and the operation buttons 330 can be operated continuously (continuously). It is possible to make the production related to the display of the specific production image (hammer chance) difficult to get tired, and to suppress the interest in the game from being lowered.

  Furthermore, according to the display mode of the door pattern T, the operation lottery means 2673 changes the lottery probability that the operation lottery result in which the display mode of the door pattern T is changed depends on the display mode of the door pattern T. The door pattern T is easy to change or difficult to change. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect relating to the display of the specific effect image (hammer chance) from becoming monotonous and to prevent it from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game due to difficulty in getting bored. .

  Further, when the special lottery result relating to the display of the specific effect image (hammer chance) is “special hit”, the display mode of the door design T is changed to the fully open display mode at the end of the specific effect image, and the display is ended. ing. As a result, the display of the specific effect image is prevented from ending in a half-finished state, and the specific effect image can be displayed without a sense of incongruity, preventing the display of the specific effect image from being enjoyed. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  In addition, when the special lottery result related to the display of the specific effect image (hammer chance) is “losing”, at the end of the specific effect image, the door design T is changed to a fully closed display mode and is ended. By returning the door pattern T to the first fully closed display mode, it seems that the game by the operation of the operation button 330 could not be cleared, so that the result of the determination process is not “winning” after displaying the specific effect image. Can make you think. Thereby, even if it is not actually “winning determination result is successful”, it is possible to alleviate the feeling that the player has lost, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control board box 624 containing the main control board 1350 is supported by the panel holder 600 and the second decoration control board 1358 as the peripheral control board 2600 is housed. The decoration control board box 1360 is supported across the back side of the back box 2002 and the liquid crystal display device 640. Thereby, compared with the case where the main control board box 624 and the second decoration control board box 1360 are arranged to overlap in the front-rear direction, the space in the front-rear direction occupied by the board boxes 624, 1360 can be reduced. Relatively, the space behind the game panel 599 can be widened. In addition, it is possible to dispose a large light-emitting decorative body 2004, a movable decorative body 2006, and the like in the expanded space. By arranging the large light-emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006, an effect by the liquid crystal display device 640 is achieved. Not only images but also light emitting decorations (light emitting effects) of the light emitting decorative body 2004 and movable effects of the movable decorative body 2006 can be performed. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second decoration control board box 1360 is supported on the rear side so as to straddle the back box 2002 and the liquid crystal display device 640, the exposure amount of the second decoration control board box 1360 can be increased. This makes it possible to sufficiently release the heat generated from the second decoration control board 1358 and prevent the malfunction of the operation of the CPU 2602 and the like due to the heat storage, which is unstable. Thereby, the effect by the liquid crystal display device 640, the light emitting decorative body 2004, and the movable decorative body 2006 can be surely controlled, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. Moreover, even if the production control on the second decoration control board 1358 is increased to increase the amount of heat generation, the heat can be sufficiently radiated. Accordingly, the second decorative control board 1358 allows the three types of movable decorative bodies 2006, that is, the center movable decorative body 2200, the side movable decorative body 2300, and the under movable decorative body 2400, the light emitting decorative body 2004, and the liquid crystal display device 640. Can be reliably controlled, and it is difficult to get bored by performing various effects with the movable decorative body 2006, the light emitting decorative body 2004, and the liquid crystal display device 640, and further prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced. be able to.

  Further, since the second decoration control board box 1360 and the liquid crystal display device 640 are separated, the liquid crystal display device 640 has a liquid crystal as compared with the case where the peripheral control board 2600 such as the second decoration control board 1358 is provided. An increase in the cost of the display device 640 can be prevented. Thereby, when trouble occurs in the liquid crystal display device 640, it is possible to prevent an increase in cost for replacement or repair of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

  Further, the center role 1400 provided in the transparent game panel 599, the light-emitting decorative body 2004 seen through the transparent game panel 599 on the outer periphery of the center role 1400, the liquid crystal display device 640 seen through the ring of the center role 1400, and the movable A decorative body 2006 is provided. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a different atmosphere at first glance from the conventional pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can attract the player at a glance by enhancing the decoration of the entire game area 605 As the pachinko machine 1 which can be set to 1 and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, even when the liquid crystal display device 640 is not fixed to the back box 2002, the second decoration control board box 1360 can be supported by the back box side support portion 2036 of the back box 2002. Thus, even when the liquid crystal display device 640 is not attached to the back box 2002, the operation of the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 fixed to the back box 2002 is checked for the second decoration in the second decoration control board box 1360. It becomes possible to carry out via the peripheral control board 2600 such as the control board 1358, and in the assembling process of the pachinko machine 1, a defective product can be found at an early stage, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to.

  Further, the second decoration control board box 1360 is rotatably supported by the back box side support portion 2036 and is detachably supported by the display side support portion 604b. Accordingly, when the liquid crystal display device 640 is attached and detached, the second decoration control board box 1360 is rotated to a position that does not interfere with the liquid crystal display device 640, thereby bringing the second decoration control board box 1360 into the back box 2002. The liquid crystal display device 640 can be attached and detached even in the supported state. Accordingly, when the liquid crystal display device 640 is assembled or repaired, the second decoration control board box 1360 may not be completely removed, so that the removed second decoration control board box 1360 may be temporarily held, Forgetting to attach the removed second decoration control board box 1360 can be prevented.

  Further, a light emitting decorative body 2004 is fixed to the front end portion of the box-shaped back box 2002, and a movable decorative body 2006 is accommodated and fixed in the back box 2002, and then a frame-shaped panel holder 600 for holding a transparent game panel 599. The back box 2002 is fixed to the door. Accordingly, the light emitting decoration body 2004, the movable decoration body 2006, and the like are arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599 without directly fixing the light emission decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 to the rear surface side of the transparent game panel 599. It is possible to prevent the fixed portions such as the light-emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006 from being seen from the player side and to deteriorate the appearance, and the light-emitting decorative body 2004 and the movable decorative body 2006 can be played without any problem. In preparation for the rear side of the panel 599, the player's interest can be prevented from decreasing.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an annular center accessory 1400 is fixed to an opening 599e formed in the transparent game panel 599. Thereby, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be directly viewed through the ring of the center accessory 1400 to make it easy to see the effect image. Further, the opaque front annular portion 1400a and the insertion annular portion 1400b on which the plated layer of the center accessory 1400 is formed can conceal the inner peripheral end portion of the opening portion 599e from being seen from the player side. It is possible to prevent the end face (inner peripheral end face) of the inner peripheral end portion having a rough surface roughness from being seen, and to prevent the appearance in the game area 605 from deteriorating, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. it can.

  Further, the inner peripheral portion of the opening 599e in the game panel 599 is concealed so that it cannot be seen by the center accessory 1400, and even if the surface roughness of the inner peripheral end surface of the opening 599e is rough, the appearance does not deteriorate. It is not necessary to finish the inner peripheral end surface of the part 599e, and the cutting process or the like can be maintained. This can simplify the labor for forming the opening 599e, prevent the gaming panel 599 from becoming expensive, and suppress an increase in cost.

  Furthermore, since the center role 1400 having the stage 1406 for rolling the game ball is provided, not only the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 640 but also the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a player's game falls.

  In addition, since the luminous decoration body 2004 is made visible through the transparent gaming panel 599 on the outer periphery of the center accessory 1400, a large liquid crystal display device is arranged to display a pattern, a pattern, or the like. Compared to those, the three-dimensional light-emitting decorative body 2004 makes it possible to enhance the decoration of the entire game area 605, enhance the appeal to the player, and can be differentiated from other gaming machines, The interest of the player is strongly attracted and it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, the movable decorative body 2006 can be viewed through the ring of the center accessory 1400, and the movable decorative body 2006 can be viewed without passing through the transparent game panel 599. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body 2006 from being difficult to see due to the reflected light from the game panel 599, etc., making the movable decorative body 2006 easy to see and entertaining the movable effect, and the player's interest is enhanced. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 is provided with a plating layer, so that light incident from the player side can be reflected to the player side. In this way, light such as illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is reflected by the plating layer, so that the center object 1400 can be brilliantly brilliantly shined, and the center object 1400 is beautifully shined. It can be shown that the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, since the center accessory 1400 does not protrude from the rear surface of the game panel 599 except for the stage 1406, the light-emitting decorative body 2004 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 599 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 599. As close as possible. Thereby, the accommodation space 2010 formed between the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the rear wall 2014 in the back box 2002 is made as wide as possible, and a movable decoration having a size and a movable range that can attract more players' interest. The body 2006 can be arranged, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being lowered by the movable effect.

  Further, when a game ball flowing down in the game area 605 on the outer peripheral side surface of the center accessory 1400 enters the warp passage 1404, it is guided into a ninety-nine fold shape by the ninety-nine fold guide path 1410 and then supplied to the stage 1406. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the movement of a game ball that rolls in ninety-nine folds. In addition, the speed of the game ball can be reduced and supplied onto the stage 1406 at an optimum speed, and the game ball can be surely rolled in the left-right direction on the stage 1406, thereby exhibiting a desired effect. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, since the insertion annular portion 1400b of the center accessory 1400 is provided with a transparent protective wall portion 1418 (formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, acrylic resin)), the movable decorative body 2006 is disposed on the stage 1406. The game ball can be prevented from entering the storage space 2010, and the game is interrupted by the game ball entering the storage space 2010, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. can do. Further, since the protective wall portion 1418 is transparent, the liquid crystal display device 640, the light emitting decorative body 2004, the movable decorative body 2006, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized through the protective wall portion 1418, and the rendering effect by them Can be suppressed, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the guide member 2208, the side motor base 2322, and the side motor base cover that guide the movable decorative member 2006 such as the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side movable decorative body 2300 in a predetermined direction. 2328 is supported by a center base member 2210 and a side base member 206 made of a metal plate. This makes it possible to firmly support the guide member 2208, the side motor base 2322, and the like, and even if the movable decorative body 2006 is moved by the center moving motor 2214, the side motor 2324, etc., The motor base 2322 and the like can be prevented from shaking or distorting. Even if the front decoration member 2246 and the side decoration member 2302 are enlarged or moved violently, the front decoration member 2246 and the side decoration member can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the movement of 2302 from becoming unnatural and to obtain a movable decorative body 2006 that can obtain a desired movable effect.

  Further, the back box 2002 to which the center base member 2210 and the side base member 2306 such as the center movable decoration body 2200 and the side movable decoration body 2300 are fixed has a box shape, which is more than a plate shape or a frame shape. Can also increase rigidity. As a result, even if a movable decorative member such as the front decorative member 2246 or the side decorative member 2302 is enlarged or moved violently and a large inertia force or moment acts on the back box 2002 from the movable decorative body 2006, the back box The deformation of 2002 can be prevented, and the movable decorative body 2006 can be supported without any problem. Accordingly, the movable decorative member such as the front decorative member 2246 and the side decorative member 2302 of the movable decorative body 2006 can be enlarged or moved violently, and the movable decorative body 2006 is provided that can make the player more entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, since the opening 2012 of the back box 2002 is closed by the liquid crystal display device 640, the rigidity of the back box 2002 can be increased also by the liquid crystal display device 640, and the movable decorative body 2006 is supported without problems. be able to.

  Further, the center base member 2210 and the side base member 2306 such as the center movable ornament 2200 and the side movable ornament 2300 are formed of a metal plate, and compared with the case where the base members 2210 and 2306 are formed of resin. Thus, even if the thickness of the base members 2210 and 2306 is reduced, the necessary strength and rigidity can be obtained, and the base members 2210 and 2306 can be reduced in thickness. Accordingly, the depth direction (front-rear direction) of the movable decorative member such as the front decorative member 2246 and the side decorative member 2302 can be increased accordingly, so that a three-dimensional movable decorative member can be obtained. As a member, it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the movable decorative body 2006 such as the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side movable decorative body 2300 is fixed to the back box 2002, it is possible to reduce the restriction on the arrangement position of the movable decorative body 2006, and any The movable decorative body 2006 can be disposed at the position, and the desired movable decorative body 2006 can be disposed at the desired position, so that the pachinko machine 1 that reliably obtains the desired effect can be obtained.

  Further, when the movable decorative body 2006 such as the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side movable decorative body 2300 is fixed to the back box 2002, the positioning protrusion of the back box 2002 and the positioning hole of the base member are fitted to each other, The movable decorative body 2006 can be securely fixed to a predetermined position of the back box 2002, and the movable decorative body 2006 is prevented from being fixed at the shift position, and the movable front decorative member 2246, the side decorative member 2302, etc. It is possible to prevent the movable decorative member from coming into contact with other members and causing problems.

  In addition, the base members 2210 and 2306 of the movable decorative body 2006 such as the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side movable decorative body 2300 are provided with reinforcing pieces 2210d and 2306e, and the base members 2210 and 2306 are arranged in the longitudinal direction. It is possible to increase the rigidity of the base members 2210 and 2306 by suppressing distortion and bending. As a result, even if the movable decorative members such as the front decorative member 2246 and the side decorative member 2302 are made larger in size or moved more vigorously, the movable decorative member can be moved via the guide member 2208, the side motor base 2322, or the like. The movable decorative member can be increased in size and can be moved faster, and the movable decorative body 2006 that strongly attracts the player's interest is provided to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. be able to.

  Further, through holes 2210e and 2306d for light weight are formed in the base members 2210 and 2306 of the movable decorative body 2006 such as the center movable decorative body 2200 and the side movable decorative body 2300, and the base members 2210 and 2306 made of metal plates are formed. 2306 can be reduced in weight. Thereby, even if the movable decorative body 2006 is enlarged, it is possible to suppress an increase in weight and to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire back unit 2000, and a fixed portion of the back box 2002 to the panel holder 600. It is possible to prevent a load from being applied more than necessary and to prevent a malfunction.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 are arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599, a large-sized liquid crystal display device is arranged and a pattern or a pattern is arranged. The three-dimensional light emitting decoration body 2004 and the movable decoration body 2006 can improve the decoration of the entire game area 605 and increase the appeal to the player, compared to a flat display that displays etc. It can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the center movable decorative body 2200, the side movable decorative body 2300, and the under movable decorative body 2400 are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 640, the movable decorative body 2006 makes it look like a conventional pachinko machine. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having a different atmosphere can be obtained. Furthermore, combined with the light-emitting decorative body 2004 arranged on the front side of the movable decorative body 2006, the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract the player at first glance can be obtained by improving the decorativeness of the entire game area 605. As the pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

  Further, since the movable decorative body 2006 is disposed on the rear side of the light emitting decorative body 2004, the movable decorative body 2006 can be made difficult to be seen from the player side by the light emitting decorative body 2004, and the appearance of the movable decorative body 2006 appears. It is possible to provide a movable effect that makes it possible to entertain (being visible from the player side), and to increase the types of movable effects by the movable decorative body 2006, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player. it can.

  Further, when the LED 2120 of the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 is caused to emit light, the light is diffused widely by the lens portion 2113 of the diffusing lens member 2110. Thus, a wider range of the light-emitting decorative body 2004 can be light-decorated, and the decoration effect can be enhanced by making it appear beautiful, so that the player's interest can be prevented from being lowered.

  Further, since the light of the LED 2120 of the light emitting decoration substrate 2130 is diffused by the plate-shaped diffusion lens member 2110, the thickness of the entire light emitting decoration body 2004 in the front-rear direction (depth direction) can be reduced. By reducing the thickness of the light-emitting decorative body 2004, the movable decorative body 2006 can be made larger or moved by relatively widening the accommodation space 2010, and the movable decorative body 2006 can be more enjoyed by the player. It can arrange | position and it can suppress that the interest with respect to a player's game falls.

  In addition, the decorative member 2100 shaped in a predetermined shape is arranged on the front side of the diffusing lens member 2110, and the lens portion 2113 of the diffusing lens member 2110 faces the player side through the opening 2101 formed in the decorative member 2110. Light from the LED 2120 on the light emitting decorative substrate 2130 can be irradiated to the player side through the lens portion 2113 and the opening portion 2101. Further, the light emitting decoration body 2004 can be surely decorated with light emission, and the decoration member 2100 can make the surface of the light emitting decoration body 2004 have a highly decorative shape so that a predetermined decoration effect can be exhibited even when the LED 2120 does not emit light. It is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 4 and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the light incident from the player side can be reflected to the player side by the plating layer formed on the surface side of the decorative member 2100, even when the LED 2120 of the light emitting decoration body 2004 is not emitting light, Light such as lighting in the game hall where the machine 1 is installed is reflected by the plating layer, so that the decoration member 2100 can shine brilliantly, and the decoration effect is exhibited even when the LED 2120 is turned off. It is possible to prevent the interest of the music from deteriorating.

  Further, when the LED 2120 of the light emitting decoration body 2004 is caused to emit light, the entire light emitting decoration body 2004 emits light radially, so that the entire game area 605 becomes bright and can surprise the player. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls. In addition, when the LED 2120 of the light emitting decoration body 2004 is caused to emit light, the light emitting decoration is annularly and radially radiated, and the tip of the light is concentrated at the center of the game area 605, so that the liquid crystal display disposed at the center of the game area 605 It is possible to focus attention on the device 640 and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by enjoying the effect image.

  Further, since light from a group of LEDs 2120 corresponding to the other lens portions 2113 can be blocked by a light emitting partition member 2160, a certain lens portion 2113 emits light so that each lens portion 2113 is not affected by each other. Thus, the light emission mode can be made different for each lens portion 2113. Therefore, it is possible to increase the types of light emission effects by the light emitting decoration body 2004 and to perform various light emission effects, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and lowering the player's interest.

  Further, since the thickness in the front-rear direction of the light emitting decorative body 2004 is within a range of 10% to 40% with respect to the depth of the back box 2002, the light emitting decorative body 2004 and the rear wall 2014 in the back box 2002 are It is possible to sufficiently secure the accommodating space 2010 of the movable decorative body 2006 formed between them, and it is possible to arrange the movable decorative body 2006 having a size and a movable range that can attract the player's interest. It is possible to suppress the interest of the player from being lowered by the movable decorative body 2006.

  In addition, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be struck by the center movable decorative body 2200, and the visible area of the display screen in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be changed by the side movable decorative body 2300. Furthermore, the lower part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be changed by the under movable decorative body 2400, and various movable effects can be performed by moving each movable decorative body 2200, 2300, 2400 alone or in combination. It is possible to increase the number of types of movable effects (patterns) to make it difficult to get bored of the movable effects, and it is possible to entertain the movable effects by the movable decorative body 2006 and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. it can.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls that are driven into the game area 605 by the player operating the operation handle portion 461 are the first and second start openings 1502 and 1506 and the general winning opening. When accepted into 1702 etc., a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, and when accepted into the first and second start ports 1502, 1506, the result of the pass / fail determination process for special random numbers (game lottery result in the present invention) is obtained. A lottery is performed, the condition device is operated in accordance with the result of the special lottery, and the player's interest can be enhanced by obtaining an opportunity to execute a jackpot game in which many game balls are paid out by the round number determination process. Then, as a special lottery result, when “Leach per win” or “Leach lose” is lottery, the side decorative member 2302 moves to the separation position when the variably displayed symbols are sequentially displayed in a “reach” state, The viewable area of the display screen is enlarged, and an effect image (for example, a reach development effect image) for determining the last symbol is displayed on a powerful large screen, and the effect image can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for “the result of the determination process is successful” and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the display area (viewable area) on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 is not enlarged or reduced on the display screen, but by the movement of the side decorative member 2302 in the side movable decorative body 2300. Since the visible area (display area) of the display screen is enlarged or reduced, and the position of the three-dimensional side decoration member 2302 moves with the change of the display area, the appearance of the game board 4 changes. The atmosphere can be changed, and the player can be surprised or made to feel new, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to difficulty in getting bored.

  Further, since the decorative plate 2340 made of a mirror-like reflecting plate is provided at a position corresponding to the separation position on the rear side of the side decoration member 2302, even if the side decoration member 2302 is positioned at the approach position, the separation position The decorative plate 2340 arranged at the corresponding position can prevent the back wall 2014 from concealing the rear wall 2014 and prevent the appearance from deteriorating, and can suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the movable decorative body 2006, the light emitting decorative body 2004, and the like arranged on the front side of the decorative plate 2340 are reflected on the decorative plate 2340 and reflected, the illusion of a depth deeper than the original depth can be obtained. Further, it is possible to decorate the decorative plate 2340 without applying a design, a pattern, or the like, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost related to the decorative plate 2340 while suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 moves to the separation position in accordance with the display of the special effect image (crocodile panic reach effect image) in which the crocodile pattern W appears, so that the viewable area is enlarged. A special effect image will be displayed on the screen, and a batting game in which the crocodile pattern W is hit with the buttocks 2202 can be performed on a powerful large screen, making the special effect image full of realism. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is movable on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 640 so that the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 in the back unit 2000 strikes the display screen, and is disposed on the left and right sides. Since the side decoration member 2302 of the movable decoration body 2300 reciprocates left and right, the movement of the three-dimensional collar portion 2202 and the side decoration member 2302 makes it possible to attract the player's attention and attract attention. It is possible to entertain the production and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, only the upper part of the side decorative member 2302 is guided by the side moving mechanism 2304 in the side movable decorative body 2300, and the side decorative member 2302 is suspended from the side moving mechanism 2304. The lower part of the decorative member 2302 can move freely, and when the side decorative member 2302 is moved, the side decorative member 2302 moves in a fluffy manner, and a change can be given to the movement of the side decorative member 2302. Therefore, the side decoration member 2302 can be moved more naturally, and the movable effect by the side decoration member 2302 can be more enjoyed.

  Further, the side motor base 2322 that supports the side motor 2324 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is provided with a guide portion 2322a so as to guide the slide member 2332 in the left-right direction, so that the guide for guiding the slide member 2332 is provided. Compared with the case where the portion 2322a is a member different from the side motor base 2322, the number of parts related to the side moving mechanism 2304 can be reduced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and the side movement can be suppressed. The mechanism 2304 can be made compact and can be miniaturized, and the side decoration member 2302 can be made larger with respect to the miniaturization of the side moving mechanism 2304 to easily attract the player's attention, thereby enhancing the decoration effect. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the lower end of the side decorative member 2302 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by the guide box 2344 fixed to the lower part of the side base member 2306 in the side movable decorative body 2300, the side moving mechanism 2304 is controlled. Therefore, when the side decoration member 2302 is moved, the lower end of the side decoration member 2302 can be prevented from shaking greatly, and the lower end of the side decoration member 2302 can be prevented from coming into contact with other members. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by the occurrence and the player's interest from being lowered. Further, the side base member 2306 is formed of a metal plate, and the required strength can be obtained even if the side base member 2306 is made thinner than the case where the side base member 2306 is formed of resin. Since rigidity can be obtained and the side base member 2306 can be thinned, the depth direction (front-rear direction) of the side decoration member 2302 can be increased accordingly, and a three-dimensional decoration member can be obtained. As the side decoration member 2302 having a higher decoration effect, the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the side frame plates 12 and 13 in the outer frame 2 are made of metal extrusion molds, thereby increasing the horizontal dimension of the game board installation recess 510 in the main body frame 3. The vertical size of the gaming window 101 is increased by providing only one dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame 5, and the rearward projecting amounts of the rear side walls 541, 542, 543 in the main body frame 3 are increased. Since the depth of the game board installation recess 510 is made as large as possible by setting the position substantially the same as the rear end side of the prize ball tank 720, the larger game board 4 can be favorably supported. That is, the game board 4 can be further enlarged, and the liquid crystal display device 640 is rotated to hit the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599 forming the game area 605 and the liquid crystal display device. Since the collar part 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 that moves in the left-right direction along the upper edge of 640 can be enlarged, a movable effect of hitting the display screen by the large collar part 2202 can be performed. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player by turning the buttocks 2202 and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by making the batting game by the batting rotation of the buttocks 220 entertaining. it can.

  In addition, a handle 2234 that connects the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 and the rotation shaft 2232 that can move left and right along the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 and that can strike the display screen. Since the bent portion is bent on the surface orthogonal to the rotating shaft 2232, that is, on the rotating surface of the flange portion 2202, the length of the handle portion 2234 is made larger than the actual radius of the flange portion 2202 with respect to the rotating shaft 2232. Even if the heel part 2202 is enlarged in proportion to the length of the handle part 2234, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Accordingly, since the heel portion 2202 can be made larger compared to the case where the linear handle portion is used as in the conventional case, the heel portion 2202 can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by having a sense of expectation for the movable performance by the unit 2202.

Further, since the handle portion 2234 is bent on the rotation surface of the flange portion 2202, the rotation radius of the flange portion 2202 can be reduced with respect to the length of the handle portion 2234, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 2232 can be reduced. The moment acting on the heel portion 2202 due to the movement is also reduced, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the handle portion 2234 is bent or damaged by the moment. Further, since the force acting on the handle portion 2234 is smaller than when the handle portion 2234 is linear, the hook portion 2202 can be rotated at a higher speed, and the hook portion rotating faster. The player can be surprised by 2202, and it is possible to entertain the movable effect of the buttocks 2202 and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, the striking surface 2206 of the collar portion 2202 in the center movable decorative body 2200 is arranged via the handle portion 2234 so as to substantially coincide with the surface passing through the axis of the rotation shaft 2232, and the rotation shaft 2232. Can be arranged at a position as close as possible to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 2232 rotates the collar 2202 between the striking position and the swinging position. Since the rotation range on the swing position side can be made as large as possible, the heel portion 2202 and the handle portion 2234 can be made as large as possible, and the movable effect by the large heel portion 2202 This makes it possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the handle portion 2234 can be thickened without increasing a sense of incongruity along with the enlarged flange portion 2202, the moment acting on the flange portion 2202 can be sufficiently counteracted by the rotation, as described above. Can be prevented, or the collar 2202 can be rotated faster, and the collar 2202 can be quickly moved to improve the response of the collar 2202 to the operation of the operation button 330. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lowered by moving the buttocks 2202 as the player wishes.

  Furthermore, since the striking surface 2206 of the collar portion 2202 can be made substantially parallel to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 when the collar portion 2202 is struck and rotated, the collar portion 2202 having no sense of incongruity. It is possible to make the movement and direction of the heel part 2202 entertain without any discomfort, and to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the heel motor 2226 is not disposed on the axis of the rotation shaft 2232 supported by the heel support member 2224, the rotation shaft 2232 is as close as possible to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. When the collar 2202 is rotated between the striking position and the raising position by the rotation of the rotation shaft 2232, the rotation range on the raising position side is made as much as possible. Since it can be enlarged, the heel part 2202 and the handle part 2234 can be enlarged as much as possible, and the player can be entertained by a movable effect by the large heel part 2202 to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. can do.

  Further, the rotation of the rotary shaft of the heel motor 2226 is transmitted to the rotary shaft 2232 by meshing between the first gear 2228 fixed to the rotary shaft and the second gear 2230 fixed to the rotary shaft 2232. Therefore, compared with a transmission structure using a pulley and a belt, no slippage occurs between the first gear 2228 and the second gear 2230, and the rotation of the bag motor 2226 is reliably rotated. It can be transmitted to the shaft 2232, and the rotation of the collar portion 2202 is made to follow the rotation of the cage motor 2226 with certainty, thereby making it possible to reliably produce a desired movable effect and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. be able to.

  Further, the rotation of the flange portion 2202 from the striking position can be restricted by the contact of the one rotation restricting piece 2230b of the second gear 2230 with the first contact portion 2224c of the support member 2224 for the flange. At the same time, the other rotation restricting piece 2230b of the second gear 2230 abuts on the second abutting portion 2224d of the heel support member 2224, thereby restricting the collar 2202 from rotating more than the swinging position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flange 2202 from hitting the liquid crystal display device 640 due to the inertial force when the batting is rotated, and the liquid crystal display device 640 is damaged or damaged. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring and to prevent the game from being interrupted and the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, when the hook portion 2202 rotates to the striking position or the swing-up position by the detection of the rotation detection sensor 2256, the rotation driving of the hook motor 2226 is stopped, so that the rotation restricting piece 2230b and the first contact are stopped. A rotational driving force is applied from the scissors motor 2226 to the rotation shaft 2232 whose rotation is restricted by the rotation restriction means composed of the contact portion 2224c and the second contact portion 2224d, and the rotation restriction means and It is possible to prevent an unnecessary load from being applied to the motor 2226 for use, and it is possible to prevent the bag motor 2226 and the like from being damaged early.

  In addition, since the rotation detection piece 2228b is provided in the first gear 2228 disposed on an axis different from the axis of the rotation shaft 2232, the rotation shaft 2232 is provided on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. It can arrange | position so that it may approach as close as possible, can exhibit the effect mentioned above reliably, and can suppress that a player's interest falls.

  Further, it rotates to hit the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599 forming the game area 605 and moves left and right along the upper edge of the liquid crystal display device 640. The center movable decorative body 2200 having the section 2202 is provided, and the three-dimensional collar 2202 actually blows the door design T, the crocodile design W, etc. displayed as the effect image on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. As a result, it becomes possible to produce a more realistic batting effect compared to the conventional case, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly by the production with increased realism and make it difficult to get bored, and the interest in games is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the collar portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 moves in the left-right direction along the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640, the collar portion 2202 can hit various positions on the display screen, which is more complicated. It is possible to suppress the monotonous and easy to get bored by giving a strong batting effect, and to prevent the player from making the game more entertaining and less fun for the game.

  Further, the plate-like game panel 599 that partitions the rear side of the game area 605 is made transparent, and the movable decoration body 2006 and the liquid crystal display device 640 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 599 can be viewed through the game panel 599. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko machine, it is not necessary to visually recognize the movable decoration body through the through-hole formed in the game panel, and the movable range of the movable decoration body 2006 and the area where the game ball actually flows down are substantially omitted. Even if the amount of movement of the collar portion 2202 in the center movable decorative body 2200 of the movable decorative body 2006 in the horizontal direction is increased, the area where the game ball on the front side of the game panel 599 actually flows down changes. Without falling off, can ensure a flow-down area that can fully entertain the player, and reduce the enjoyment caused by the movement of the original game ball of the pachinko machine Without, it can strike a crocodile pattern W infested in different positions hammer portion 2202 of the center movable decorative body 2200 to move as much as possible greater.

  In addition, since the movable decorative body 2006 is provided in the box-shaped back box 2002 in the back unit 2000, at least dust and dust are prevented from entering the back box 2002 from the rear side of the game board 4. It is possible to prevent dust or the like from adhering to the movable part of the movable decorative body 2006, thereby causing a malfunction in the movable decorative body 2006 and causing the game to be interrupted. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Further, when the pinion gear 2218 rotates together with the rotation of the center moving motor 2214, the sliding body 2222 provided with the rack gear 2220 meshing with the pinion gear 2218 moves in a direction corresponding to the rotation direction of the pinion gear 2218, and the sliding body 2222 is moved. The flange 2202 supported by the can move in the left-right direction. Since the pinion gear 2218 is disposed at a position corresponding to the substantially center of the guide member 2208, the slide body 2222 can be moved over the substantially entire length of the guide member 2208, and the movable range of the slide body 2222 is increased. Can be as wide as possible. Therefore, since the range of movement of the heel portion 2202 supported by the sliding body 2222 in the left-right direction can be increased as much as possible, the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the heel portion 2202 that moves greatly. The movement of the part 2202 can be enjoyed and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, since both ends of the guide member 2208 for guiding the sliding body 2222 in the left-right direction are supported by the center base member 2210 made of a metal plate, the guide member 2208 can be firmly supported, and the collar portion Even if a force in a direction different from the axial direction of the guide member 2208 acts on the guide member 2208 via the sliding body 2222 due to the rotation of 2202, the guide member 2208 can be prevented from being shaken or distorted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the flange 2202 itself due to the rotation of the flange 2202 and unnatural movement, and entertain the player by rotating the flange 2202 without a sense of incongruity. It can suppress that interest falls. Further, since the scissors motor 2226 is supported at substantially the center of the sliding body 2222, the relatively heavy scissors motor 2226 is supported at the center, so that the space between the guide member 2208 and the sliding body 2222 can be reduced. The load transmission can be made substantially uniform without any deviation regardless of the position of the sliding body 2222, and the sliding body 2222 and the guide member 2208 can be prevented from being unevenly worn by the unbalanced load. Can be improved.

  Further, the roller 2236 supported by the slide body 2222 rolls on a pair of guide shafts 2208a as the guide member 2208, and the guide shaft 2208a is sandwiched between the roller 2236 and the slide body presser 2238. 2222 can be guided smoothly, and the sliding body 2222 can be prevented from falling off the guide shaft 2208a.

  Further, the heel portion 2202 and the heel motor 2226 can be supported by the heel support member 2224, and the heel support member 2224 is fixed between the pair of guide shafts 2208a at the center of the sliding body 2222. The load applied to the sliding body 2222 can be applied to each guide shaft 2208a substantially evenly, and the uneven load that applies a large load only to one guide shaft 2208a can be suppressed. Uneven wear of the sliding body 2222 and the guide shaft 2208a can be prevented, and the occurrence of problems in the center movable decorative body 2200 can be prevented.

  Further, when the moving drive gear 2216 having a smaller diameter than the pinion gear 2218 is rotated by the center moving motor 2214, the pinion gear 2218 meshing with the moving drive gear 2216 rotates faster than the moving drive gear 2216. It becomes possible to make the movement of the meshing rack gear 2220 faster, and the sliding body 2222, that is, the flange portion 2202 can be moved faster in the left-right direction, and the player moves faster by the flange portion 2202 (sliding body 2222). To attract more interest and entertain the movement.

  In addition, the movement detection piece 2222c of the sliding body 2222 can be detected by the center movement detection sensor 2240, so that the movement position of the sliding body 2222 can be detected. The sliding body 2222 can be surely positioned with respect to the desired position of the player, and a desired movement that can enhance the interest of the player is surely caused to the sliding body 2222, thereby suppressing the interest of the player from being lowered. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the rotation detection piece 2228b is detected by the rotation detection sensor 2256, the rotation position of the collar portion 2202 can be detected. Therefore, immediately before the collar portion 2202 comes into contact with the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. It can be rotated to stop, preventing the flange 2202 and the display screen from coming into contact with each other, causing a fine scratch on the display screen, or causing a strong contact with the display screen and damage. Can be prevented.

  Moreover, since the depth of the game board installation recessed part 510 can be enlarged, the back side from the panel holder 600, ie, the depth of the back unit 2000 (depth of a back box) can be enlarged. Accordingly, the movable decorative body 2006 can be reliably disposed on the rear side of the game panel 599, and a larger movable decorative body 2006, a movable decorative body 2006 having a wide movable range, and the like can be disposed. In addition to the movable performance by 2006, the movable decorative body 2006 itself can provide a game board 4 having a distinctly different appearance from the conventional planar game board. The pachinko machine 1 that can attract the interest of the player and raise the expectation for the game in the present pachinko machine 1 and suppress the interest is reduced.

  Furthermore, since the game board 4 can be increased in size, even if the display area of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 640 is widened, the movement of the game ball and the effect image are suppressed while the basin of the game ball is reduced. Can be enjoyed together, and the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be enlarged to give various movements to the flowing game balls, in addition to the movable decoration body 2006, the light emitting decoration body 2004, It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which a movable accessory, a decorative body, and the like are arranged so that the player can be entertained and more interesting.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the center accessory 1400 shown in FIGS. 88 to 90 has a transparent plate-like shape extending upward on the rear side of the stage 1406 including the ninety-nine fold guide path 1410. Although the protective wall portion 1418 is provided, the protective wall portion 1418 is attached to the rear side of the stage 1406 including the ninety-nine-fold guideway 1410 as a protective cover 1419 molded separately from the center accessory 1400. Also good. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of main members constituting a game board such as a center accessory attached with a protective cover, as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 161 shows a center accessory attached with a protective cover, etc. FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board of each of the main members constituting the game board as viewed from the rear and obliquely viewed, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the center combination to which a cover is attached from diagonally behind. 160 to 163, components having the same functions as those of the center accessory 1400 shown in FIGS. 88 to 90 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the protective cover 1419 extends rearward from the upper side of the mounting surface 1419 a extending upward along the stage 1406 including the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410. In addition, the upper position of the attachment surface 1419a extends toward the rear, and is rounded at the position where the under decorative member 2402 of the under movable decorative body 2400 moves in the vertical direction shown in FIGS. 124 to 126. A part of the liquid crystal display device 640 (specifically, the liquid crystal display device 640) is formed by the band (the position where the under decorative member 2402 of the under movable decorative body 2400 moves in the vertical direction is raised) and the rear end portion is close to the liquid crystal display device 640. A ridge that covers the lower center of the display device 640 is formed upward, and the bulged portion that is rounded and above the mounting surface 1419a It is integrally molded with and extending therefrom a portion toward the rear, smooth curved surfaces are connected to a continuous transparent synthetic resin. The under decorative member 2402 moves (lifts) between a lowered position disposed below the liquid crystal display device 640 and a raised position disposed on the front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. In the raised position, the protective cover 1419 enters the raised portion and a part thereof overlaps the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. In addition, the raised portion of the protective cover 1419 arranged so that a part thereof overlaps the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 has a curved shape that is gently inclined left and right with the approximate center in the left and right direction as a vertex (the surface is left and right). And has a curved surface shape that is gently inclined to the front with the rear part in the front-rear direction (position close to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640) as the apex (the surface is front-rear) Formed so as to draw a gently curved surface in the direction). Further, by forming the protective cover 1419 to have a curved surface shape that is gently inclined forward with the rear portion in the front-rear direction as a vertex, the protective cover 1419 prevents the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 from being seen as much as possible. It is avoiding. That is, it is possible to extend from the upper part of the member extending upward toward the rear (in the direction of the liquid crystal display device 640) so as to cover the upper part of the accommodation space 2010, but it extends toward the rear. As a result, the thickness of the portion increases more than the other portions, and there is a risk of hindering the viewing of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. On the other hand, in the present configuration, the protective cover 1419 is provided above the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 above the protective cover 1419 and is provided separately from the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 below, so that the thickness in the front-rear direction is uniform. It is possible to prevent the liquid crystal display device 640 from being obstructed by being partially thicker than the other portions.

  A mounting boss 1400ba formed below the mounting surface 1419a and projecting rearward from the back surface of the insertion annular portion 1400b including the ninety-nine-fold guide path 1410 and the stage 1406 along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the mounting surface 1419a. (See FIG. 163.) As shown in FIG. 162, an attachment portion in which an attachment fixing hole 1419aa projects forward is formed at a position corresponding to (see FIG. 163).

  Further, on the left side of the upper side of the attachment surface 1419a extending rearward, when the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L shown in FIG. 118 is at the origin position, the left side movable decorative body 2300L A cutout portion 1419b is formed so that the side decoration member 2302 and the portion extending upward from the upper surface of the attachment surface 1419a do not interfere with each other. In addition, on the right side of the attachment surface 1419a, the upper side of the right side movable decorative body 2300R is extended to the rear side when the side decorative member 2302 of the right side movable decorative body 2300R shown in FIG. A cutout portion 1419b is formed so that the side decoration member 2302 and the portion extending upward from the upper surface of the attachment surface 1419a do not interfere with each other.

  Here, a method of attaching the protective cover 1419 to the center accessory 1400 ′ will be described. The protective cover 1419 is attached to the attachment boss 1400ba formed on the insertion annular portion 1400b of the center accessory 1400 ′, and the attachment surface 1419a of the protective cover 1419 is provided. After the attachment fixing hole 1419aa formed in is inserted toward the front from the rear of the center accessory 1400 ′, the protective cover 1419 is brought into contact with the insertion annular portion 1400b, and then from the rear of the attachment surface 1419a of the protective cover 1419. A screw (not shown) is inserted into a mounting fixing hole 1419aa formed in the mounting surface 1419a and fixed. Thereby, the protective cover 1419 is fixed to the insertion annular portion 1400b, and the attachment of the protective cover 1419 to the center accessory 1400 'is completed. Thus, by attaching the protective cover 1419 to the center accessory 1400 ′, it is possible to prevent the game ball from moving to the rear side of the center accessory 1400 from the stage 1406 or the ninety-nine fold guiding path 1410. . In other words, a game ball is placed in the back box 2002 (see FIGS. 160 and 161) of the back unit 2000 (see FIGS. 160 and 161) disposed on the rear side of the center accessory 1400 ′ (accommodating space 2010 ( 79)))). In this example, the protective cover 1419 and the stage 1406 are formed separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the protective cover 1419 and the stage 1406 may be integrally formed.

  Next, the center accessory 1400 ′ to which the protective cover 1419 is attached is attached to the game panel 599 of the game board 4, and the side movable decorative bodies 2300 come close to each other or come apart from each other. The size of the gap between the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419 will be described. FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating the size of the gap between the side decorative member of the side movable decorative body and the cutout portion of the protective cover when the side movable decorative body is in an approach position close to each other, and FIG. 165 is a side movable decorative body. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the size of the gap between the side decorative member of the side movable decorative body and the cutout portion of the protective cover when they are at the separated positions separated from each other, and FIG. 166 is a view taken in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 167 is a view taken in the direction of arrow B in FIG. 165.

  In the approach position where the side movable decorative bodies 2300 are close to each other, as shown in FIG. 74, the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the side decorative member 2302 of the right side movable decorative body 2300R are both at the origin position. . In such a state, for example, as shown in FIG. 164, the side decoration member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L is in a state of approaching the notch 1419b of the protective cover 1419, and the left side movable decorative body 2300L The size of the gap between the side decoration member 2302 and the notch 1419b of the protective cover 1419 is extremely smaller than the size of the game ball (the diameter of the game ball). On the other hand, when the side movable decorative body 2300 is separated from each other, as shown in FIG. 75, both the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the side decorative member 2302 of the right side movable decorative body 2300R are at the origin position. It is in the position away from. In such a state, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L is separated from the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419, and the left side movable decorative body 2300L The size of the gap between the side decoration member 2302 and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419 is much larger than the size of the game ball (the diameter of the game ball).

  By the way, as described above, the front annular portion 1400a of the center accessory 1400 ′ has a predetermined amount (for example, within a range of 15 mm to 25 mm) from the front surface of the game panel 599 except for the front side of the stage 1406. It is formed in a dam shape protruding forward. Thereby, in the state which closed the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the left and right sides of the glass plate 252 of the glass unit 250 attached to the back surface of the door frame 5, the front annular portion 1400a of the center accessory 1400 ′, and The gap between the upper side and the gap is much smaller than the size of the game ball (the diameter of the game ball). For this reason, the game ball launched toward the game area 605 by the ball striking device 650 passes over the left and right sides and the upper side of the front annular portion 1400a of the center accessory 1400 ′ from the outer periphery side to the inner periphery side of the center accessory 1400 ′. Can not invade.

  In the game area 605, as described above, a number of obstacle nails are planted. Since the posture of these obstacle nails is changed by a store clerk or the like of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the distance between the obstacle nails and the obstacle nails is narrowed or spread. When the distance between the obstacle nail is narrowed and the game ball launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot pass through, the game ball is clogged between the obstacle nail and the obstacle nail. In this state, when the player launches game balls one after another toward the game area 605 by the hit ball launching device 650, the game balls are further stacked on the jammed game balls, and the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. Become. In a state where only one game ball is jammed between the obstacle nail and the obstacle nail, the player is not easily aware of the state because the ball is launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 and falls in the game area 605. In the state where the game balls are gathered in the shape of grapes, the game ball is more noticeable than the game balls launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 and falling in the game area 605, so that the state is easily noticed.

  When the game balls are gathered in the form of grapes, the player calls a hall clerk to have the game balls gathered in the form of grapes removed. The clerk of the hall called by the player opens the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, but when opening, the game balls gathered in the shape of grapes are not scattered from the game area 605 toward the hole. The pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by repeatedly opening and closing the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3 to drop and remove the game balls gathered in the shape of grapes. At this time, the falling game ball collides with the game panel 599 and jumps out toward the front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the store clerk in the hall opens and closes the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3. When repeatedly performing, the game ball that has jumped out collides with the glass plate 252 of the glass unit 250 attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 and bounces back, and jumps toward the game panel 599. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball that has jumped in may enter the inside of the center accessory 1400 ′ beyond the left and right sides and the upper side of the front annular portion 1400 a of the center accessory 1400 ′.

  At this time, in the approach position where the side movable decorative bodies 2300 approach each other, as described above, both the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the side decorative member 2302 of the right side movable decorative body 2300R are at the origin position. Therefore, the size of the gap between the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419 and the gap between the side decorative member 2302 of the right side movable decorative body 2300R and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419 Is much smaller than the size of the game ball (the diameter of the game ball). Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 166, the game ball that jumps in when the store clerk in the hall repeatedly opens and closes the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3 is left side movable decoration Since it cannot enter the gap between the side decoration member 2302 of the body 2300L and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419, it collides with the side decoration member 2302 and the protection cover 1419 of the left side movable decoration body 2300L and the front of the pachinko machine 1 It will jump out towards. On the other hand, at the separation position where the side movable decorative bodies 2300 are separated from each other, as described above, the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the side decorative member 2302 of the right side movable decorative body 2300R are both separated from the origin position. Therefore, the gap between the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419, and the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419 are included. The size of the gap between and is extremely larger than the size of the game ball (the diameter of the game ball). Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the game ball that jumps in when the store clerk in the hall repeatedly opens and closes the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3 The back unit 2000 (see FIGS. 160 and 161) disposed on the rear side of the center accessory 1400 ′ can enter the gap between the side decoration member 2302 of the body 2300L and the notch 1419b of the protective cover 1419. Will enter the back box 2002 (see FIGS. 160 and 161) (the accommodation space 2010 (see FIG. 79)).

  When a game ball enters the accommodation space 2010, the entered game ball is stored in the accommodation space 2010. If the game balls stored in the storage space 2010 are left as they are, and the game balls further enter the storage space 2010 and the number of game balls stored in the storage space 2010 increases, these stored game balls The movement of the left side movable decorative body 2300L in the left-right direction of the side decorative member 2302 is prevented, the movement of the right side movable decorative body 2300R in the horizontal direction of the side decorative member 2302 is prevented, or the under movable decorative body 2400. The under decoration member 2402 is prevented from moving in the vertical direction. When such movement is hindered, the side motor 2324 that moves the side decoration member 2302 of the left side movable decoration body 2300L in the left-right direction and the side motor that moves the side decoration member 2302 of the right side movable decoration body 2300R in the left-right direction. Overcurrent flows through the drive circuit 2611 (see FIG. 132) mounted on the peripheral control board that drives the under motor 2412 that moves the motor 2324 and the under decorative member 2402 of the under movable decorative body 2400 in the vertical direction. As a result, the drive circuit 2611 generates heat due to this overcurrent, and eventually the temperature of the drive circuit 2611 reaches the junction temperature, causing the drive circuit 2611 to fail. Further, if the movement is hindered, an overcurrent flows through the side motor 2324 and the under motor 2412 to increase the torque of the rotating shaft of the side motor 2324 and the torque of the rotating shaft of the under motor 2412. The pinion gear 2326 of 2304, the pinion gear 2414 of the under movement mechanism 2404, etc. may be damaged.

  It should be noted that the player notices that the side decoration member 2302 of the left side movable decoration body 2300L, the side decoration member 2302 of the right side movable decoration body 2300R, and the under decoration member 2402 of the under movable decoration body 2400 do not move, When the call is made to the effect or the hall clerk notices, the hall clerk turns off the pachinko machine 1 and opens the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3 to the stage 1406 of the center accessory 1400 ′. The door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 with the plate printed as “adjusting” standing on top. The game board 4 is removed from the main body frame 3 after the opening hours of the hall or before the opening of the hall on the next day, the game board 4 is disassembled, and the game balls stored in the accommodation space 2010 are removed. Thus, when the side decoration member 2302 of the left side movable decoration body 2300L, the side decoration member 2302 of the right side movable decoration body 2300R, and the under decoration member 2402 of the under movable decoration body 2400 are not moved, the player who is playing the game Therefore, the game is forced to be interrupted, the game motivation for the pachinko machine 1 is lowered, and the game motivation is also lowered for the pachinko machine of the same type that operates normally. Moreover, since the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 falls, the operator of a hall will reduce the profit by the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, when the store clerk in the hall repeatedly performs the operation of opening and closing the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3, the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419 are provided. It is necessary to prevent the game ball from entering from the gap between the side decorative member 2302 of the right side movable decorative body 2300R and the notch 1419b of the protective cover 1419.

  Thus, when the hall clerk repeatedly performs the operation of opening and closing the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 is opened by the door frame opening switch 2514 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, when the signal indicating the opened state of the door frame 5 is input from the door frame opening switch 2514, the approach position where the side movable decorative bodies 2300 approach each other, that is, the left side movable decorative body 2300L. The side decoration member 2302 and the side decoration member 2302 of the right side movable decoration body 2300R are forcibly moved to the origin position. Specifically, when a signal indicating that the door frame 5 is opened from the door frame opening switch 2514 is input to the main control board 1350, a command indicating that is sent to the command generation means 2586 (see FIG. 143). The generated command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 by the command transmission means 2588 (see FIG. 143). Peripheral control board 2600 receives a command from main control board 1350 by command receiving means 2650 (see FIG. 144), and based on the received control command, effect pattern selecting means 2652 (see FIG. 144). Then, an effect pattern stored in the ROM 2604 is selected, and based on this selected effect pattern, the effect control means 2659 (see FIG. 144) controls the movable effect control means 2658 (see FIG. 144) to control the side movable decorative body. The side decoration members 2302 of 2300 are moved to the approach positions close to each other. Note that the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652 is to move the side decoration members 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 to the approach positions close to each other at the fastest speed.

  Here, the “fastest speed” will be described. The side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is moved in the left-right direction by a side moving mechanism 2304. The side moving mechanism 2304 includes a side motor 2324, and the moving speed of the side decorative member 2302 in the left-right direction changes depending on the rotational speed of the rotation shaft of the side motor 2324. ing. As will be described in detail later, the CPU 2602 of the peripheral control board 2600 sets the drive pattern in the 16 ms steady process in the peripheral control side reset process in the 2 ms timer interrupt process in the peripheral control side timer interrupt process repeatedly performed every 2 ms. Pulses are output to the drive circuit 2611 according to the scheduler. The drive circuit 2611 converts this pulse into a drive pulse of a predetermined voltage and outputs it to the side motor 2324. By inputting this drive pulse to the side motor 2324, the rotational speed of the rotating shaft of the side motor 2324 is given. Therefore, when the rotation shaft of the side motor 2324 rotates at the highest speed, a drive pattern in which a drive pulse is input to the side motor 2324 every 2 ms is set in the scheduler. As described above, when the rotational speed of the rotation shaft of the side motor 2324 becomes the fastest rotational speed, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 can move at the fastest speed.

  Thus, when the store clerk in the hall repeatedly performs the operation of opening and closing the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is moved to an approaching position close to each other. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the storage space 2010 in which the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is stored. In addition, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 that performs various movable effects is originally used as the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 that performs a protective operation to prevent the game ball from entering the accommodation space 2010. The function is switched.

  In addition, when the hall clerk repeatedly performs the operation of opening and closing the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3, when performing control to move the side movable decorative body 2300 to an approaching position close to each other, The same effect pattern used for the movable effect of moving the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is used. Thus, the effect pattern for performing the movable effect of the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is originally used as the effect pattern for performing the protective operation for preventing the game ball from entering the accommodation space 2010. The usage of is switched. In addition, by using the same effect pattern, the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 can be attached to each other when the store clerk in the hall repeatedly opens and closes the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3. Since it is not necessary for the program developer to create schedule data that defines the operation for performing the control to move to the close approach position, it is possible to save time and contribute to shortening the development period of the pachinko machine 1. . Further, it is possible to contribute to reducing the capacity of data stored in the ROM 2604. It should be noted that a dedicated program for controlling the side movable decorative body 2300 to move to an approaching position close to each other when the store clerk in the hall repeatedly opens and closes the door frame 5 slightly from the body frame 3. The peripheral control board 2600 may be prepared in advance and may be controlled to move the side decoration members 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 to the approaching positions close to each other at the fastest speed. In this case, it is necessary for the program developer to create schedule data that defines the operation in advance, and the capacity of data stored in the ROM 2604 increases.

  Here, a game is played from the gap between the side decorative member 2302 of the left side movable decorative body 2300L and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419, or from the gap between the side decorative member 2302 of the right side movable decorative body 2300R and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419. The pachinko machine 1 that prevents the ball from entering includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a door frame 5, a main control board 1350, and a peripheral control board 2600. The outer frame 2 is installed on the island. The main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable so that the game board 4 provided with the back unit 2000 can be mounted thereon. The door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. The main control board 1350 and the peripheral control board 2600 are attached to the rear side of the game board 4 and control the movable decorative body 2006 of the back unit 2000 provided on the game board 4. The main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 includes at least a door frame opening switch 2514. The door frame opening switch 2514 detects a state in which the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3.

  The movable decorative body 2006 of the back unit 2000 includes a side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300, a side moving mechanism 2304, and the like. The side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 can move in the left-right direction from an approach position close to each other to a separation position separated from each other in a predetermined region. The side moving mechanism 2304 includes a side motor 2324 that is an electric drive source for moving the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300. In the back unit 2000, an accommodation space 2010 for accommodating the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300, the side moving mechanism 2304, and the like is formed inside the back unit 2000. The side motor 2324 that is an electric drive source of the side moving mechanism 2304 moves the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 to move the gap connected to the accommodation space 2010, that is, the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 A gap (see FIG. 167) with the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419 is formed, and the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is moved to an approaching position close to each other, so that the size of the gap is a game ball. (See FIG. 166).

  When the door frame 5 is not opened from the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 2514, for example, when the game ball wins the first start port 1502, the main control board 1350 One special random number generation means 2562 (see FIG. 143) generates a predetermined first special random number, and based on the first special random number, command generation means 2586 (see FIG. 143) performs predetermined control such as an effect command. Command is generated, and the generated command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 by the command transmission means 2588 (see FIG. 143). Peripheral control board 2600 receives a command from main control board 1350 by command receiving means 2650 (see FIG. 144), and based on the received control command, effect pattern selecting means 2652 (see FIG. 144). Then, an effect pattern stored in the ROM 2604 is selected, and based on this selected effect pattern, the effect control means 2659 (see FIG. 144) controls the movable effect control means 2658 (see FIG. 144) to control the side movable decorative body. Various side effects are performed by moving the side decoration member 2302 of 2300. The ROM 2604 stores one or a plurality of effect patterns in association with each control command received from the main control board 1350. For example, the effect pattern selection unit 2652 performs determination using a predetermined random number or the like. An effect pattern corresponding to the determination result is selected from a plurality of effect patterns associated with the received control command. Note that it may be configured to store only one effect pattern associated with the control command received from the main control board 1350. In this case, the first special symbol variation of the main control board 1350 is stored. The pattern selection means 2564 and the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 2574 determine whether the center movable decorative body 2200 is movable, whether the side movable decorative body 2300 is movable, and whether the under movable decorative body 2400 is movable (first). A variation pattern accompanying the movement of the center movable ornament 2200 as a variation pattern (first special symbol variation pattern, second special symbol variation pattern) selected by one special symbol variation pattern selection means 2564 and second special symbol variation pattern selection means 2574 (First special symbol variation pattern, second special symbol variation pattern), side Variation pattern (first special symbol variation pattern, second special symbol variation pattern) with movement of the moving ornament 2300 and variation pattern (first special symbol variation pattern, second special symbol) with movement of the under movable ornament 2400 (Variation pattern) may be included).

  On the other hand, the main control board 1350 and the peripheral control board 2600 are formed with a door frame opening switch after the gap (see FIG. 167) between the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419 is formed. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from 2514, the main control board 1350 receives a signal indicating the opened state of the door frame 5 from the door frame opening switch 2514. Then, a command to notify that is generated by the command generation unit 2586 (see FIG. 143), and the generated command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 by the command transmission unit 2588 (see FIG. 143). Peripheral control board 2600 receives a command from main control board 1350 by command receiving means 2650 (see FIG. 144), and based on the received control command, effect pattern selecting means 2652 (see FIG. 144). Then, an effect pattern stored in the ROM 2604 is selected, and based on this selected effect pattern, the effect control means 2659 (see FIG. 144) controls the movable effect control means 2658 (see FIG. 144) to control the side movable decorative body. The side decoration member 2302 of 2300 is moved to an approaching position close to each other so that the size of the gap is much smaller than the size (diameter) of the game ball and the game ball enters the accommodation space 2010 connected to the gap. A protective action is performed to prevent it.

  As described above, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 performs various movable effects when the door frame 5 is not opened from the main body frame 3, while when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3. The size of the gap between the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419, which is formed by a movable effect by moving (moving) to an approaching position close to each other and connected to the accommodation space 2010. The size of the game ball is made much smaller than the size (diameter) of the game ball to prevent the game ball from entering the accommodation space 2010 connected to the gap. As a result, the game balls are packed between the obstacle nails planted in the game area 605 partitioned on the game board 4 and the game balls are gathered in the shape of grapes. When the game balls gathered in the shape of grapes are removed by repeatedly opening and closing the main body frame 3 slightly, the removed game balls cannot pass through the gap connected to the accommodation space 2010. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the storage space 2010 that stores the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300.

  When the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 (closed state) and a predetermined time elapses, the main control board 1350 and the peripheral control board 2600 are connected to the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300. Processing at the time of closing is performed. In this closing process, for example, immediately before the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, (1) the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 is moved to a separation position at the time of the development of the reach. When the effect is won, the side motor drive flag is set to ON (default OFF), and the side decorative members 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 are moved to the approach positions close to each other. And in the period when the effect which moves the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 to the separated position which is separated from each other is performed, even if the door frame 5 is in a closed state (closed state), The side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is maintained in a state of being moved to an approach position close to each other. When the period during which the performance is performed ends, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is moved to an approaching position close to each other when the side motor drive flag is set to OFF. ing.

  In the closing process, for example, immediately before the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, (2) when the gaming state is short-lived or the probability is changing, that is, the side decorative members 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 are mutually connected. When it is in a state of moving to a separated position (in this state, as described above, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 640 is expanded, and almost the entire screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 is displayed on the player. In addition, the short-term accuracy flag is set to ON), and the side decorative members 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 are moved to the approach positions close to each other. When the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 (closed state), the state of the short-term accuracy variation flag is confirmed, that is, it is determined whether or not the short-term accuracy variation flag is set to ON. Is set to ON, the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decoration body 2300 is moved from an approach position close to each other to a separation position away from each other, while when the short-term accuracy flag is set to OFF (that is, the hole The side movable when the game state is no longer in the shortage or in the probability fluctuation, and is in the normal fluctuation during the period when the store clerk repeatedly opens and closes the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3 The side decorative member 2302 of the decorative body 2300 is moved to an approach position close to each other.

  Further, when the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the side decoration member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 is moved (moved) at the highest speed. When released from the frame 3, the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 can be moved (moved) to the approaching positions close to each other at the fastest speed. The gap between the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419 connected to the accommodation space 2010 can be made much smaller than the size (diameter) of the game ball at an early stage. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the accommodation space 2010 connected to the gap.

  The door frame opening switch 2514 will be described. The door frame opening switch 2514 is a so-called reed switch, and is attached near the upper left side of the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 as shown in FIG. The door frame opening switch 2514, which is a reed switch, is attached so that its pressing portion protrudes toward the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In a state in which the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, that is, in a closed state, the pressing portion of the door frame opening switch 2514 comes into contact with, for example, the lower reinforcing plate 214 of the reinforcing metal plate 210 shown in FIG. While the contact point of the opening switch 2514 is in an electrically conductive state, in the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, that is, in the opened state, the pressing portion of the door frame opening switch 2514 is the lower reinforcing plate of the reinforcing sheet metal 210. As a result, the contact of the door frame opening switch 2514 becomes electrically non-conductive. Thus, the closed state of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be detected by the electrical conduction state of the contact of the door frame opening switch 2514, and the electrical non-conduction state of the contact of the door frame opening switch 2514. Thus, the open state of the door frame 5 and the main body frame can be detected. As described above, when the game balls are gathered in the form of grapes, the player calls a hall clerk to remove the game balls gathered in the form of grapes. The clerk of the hall called by the player opens the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, but when opening, the game balls gathered in the shape of grapes are not scattered from the game area 605 toward the hole. The pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by repeatedly opening and closing the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3 to drop and remove the game balls gathered in the shape of grapes. However, when the hall clerk performs a work of opening and closing the door frame 5 slightly from the main body frame 3, if the door frame 5 is vigorously opened from the main body frame 3, the games gathered in a grape shape immediately. Since the ball is released, as described above, the game ball may be released and may enter the inside of the center accessory 1400 ′ beyond the left and right sides and the upper side of the front annular portion 1400a of the center accessory 1400 ′. .

  At this time, in the case where the side movable decorative body 2300 is separated from each other, the game ball can enter between the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 and the cutout portion 1419b of the protective cover 1419. Inside the back box 2002 (see FIGS. 160 and 161) of the back unit 2000 (see FIGS. 160 and 161) disposed on the rear side of the center accessory 1400 ′ (to the accommodation space 2010 (see FIG. 79)). Will invade. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 by checking the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 2514 every 4 ms that is the periodic interrupt timer of the main control board 1350. It is instantaneously detected whether or not. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the main control board 1350 transmits a command to that effect to the peripheral control board 2600, and the peripheral control board 2600 that has received this command performs a 16 ms steady process described later. Analyzing and moving the side movable decorative body 2300 with the fastest drive pulse (2 ms) so that the side movable decorative bodies 2300 are close to each other, the gap between the side decorative member 2302 of the side movable decorative body 2300 and the notch 1419b of the protective cover 1419 Is controlled to be much smaller than the size (diameter) of the game ball.

  Next, the peripheral control side reset process and the peripheral control side timer interrupt process of the peripheral control board 2600 for controlling the rotational speed of the rotating shaft of the side motor 2324 will be described. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control side reset process, and FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control side timer interrupt process.

<Peripheral control side reset processing>
First, when the peripheral control side reset process is started, the CPU 2602 of the peripheral control board 2600 performs an initial setting process as shown in FIG. 168 (step S100). This initial setting processing includes processing for initializing the CPU 2602 of the peripheral control board 2600, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. Note that interrupts are prohibited during the initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is a value 1 (step S102). This 16 ms elapsed flag T is a flag for measuring 16 ms in peripheral control side timer interrupt processing processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 16 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 16 ms has not elapsed. . When the 16 ms elapsed flag T has a value of 1 in step S102, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed flag is set to 0 (step S104), and the 16 ms in-process flag P is set to 1 (step S106). The 16 ms processing flag P is set to a value of 1 when starting 16 ms steady processing, which will be described later, and a value of 0 when ending. Subsequently, a 16 ms steady process is performed (step S108). This 16 ms steady process is a command analysis process for analyzing a command output from the main control board 1350, and 16 ms for setting the driving patterns of the center moving motor 2214, the saddle motor 2226, the side motor and the under motor 2412 in the scheduler. Motor scheduler activation processing, serial output processing for transmitting lighting data and the like to the LEDs 2120, 2122, and 2124 and the door frame decoration lamp 2624, and watchdog timer processing for monitoring whether 16 ms steady processing is performed. Subsequently, the 16 ms processing flag P is set to a value 0 (end of 16 ms steady processing) (step S110), and the process returns to step S102 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T becomes 1, ie, every 16 ms elapses. Steps S104 to S110 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not 1 (ie, 0) in step S102, that is, when 16 ms has not elapsed, the determination in step S102 is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T becomes 1, ie, 16 ms has elapsed. Repeat.

<Peripheral control side timer interrupt processing>
Next, when the peripheral control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 2602 of the peripheral control board 2600 performs a 2 ms timer interrupt process as shown in FIG. 169 (step S120). The 2 ms timer interruption process includes a history creation process for creating detection histories of detection signals from the center movement detection sensor 2240, the rotation detection sensor 2256, the side movement detection sensor 2338, and the under movement detection sensor 2428, and a center movement motor. 2214, the motor processing for driving the heel motor 2226, the side motor 2324, and the under motor 2412 are performed.

  Subsequently, the value 1 is added to the 2 ms update counter UC (step S122). The 2 ms update counter UC is a counter that counts the number of times this timer interrupt process has been performed. A value 1 of the 2 ms update counter UC corresponds to a time of 2 ms. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the 2 ms update counter UC has a value of 8, that is, 16 ms (= 2 ms update counter UC × 2 ms) (step S124). When 16 ms, the value 1 is set to the 16 ms elapsed flag T (step S126), the 16 ms processing flag P is 0, that is, the 16 ms steady process of step S108 in the peripheral control side reset process shown in FIG. 168 is performed. It is determined whether or not. When the 16 ms processing flag P is 0, that is, when 16 ms steady processing is not performed, the work area is backed up (step S130), and this routine is terminated. In this work area backup, the information processed in the 16 ms steady process of step S108 in the peripheral control side reset process shown in FIG. 168 is copied to a copy area provided in the work area. On the other hand, if 16 ms has not elapsed in step S124 or if no information is set during the 16 ms steady process in step S128, this routine is terminated as it is.

<Example of movable production of under movable decorative body>
Next, an example of the movable effect of the under movable decorative body 2400 will be described. The under movable decorative body 2400 is normally (in a non-movable state) disposed at a lowered position that does not overlap with the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 below the liquid crystal display device 640, and the drive condition for the under movable decorative body 2400 is satisfied. Sometimes it moves to the raised position overlapping the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. Hereinafter, the variation display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804 and the decoration symbol executed by the liquid crystal display device 640 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. The movable effect of the under movable decorative body 2400 that is executed by the variable display will be described.

  When peripheral control board 2600 receives a control command from main control board 1350 by command receiving means 2650, peripheral control board 2600 selects an effect pattern stored in ROM 2604 by effect pattern selection means 2656 based on the received control command. . At this time, if a control command is received from the main control board 1350, the effect pattern selection means 2652 is stored in the ROM 2604 in a state associated with the command. One of a plurality of effect patterns including an effect pattern for executing the movable effect of the movable decorative body 2400 is selected. Further, when a control command is transmitted in main control board 1350, a special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern (whether it is the first special symbol variation pattern or the second special symbol variation pattern) that causes the transmission of the command. The display of the special symbol is started on the display (first special symbol display 1802 corresponding to the first special symbol variation pattern, second special symbol display 1804 corresponding to the second special symbol variation pattern), and peripheral control is performed. On the board 2600, based on the reception of any one of the effect patterns by the effect pattern selection means 2652, the effect display control means 2656 starts the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 640. Further, as described above, the first special symbol variation pattern and the second special symbol variation pattern include information indicating the variation time, and the effect pattern selection means 2652 receives the received variation pattern (the first special symbol variation pattern or the second special symbol variation pattern or the second special symbol variation pattern). An effect pattern corresponding to the variation time indicated by the special symbol variation pattern) is selected. As a result, the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 in synchronization with the variably displayed special symbols executed on the special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator 1802, second special symbol indicator 1804). Can do.

  Further, the effect display control means 2656 controls the liquid crystal display device 640 based on the selected effect pattern to display the decorative symbols variably, and to the left, middle, and left according to the stop time of each decorative symbol indicated in the effect pattern. The right decorative design is stopped and displayed. In this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the order, and the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped at the same symbol, and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped. This is called reach status. When the effect pattern selection unit 2652 selects an effect pattern for executing the movable effect of the under movable ornament 2400, the under movable ornament control unit 2664 displays a predetermined period (for example, 3) in a variable display based on the effect pattern. Second), the under decorative member 2402 is driven to the raised position, and then again driven to the lowered position.

  Note that as a movable effect of the under movable decorative body 2400, any display may be executed as long as it is executed before the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variable display is started. From the start, until at least the decorative symbols that form the reach state (in this example, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed (if the reach state is not reached, at least the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. The above-mentioned movable movable body 2400 may be configured to perform a moving effect as a notification effect that suggests that the result of the determination process is a hit, and the display of variation of the decorative symbol is started and reach is performed. The movable effect of the under movable decorative body 2400 is executed as a reach effect that is executed from when the state is formed to when all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may form.

  Further, as described above, the under decoration member 2402 is in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 in the ascending position and overlaps with the display screen. Therefore, attention is paid to the decorative pattern variation display executed by the liquid crystal display device 640. The player who is playing can be aware that the under decorative member 2402 has been driven. Further, in this example, a movable effect for moving the under decoration member 2402 to the raised position is executed only when the result of the determination process is successful.

  Further, the under decorative member 2402 is arranged so that a part of the under decorative member 2402 is visible at the lowered position. Therefore, it is possible to always be aware of the movement of the under decoration member 2402. Thereby, even if the center member 1400 is increased in size to reduce the number of decorative members installed in the game area 605 and secure an area where the game ball can roll, the under movable decoration arranged in the accommodation space 2010 The game interest can be improved by driving the body 2400.

  If the result of the determination process is not successful, the decorative pattern (in this example, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol) that forms at least the reach state is displayed after the decorative symbol variation display is started in the same manner as the notice effect. The under decoration member 2402 is moved to the ascending position at a predetermined rate as a gaze notice effect and / or the reach effect that suggests that it will be a big hit when it is an actual big hit if it is not a big hit. You may make it perform the effect of moving (actually referred to as an effect that causes the actuator to stop at the lowered position after being vibrated in small increments for a predetermined period without moving to the raised position). Thereby, even when the result of the success / failure determination process is not successful, it can be expected that the result of the success / failure determination process is successful when the under decorative member 2402 operates.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above is summarized as follows. Hereinafter, terms conceptualized may be used in some cases, and the terms described in the embodiment (the mode for carrying out the invention) corresponding to the terms conceptualized are described in parentheses.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an operation handle (operation handle portion 461) operated by a player. A game ball launched by the operation of the operation handle flows down the game area 605. The game area 605 includes a closed state where it is difficult to receive a game ball launched into the game area 605 when a jackpot game, which will be described later, is executed, and an open state where a game ball can be received more easily than the closed state. An opening / closing device as an accessory that operates continuously (opening / closing member 1508 of the attacker unit 1500 as an accessory continuous operation device) and a receiving port (first start port 1502, second start port 1506) are provided. . This receiving port is used for the first lottery process described later.

  A series of lottery processes (special symbol success / failure determination process (step S1311), stop symbol determination process (probability random lottery using symbol random numbers)) related to the execution of the jackpot game based on the reception of the game ball at the receiving port Round number determination processing (step S2009, step S2012)) is performed by the lottery means (CPU 2502). A series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game include at least the first lottery process (win / fail determination process (step S1311) and stop symbol determination process (probability variation lottery)) and the second lottery process (round number determination). This process is performed separately from the process related to the process (step S2009, step S2012).

  However, in the first lottery process and the second lottery process, these process steps are not simply separated and sequentially performed, but a plurality of different lottery aspects are prepared as the lottery aspects in the second lottery process. (Details will be described later).

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 includes continuous game control means (one function of the CPU 2502 that executes the special electric utility jackpot control process in step S220 as the jackpot game execution means). The continuous game control means performs control related to a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game as the lottery process for the progress of the game, based on the fact that the game ball is received at the entrance. Based on the fact that a big win (special win) was won in the lottery process (the result of the success / failure determination process was a win and the number of rounds was determined in the round number determination process (steps S2009 and S2012)) Thus, the jackpot game is executed as a continuous game in which the opening / closing device is continuously and repeatedly operated between the open state and the closed state. The game ball as a prize ball is paid out by the prize ball payout means (prize ball payout control board 1186) based on the fact that the game ball is received in the switchgear when the switch is in the open state. .

  A series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game is started by executing the first lottery process (whether or not determination process (step S1311)) based on the reception of the game ball at the receiving port, and at least an operation handle. The jackpot game is executed by the second lottery process (round number determination process (step S2009, step S2012) described later) executed based on the game ball being launched into the game area 605 by the operation of the operation handle portion 461. A series of lottery processes related to the above are completed (the CPU 2502 executing the round number determination process (steps S2009 and S2012) corresponds to the lottery end control means).

  The game execution means includes a game start control means (special electric accessory jackpot control process (step S220)) for starting execution of the jackpot game. This game start control means determines that the result of the first lottery process is successful in response to the start of a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game (the result of the success / failure determination process (step S1311)). Based on the fact that the game ball is launched into the game area 605 by at least the operation handle being operated and the series of lottery processing is ended by the lottery end control means. The above jackpot game is started.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, passage ports (special gate A1900, special gate B1910) used for the second lottery process are provided in the flow path of the game ball to the opening / closing device. ing.

  As the passage, at least a first passage (special gate A1900) and a second passage (special gate B1910) are provided. The first passage port and the second passage port are arranged on the left side and the right side of the center accessory 1400, respectively, so that the player can determine which passage through which the game ball passes. ing.

  After the game start control means has won the winning in the first lottery process (after determining that the result of the special symbol win / fail determination process (step S1311) is a win, the "condition device is activated" After that, the jackpot game is started based at least on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage opening.

  Specifically, after the winning is won in the first lottery process (after the condition device is activated), as a lottery aspect in the second lottery process, a game ball is passed through the first passage opening. At least a plurality of different lottery modes are prepared, such as a mode in which round decision processing A (step S2009) is performed and a mode in which a game ball is passed through the second passing port and round determination processing B (step S2012) is performed. Then, which of the plurality of lottery modes is adopted to perform the second lottery is determined by the player based on the result of the lottery in the first lottery process.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game mode control means (special electric-powered bonus game control means for performing control related to the execution of the jackpot game with game modes having different maximum prize balls that can be obtained by the player. (Step S240). When the condition device is operating, the game mode control means determines whether or not the game ball passes through either the first passing port or the second passing port. The control for execution of the jackpot game is performed with a game mode in which the maximum number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player depends on the type. That is, jackpot games with different maximum rounds in which the opening / closing device is continuously operated are executed according to the type of passing port that has passed.

  In addition, the game execution means may open and close the game device during the flow-down period until the game ball passed through the opening / closing device flows down based on at least the game ball passing through the passage after the condition device is activated. Means (game start ball winning control means) for starting a jackpot game is provided so that the game ball can be received in the switchgear by starting continuous operation of the device.

  In addition, the lottery means (CPU 2502) starts a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game based on the fact that the game ball is received at the reception port, and as a result, the first lottery process is a process of the series of lottery processes. (1) When the winning is won in the lottery (win / fail determination process (step S1311)), after the winning is won, the game ball passes through the passing port, and further, according to the winning of the winning In addition, means (second lottery progress control means) capable of performing the second lottery (round number determination process) for the maximum number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player in the jackpot game, and the second for the maximum number of winning balls When a game ball passes through either the first passing port or the second passing port so that the lottery starts, the second lottery can be selected according to the type of the passing port that has passed. Means (passage port) stored in such a manner that a determination table having a different determination mode is associated with each of the first passage port and the second passage port so that the determination mode for the maximum number of winning balls is different. Another setting means).

That is, after the continuous game control means assures that the opening / closing operation by the opening / closing device is repeatedly executed a specific number of times,
a. By allowing the game ball to pass through the first passage (special gate A1900), at least “X (corresponding to 4 rounds of the present embodiment)” at a specific number of times (corresponding to 4 rounds of the present embodiment). A first award game (corresponding to the 8-round jackpot game of the present embodiment) for confirming that the number of times that the opening / closing operation by the opening / closing device is repeated is increased by adding the number of times; and b. By passing the game ball through the second passage (special gate B1910), the number of times “Y (11 rounds)” larger than “X” is added to the specific number of times, or Second bonus game (4 round jackpot game or 15 round jackpot game) in which no number of times is added to the specific number of times
The player is given a gaming opportunity to obtain any of the bonus games, and the opening / closing operation by the switching device is repeatedly executed by the number of times determined by the gaming privilege obtained at the gaming opportunity. Is.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes effect display control means (CPU 2614) capable of displaying an effect image in a display area of a predetermined display screen (liquid crystal display device 640). When the winning is won in the first lottery process, the effect display control means is configured such that when the game ball passes through either the first passage opening or the second passage opening, the second lottery process. Before the start condition is established, means for displaying and outputting an effect image on whether or not the lottery result in the first lottery process is a specific lottery result (winning) on a predetermined display screen ( State information effect control means). Thus, the information indicating whether or not the gaming state (big hit game) is controlled to be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period after the condition device is activated is displayed. A player can make a game selection as to whether or not to start the second lottery by using a decision table associated with any of the mouths by striking a game ball by operating the operation handle.

  Note that when the winning is won in the first lottery process (when the condition device is activated), the winning is displayed on the predetermined display screen, and then the passage (special gate A1900, special The progress of the game is waited until the game ball passes through the gate B1910). That is, in this case, after the result of the first lottery process is won in the series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball is launched again by the player, and the game ball is placed in the passage opening. Until it is accepted, the remaining lottery process (round lottery process) in the series of lottery processes is left unexecuted and the lottery process is not terminated. Therefore, even after the game ball is received at the entrance, the player advances a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game, and further, the operation handle game in which the game ball is launched so that the jackpot game is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the gaming interest by the gameability centered on such players.

  As described above, based on the result of the first lottery process, the player adopts which lottery aspect is adopted as the second lottery process (whether the game ball is allowed to pass through among a plurality of passage openings, that is, Which one of the round number determination process A and the round number determination process B is adopted) can be determined, and the result of the first lottery process that has been determined as a lottery can be used effectively. Interestingness that allows the subsequent lottery process (second lottery process) to proceed is provided.

  When the winning display is won in the first lottery process, the effect display control means determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the passage by the second lottery progress control means. Prior to the display, a prompt image prompting the player to interrupt the operation of the operation handle is displayed and output on a predetermined display screen, thereby being associated with either the first passage port or the second passage port. Means for securing a chance that a player can perform a game selection as to whether or not to start the second lottery by adopting a decision table by battling a game ball by operating the operation handle (selection opportunity securing Means).

  Further, the game execution means can generate a period during which the big hit game is not executed even though the win is won in the first lottery process, and at least a game ball is launched by operating the operation handle. On the basis of this, there is means (non-execution period control means) that allows the execution of the jackpot game to be ended by terminating the period.

  The lottery means includes a game start control means (corresponding to step S1311 as the first lottery process) for starting the execution of the lottery process based on the reception of the game ball at the entrance, and the game start. Even if a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game is once started by the control means, when the operation of the operation handle by the player is interrupted after the start, the series of execution of the jackpot game is stopped. Lottery process stop control means for stopping the lottery process in the middle of the process (corresponding to the process of determining NO in steps S2003 and S2006). Then, after the lottery process related to the execution of the jackpot game is stopped in the middle of the process, the series of lottery processes are stopped based on at least the game ball being launched by the operation of the operation handle. It has lottery process return control means (corresponding to the process of determining YES in step S2003 or step S2006) that allows the end of the series of lottery processes by resuming the progress from the halfway process.

  In other words, in this case, even after the game start condition is satisfied, the player can advance the process so that the process related to the game is not stopped by the operation of the operation handle, whereby the operation handle is operated. Occasionally, the gameability in which the game progresses sequentially is realized. Therefore, when the game is played by an appropriate control means, the monotonous gameplay such as simply waiting for the execution condition of the jackpot game to be satisfied is eliminated, and consequently the gaming interests are reduced until the jackpot game is played. It will be suppressed.

  The lottery process stop control means is a case where the result of the first lottery process is a win among a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game performed based on the reception of the game ball at the entrance. In the second lottery process (round number determination process (step S2009, step S2012), based on the fact that the game device is received in the passage after the condition device is activated based on the situation, The period until the number of rounds is determined can be used as a means for maintaining the current state of progress of the series of lottery processes in the middle lottery process in which the game mode (number of rounds) has not yet been determined in the second lottery. Function.

  That is, in this case, unless the game mode (number of rounds) is determined in the round number determination process (step S2009, step S2012) based on the new passing of the game ball through the passage, the progress of the game is The game will be maintained in the midway lottery process where the jackpot game cannot be started. Then, by using the time that is maintained as it is, the effect that the winning is won in the first lottery process and the jackpot game is finally decided is displayed sufficiently to satisfy the player. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in the gaming interests.

  Further, the game execution means may perform the series of lottery processes in the middle of the process even if the winning is won in response to the start of execution of the series of lottery processes for execution of the jackpot game. Means for stopping at (waiting control means after winning). Then, the jackpot game is executed based on at least the lottery process stop control means resuming and terminating the lottery process from the middle process in response to the operation handle being operated. .

  In addition, the game execution means may generate a period during which the jackpot game is not executed even though the winning is won in the first lottery process (despite the condition device being operated), and at least Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage opening, the period when the jackpot game is not executed within the flow-down time until the passed game ball flows down to the switchgear is ended, A means (period cancellation ball winning control means) that allows a simple operation.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 described above, after winning in the first lottery process, a jackpot game in which the opening / closing device operates continuously is started based on at least a game ball being launched by operating the operation handle. I am doing so. Therefore, as a result of the first lottery process, control (game) does not simply proceed in a manner unrelated to the player's intention even if a win is won. In executing the game, it is possible to give a wide range to the game by using game balls launched by the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in the game interest.

  However, in this case, in order to start the execution of the jackpot game, it is necessary to launch a new game ball, so that the player will lose the amount required for this launch compared to the conventional game. It might be. Therefore, it may be possible to provide a pocket-type winning opening instead of the passing opening so that a winning ball is paid out when a game ball is received at the winning opening. Even when a normal game is performed, the winning ball is paid out, thereby adversely affecting the payout rate in the gaming machine.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, a game that has been passed through the passage so as to start a jackpot game while avoiding adversely affecting the payout rate in the gaming machine by being provided as a passage. The big hit game is started so that the ball can flow down and be received in the switchgear. As a result, the game can be widened as described above while avoiding the appearance of a game loss.

  Further, when a game ball passes through either the first passage opening or the second passage opening, the maximum prize that can be obtained by the player according to the type of the passage passage that has passed. Since the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is performed with a game mode having a different number of balls, after the game ball is received in the receiving port, depending on which kind of the first passing port and the second passing port The game selection about whether to start the big hit game with the game mode can be performed by the game ball launched by the operation of the operation handle.

  In addition, after a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot is started, the series of lottery processes can be completed at least when a game ball is launched by operating the operation handle. In addition, the big hit game is started on the condition that a series of lottery processes are thus completed.

  Therefore, even after the game ball is inserted into the entrance, the player must play the game so that the time required for the series of lottery processes and the start time of the jackpot game can be affected. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests by such a control schedule centered on the players.

  In addition, it is possible for a player to give a long time to the lottery process, which is important for the execution of a game, in relation to the execution of the jackpot, and the content of the game has not been determined even inside such a game machine. It is possible to enjoy a game period with no sense of tension by adjusting the level of the operation handle. In addition, for example, when a jackpot game is executed, a game ball is launched in order to end the series of lottery processes. Therefore, it is possible to give the game a wider range by using the game ball.

  In addition, at the time when the winning is won in the first lottery process, the matter that is determined as the jackpot game determination target with a game mode having a different maximum number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player (in the game mode of the jackpot game) (The number of rounds) is left, and this undecided matter is determined according to the game result by the player after the game ball is received at the above-mentioned entrance. The game entertainment after the game ball has been accepted is suitably maintained.

  In addition, it is possible for a player to give a lot of time to the lottery process, which is important for advancing the game, and there is a sense of tension that the content of the game has not yet been decided inside such a game machine. The game period can be enjoyed by adjusting his / her own control with respect to the operation handle. Further, when the jackpot game is executed, the game ball passes through the passage opening, so that it is possible to give the game more width by using the game ball.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed, when a game ball passes through either the first passing port or the second passing port, it depends on the type of the passing port that has passed. The determination table for the maximum prize ball number in the jackpot game is different by adopting a determination table having a different determination mode for each of the first passage port and the second passage port. 2 lotteries are held. That is, in this case, after a game ball is received at the receiving port, a determination table corresponding to any type of the first passing port and the second passing port is adopted to determine the maximum number of winning balls. The game selection as to whether to perform the second lottery can be performed by the game ball launched by operating the operation handle.

  Thus, at the time when the winning is won in the first lottery process, an unexecuted lottery process regarding a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game is left, and the unexecuted lottery process With respect to the game after the game ball is received at the entrance, the lottery is executed in accordance with the game result by the player after the game ball is received at the entrance. Interest will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the above configuration, a series of lottery process steps related to the execution of the jackpot game in the gaming machine is divided into a process step related to the first lottery and a process step related to the second lottery, and these are simply performed sequentially. In addition, in the second lottery regarding the game mode of the jackpot game, a plurality of different determination modes are prepared, and the player can select which of the determination modes is used to perform the second lottery It is said. And on this, it is made to show a player the information about whether the jackpot type already decided in the 1st lottery before the 2nd lottery is a specific winning type Thus, based on the result of the first lottery (the game state as the progress of the game), the player will select which decision mode (game content) will be adopted as the second lottery, As a result, the game (lottery) can be advanced while effectively using the result of the first lottery determined to be lottery.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the series of lottery process related to the execution of the jackpot game is separated into a process process related to the first lottery and a process process related to the second lottery. Control (game) is progressed in a place that is substantially unrelated to the player's intention, and the purpose of the game machine is prevented from being lost. More specifically, when the jackpot is won in the first lottery, the player interrupts the operation handle operation before determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the passage opening. The prompting image for prompting is displayed and output on a predetermined display screen. As a result, by continuing to operate the operation handle, the game ball passes through a specific passing port without the player's knowledge, and the determination is made to correspond to either the first passing port or the second passing port. The loss of an opportunity to perform a game game about whether to start the second lottery process using the table is suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball is received at the entrance, the win is won in the first lottery process. Is configured such that the series of lottery processes can be completed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage after being won. In addition, the big hit game is started on the condition that the series of lottery processes are thus completed.

  Therefore, even after the game ball is received at the entrance, the player can influence the time required for the execution process of a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game and the start time of the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest by such a control schedule centered on the player.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the condition device is operated based on the fact that the result of the first lottery process is a win, but the game device passes the passing port after the condition device is activated. As a period until the game passes, a period in which the jackpot game is not executed is generated. That is, even if the winning is won in the first lottery process, the big hit game is not immediately played on the condition of only this. Thus, as described above, after the winning is won in the first lottery, at least if the operation handle is operated by the player's intention and the game ball is not launched, the jackpot game is not allowed to be executed. Will be able to.

  Therefore, even if the player may not notice that the jackpot has been won in a situation where no game ball has been launched, the jackpot game will end without a game ball being launched and no winning ball being obtained. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game are started based on the reception of the game balls at the entrance, and even if the jackpot is won, the series of lottery processes is not completed and is not completed. It is stopped during the process. After the stop, the lottery process is resumed from the middle of the stopped process, based on at least the game ball being launched by operating the operation handle. This allows the execution of the jackpot game to be started.

  In other words, in this case, it is avoided that all the processes in the lottery process are terminated only on the condition that the game ball is received at the entrance, thereby a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game. In spite of this, the player can first get rid of the tension of a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game, and can first try to grasp the current lottery situation. Then, during a series of lottery stop periods related to the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to take a breath with a blissful feeling that the player has won the first lottery process.

  As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which only the game is inadvertently progressed without understanding the lottery situation, and the jackpot game is terminated without obtaining a prize ball. The decrease in the amount is suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a period in which the big hit game is not executed despite the activation of the condition device is generated, so that the winning is won in the lottery process by the lottery means. However, the jackpot game will not be played immediately on the basis of this alone. For example, after the winning is won, if the operation handle is operated by the player's intention and the game ball is not launched, it is possible to prevent the execution of the big hit game.

  Therefore, in a situation where no game ball is launched, even if the player may not notice that the winning is won in the first lottery process, the game ball is not launched and a prize ball is obtained. It is avoided that the jackpot game is ended without being present, thereby suppressing a decrease in the game interest.

  Still further, when the game ball has passed through the passage so that the non-executed period is canceled, the jackpot game is started so that the game ball can be directly inserted into the opening / closing device. It is avoided that a delay occurs in the initial movement for launching the game ball after the execution of the jackpot game is started.

  In addition, at the time when the execution of the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage opening, the game ball has already been launched in the flow path to the switchgear in the game area. (A game ball has been launched before the execution of the jackpot game is started), so that the jackpot game can be performed with a margin.

  That is, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) described in the present embodiment can be configured as follows, for example.

  For example, the gaming machine includes a gaming area in which a gaming ball is launched, an opening / closing device (opening / closing member 1508) that can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming ball launched in the gaming area, and a reception port provided in the gaming area ( Based on the fact that a game ball is received at the first start port 1502 and the second start port 1506) and the receiving port, a lottery process (if there is no time reduction, a win / no-go determination process in step S1311, if there is a time shortage, a pass / fail determination process in step S1314) ) (A function of the CPU 2502 for determining whether or not to win / fail) and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device based on the fact that the jackpot (special hit) is won in the lottery processing by the lottery means. A game execution means (a jackpot game execution means) capable of executing a jackpot game that facilitates the reception of a game ball inward, and the lottery means Mid-variable control means that can change the game state when in the middle of the selection process (a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game) (one function of the CPU that manages the operation of the probability change function and the time reduction function) With.

  In the above configuration, with respect to a game execution means capable of executing a jackpot game that facilitates acceptance of a game ball into the opening / closing device by an opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device based on the winning of the lottery process The mid-variation control means that can change the gaming state when the lottery process is in the middle of the process is provided. In other words, in this case, the game state is changed by changing the game state from the process stage where the lottery process has not yet been finished, and thus, the game entertainment until the jackpot game is actually executed is suitably maintained. Will be able to.

  In addition, the gaming machine is a gaming machine whose gaming state can be changed upon execution of the jackpot game, and can be opened and closed with respect to a gaming area where a game ball is launched, and a gaming ball launched into the gaming area Based on the opening / closing device (opening / closing member 1508), receiving ports (first starting port 1502, second starting port 1506) provided in the gaming area, and game balls are received in the receiving port, In the lottery means (one function of the CPU 2502 that performs the determination process and the round number determination process (step S2009, step S2012)) that can perform the lottery process according to the execution mode (number of rounds), and the lottery process by the lottery means On the condition that the execution mode of the game is determined, the opening / closing operation of the switchgear is started with the determined execution mode. A game execution means for executing a jackpot game (a jackpot game execution means), and a processing stage in which a jackpot game cannot be executed by the game execution means because the execution mode of the jackpot game has not yet been determined in the lottery process by the lottery means Although the condition device is in operation and the game ball is not passing through either the special gate A1900 or the special gate B1910, the game state in the processing stage is the jackpot game. Prior to the execution mode being determined, special control means (a CPU that manages the operation of the probability changing function and the time-shortening function) that can be changed to the gaming state (normal gaming state) when the jackpot game is executed. (Function).

  In the above configuration, on the condition that the execution mode of the jackpot game is determined, the game execution means for executing the jackpot game by starting the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device with the determined execution mode is used for the jackpot game. In spite of the fact that the execution mode has not yet been decided and cannot be executed, the jackpot game is executed prior to the determination of the execution mode of the jackpot game. Special control means that can be changed to the gaming state at the time of the game is provided.

  Therefore, since the game state is changed to the game state when the jackpot game is executed in spite of the fact that the lottery process is not yet finished, such a process functions as a preparation process for the jackpot game. Become. That is, in this case, since at least a part of the preparation process for the jackpot game has already been completed when the lottery process is completed, the opening / closing operation of the switchgear is started immediately after the lottery process is completed. Will be able to run.

  In addition, the game state is changed by changing the game state from the process stage where the lottery process has not been finished yet, and thereby, it is possible to favorably maintain the game interest until the jackpot game is actually executed. become able to.

  Further, the gaming machine is in a situation where the game lottery (a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game) for the progress of the game has been finished and the symbol variation (variation of the special symbol) has been stopped, In a gaming machine in which a game (bonus game) is started after winning when a jackpot (special hit) is won in the game lottery, the game lottery is performed when the jackpot (special hit) is won for the game lottery Execution mode of a post-winning game (bonus game) corresponding to the winning of the jackpot (special bonus) for the movement of the symbol (special symbol) that is stopped to indicate that it has been selected even in the middle stage This process has not yet been performed for the mode lottery process (round number determination process A in step S2009, round number determination process B in step S2012). The lottery control means (one function of the CPU 2502 for executing a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game) for controlling the execution of the game lottery so as to remain as The mode lottery that is left as the processing that has not yet been performed of the game lottery based on the fact that a game ball is newly received at a specific receiving port (special gate A1900, special gate B1910) By having the remaining lottery control means (one function of the CPU 2502 for performing the round number determination process in step S2009 or step S2012) that ends the game lottery by performing the process, the game after the winning is started The lottery state in the mode lottery process for the execution mode of the post-winning game according to the winning of the jackpot (special bonus) It may be configured to be carried out while securing a sufficient time to select a player by the player about how to employ any of the lottery manner as (the number of rounds different jackpot gaming).

  In other words, in a gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine), when the game lottery for the progress of the game has been terminated and the symbol variation has been stopped, if the jackpot is won in the game lottery, A game (for example, a jackpot game) is automatically started.

  On the other hand, symbols are often automatically stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed once the fluctuation has started. Therefore, in such a gaming machine, if a game opportunity that can cause a change in the game itself is simply given, the player will at least have any time limit within the time limit until the change of the symbol is automatically stopped. There is no choice but to play a selection game about whether the game should proceed.

  However, the meaning of these selected games is significantly different from the so-called selection of effects (games that change the contents of the effects) in conventional gaming machines, and depending on the results of the selected games, the profits that can be enjoyed by the player are affected. It is an important game element. Therefore, the player must be aware of the above time limit even though it is necessary to conduct a selection game after carefully considering which game should proceed and considering the current game situation and risks. If one of the games is selected according to the situation, there is a concern that depending on the game result, such gameability may not be convinced and the gaming interest will be lowered.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, first, regarding the game lottery, when the jackpot is won, even if it is in the middle of the game lottery, the motion of the symbol is stopped to indicate that it has been selected. On the other hand, with respect to the mode lottery process related to the execution mode of the post-winning game according to the big win, the game lottery is controlled so that it is left as a process that has not yet been performed (drawing control means). . And on this, based on the fact that the game ball is newly received at the specific entrance with the symbol being stopped, the aspect that is left as the above-described processing of the game lottery The game lottery is terminated by performing the lottery process (remaining lottery control means).

  In such a configuration, until the symbol is stopped, the above-described aspect lottery process that may affect the profits that can be enjoyed by the player is not performed, and is left in an unexecuted state. . That is, in this case, even if the symbol is stopped, the game lottery for the progress of the game is not completed and the processing stage is still in progress (the game execution mode after winning is impossible because the execution mode of the game after winning is not yet determined) Is maintained).

  In addition, in the mid-stage processing stage as the above-mentioned game lottery, since the game ball is newly launched by the player and can be maintained until it is received at a specific entrance, the design is stopped. The selection by the player as to which lottery mode will be adopted as the lottery mode in the mode lottery process for the mode of execution of the post-winning game corresponding to the jackpot winning game after the winning game is started The game can be performed while securing a sufficient time.

  In addition, the gaming machine has an operation handle (operation handle portion 461) operated by a player, a game area where a game ball is launched by operation of the operation handle, and a game ball launched into the game area. An opening / closing device (opening / closing member 1508) capable of opening and closing, a starting port (first starting port 1502, second starting port 1506) provided in the game area, and a game ball driven into the game area can pass therethrough. And a lottery process (a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game) based on the fact that the game ball is received at the start port and the passing gate (special gate A1900, special figure gate B1910) When the jackpot (special hit) is won in the lottery process, the opening / closing operation by the opening / closing device is performed a specific number of times. Continuous game control means (big hit game execution means) that promises to be repeatedly executed, and at least a first passage opening (special figure gate A1900) and a second passage opening (special figure gate) as the passage openings. B1910) is provided, and the continuous game control means assures that the opening / closing operation by the opening / closing device is repeatedly executed a specific number of times, and then a) passes the game ball to the first passage opening Thus, the first privilege for confirming that the number of times the opening / closing operation by the opening / closing device is repeated is increased by adding at least the number of times “X (4 rounds)” to the specific number of times (4 rounds). A game (8 round jackpot game), and b) by passing a game ball through the second passage, the number of times “Y” greater than “X” in the specific number of times 11 rounds) "or a second bonus game (4 round jackpot game or 15 round jackpot game) that is not added to the specific number of times. It is also possible to provide the player with the obtained gaming opportunity and to repeatedly perform the opening / closing operation by the opening / closing device for the number of times determined by the gaming privilege obtained at the gaming opportunity.

  In the above configuration, when the jackpot is won, the player privilege of the lowest line is first committed. After the jackpot is won, the player is given a game opportunity (chance) that can raise the content of the guaranteed player benefits, and at the time of granting the game opportunity, It is decided to prepare privilege games (first privilege game, second privilege game) with different up methods. In addition, one of the two rank-up methods is higher risk / high return than the other (no lower than the player benefits of the lowest line), and any of these rank-up methods is adopted. This is determined according to the passing destination (first passing port, second passing port) of the game ball newly launched by the player after winning the jackpot.

  That is, in this case, after the jackpot is won, not only can the profit that the player can enjoy increase, but also the method of increasing change (ranking means) A game opportunity for determining either one is given to the player. Therefore, the gameability after winning the jackpot can be realized as more aggressive gameplay of the player participation type.

  In addition, the gaming machine has an operation handle (operation handle portion 461) operated by a player, a game area where a game ball is launched by operation of the operation handle, and a game ball launched into the game area. An opening / closing device (opening / closing member 1508) capable of opening and closing, a starting port (first starting port 1502, second starting port 1506) provided in the game area, and a game ball driven into the game area can pass therethrough. And a lottery process (a series of lottery processes related to the execution of the jackpot game) based on the fact that the game ball is received at the start port and the passing gate (special gate A1900, special figure gate B1910) And when the jackpot (special hit) is won in the lottery process, the opening / closing operation of the switchgear The game control means (the jackpot game execution means) for performing control related to the execution of the jackpot game that facilitates the acceptance of the game balls, and the type of the jackpot won in the lottery process is a specific winning type (probability jackpot ), State control means that can be controlled to a gaming state (high probability gaming state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period after the jackpot game is performed, and the result of the lottery process by the game control means An effect display control means (one function of the CPU 2614) that performs display control that can be displayed on a predetermined effect display surface (the effect display surface of the liquid crystal display device 640) is provided. There is provided at least a first passage opening (special drawing gate B 1910) and a second passage opening (special drawing gate A 1900) capable of striking a ball. The control means starts the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device by causing the game ball to pass through the first passage after the big win (special win) is won in the lottery process, and the jackpot game is started. The first game (a game in which a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the center role 1400 to allow the game ball to pass through the special gate B1910) is played at the second passage opening. The second game (the center game 1400 is placed on the left side to allow the game ball to pass through the special-purpose gate A1900). The game control means (the condition device is activated after winning) that can be executed as a high-risk game with respect to the increase or decrease of the player's possession ball for a game that aims to launch a game ball The CPU 2502 is controlled to a normal gaming state in which the execution of the big hit game has not yet started), and the effect display control means has won the big win (special hit) in the lottery process However, in the production display surface, the game ball is struck at the first passage in the concealed production state in spite of temporarily concealing the information without showing information on the winning type. And a concealment forced release means (game state disclosure means) capable of forcibly releasing the concealed performance state when the highly risky first game is executed by the post-winning game control means. You can also

  In the above-described configuration, after the jackpot is won in the lottery process, the opportunity to select whether to play a high-risk game (first game) between the first game and the second game is provided. Regardless of the player's intention, when the game with high risk is selected despite the fact that it is given to the player by dividing the game ball, the once hidden performance state is forcibly canceled. I am trying to get it.

  That is, in this case, the player selects a game with a different risk in consideration of the fact that the concealment effect is not executed, and the game event (effect) that does not affect the game content itself and the game content itself are affected. Such a novel game nature in which game events (games) that affect the game are intertwined with each other makes it possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment.

  In addition, the gaming machine has a lottery means (one function of the CPU 2502 for performing a series of lottery processes for the execution of the jackpot game) for lottery based on the start winning prize, and the lottery by the lottery means (special win) When winning, the jackpot game execution means for playing a jackpot game in which a prize ball can be paid out to a player by opening and closing a predetermined opening and closing device (opening and closing member 1508), and winning by lottery by the lottery means Depending on the type of winning, a predetermined period after the jackpot game is played, the first game mode (low probability state) in which the winning probability is relatively low, and the winning probability is higher than the first game mode State control means (one function of the CPU 2502 that manages the operation of the probability changing function and the time-shortening function) that can be controlled as one of the increased gaming states (high probability state), When the winning (special winning) is won by the lottery means, it is disclosed by the effect display whether it is controlled to the first game mode or the second game mode according to the type of the win A possible game disclosure mode (game state disclosure unit) and a game mode that can be set to a concealed production state in which the game mode controlled by the state control unit is concealed by restricting the disclosure of the game mode by the stage disclosure unit. Prior to the opening / closing operation of a predetermined opening / closing device being started by the concealment means (game state concealment means) and the jackpot game execution means, the concealment effect state by the game state concealment means is terminated and the game mode is disclosed. A game opportunity (an opportunity to decide which game ball to pass between special gate A1900 and special gate B1910) to the player However, when this game opportunity is used by the player and the concealment effect state is ended and the game mode is disclosed, when the same opportunity is not used by the player (the special gate A1900 has a game) Play modification control means (the number of rounds that can be determined that the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 4 rounds) that can reduce the total number of prize balls that can be paid out to the player in the jackpot game than when passing the ball) (One function of the CPU 2502 for executing the determination process B).

  In the above configuration, a game opportunity that allows the game mode to be disclosed by ending the concealment effect state by the game mode concealment unit before the opening / closing operation of the predetermined opening / closing device is started by the jackpot game execution unit In addition to being given to the player, when this game opportunity is used by the player and the concealment effect state is terminated and the game mode is disclosed, the above jackpot is greater than when the same opportunity is not used by the player. The total number of prize balls that can be paid out to a player in a game can be reduced (play modification control means).

  In other words, in this case, the number of prize balls in the jackpot game is affected depending on whether or not the game opportunity for the continuation and end of the concealment effect state is used. Therefore, unlike the case where a pure presentation that can simply select whether or not to end the concealment presentation state is provided, the number of winning balls in the jackpot game (the progress of the game itself) may be adversely affected. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameability in which it is necessary to decide whether or not to use the above-described game opportunity, that is, a novel gameplay in which production and game are intertwined.

  In addition, for example, when you are playing while trying to stop the game soon, especially in the current game situation, you can use this gameability well to suppress the decline in the game interest Also become. In addition, while allowing the player to finish the concealment effect state, in the normal time (the game situation where the player wants to continue the game), the finish operation is simply performed in balance with the number of winning balls in the jackpot game. Since it does not exist, it is possible to favorably maintain the gameability in which the game progresses while estimating the current game state.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173.

  The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is basically the same as the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. However, as shown in FIG. 170, in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, a special figure having a function of distributing game balls instead of the game board 4 (see FIG. 74) of the first embodiment. A game board 2444 provided with a gate device 2900 is provided. In FIG. 170, illustration of some members such as obstacle nails is omitted.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment, the special figure gate A1900 is arranged in the game area 605 on the left side of the center bonus 1400, and the special figure in the game area 605 on the right side of the center bonus 1400. By arranging the gate B1910, it is possible to perform the game balls for the special figure gate A1900 and the special figure gate B1910. Then, depending on which of the two gates the game ball has passed, the number of rounds when the jackpot game is executed is determined with different determination modes, and the jackpot game is started with the determined number of rounds. ing.

  However, in the configuration according to the first embodiment as described above, even when the game ball is to be launched toward the right side of the center accessory 1400, the game ball is against the player's will. A situation may occur in which the center object 1400 is fired in the left region. In other words, in this case, the number of rounds is determined according to the determination mode on the side that the player does not intend, and depending on the result of the determination, the game interest will be reduced even though the jackpot game is started. It can also be.

  Therefore, in the game board 2444 according to this embodiment, first, among the members on the game board 4 of the previous first embodiment, the general-purpose gate 1600 in the right game area 605 and the special-purpose gate A1900. And the special figure gate B1910 are omitted. Then, a special-purpose gate device 2900 having a game ball distribution function is disposed at the location where the general-purpose gate 1600 is disposed in the game area 605 on the right side.

  This special figure gate device 2900 is formed in a permeable case shape, and an intake port 2901 capable of constantly taking a game ball driven into the game area 605 on the right side into the device, and the take-in A movable member 2902 that distributes the game balls taken in from the mouth 2901 to one of two passages (first passage and second passage) in the device, and is distributed to the first passage by the movable member 2902 A first special figure gate 2903 provided so that a game ball passes, and a second special figure gate 2904 provided so that a game ball distributed to the second passage by the movable member 2902 passes. The game ball having passed through either the first special figure gate 2903 or the second special figure gate 2904 is provided with a discharge port 2905 through which the game ball is discharged from the inside of the apparatus.

  Although not shown in the figure, a plurality of obstacle nails are provided immediately above the intake port 2901. These obstacle nails capture all of the game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 on the right side. It is arranged with a gauge configuration that guides it to the inlet 2901. Therefore, in the game board 2444 according to this embodiment, all the game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 on the right side are taken into the special-purpose gate device 2900 through the intake port 2901.

  The movable member 2902 is controlled to be driven in one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 135) by the main control board 1350 (CPU 2502). Although the specific movement will be described later, the movable member 2902 according to this embodiment performs a certain movement that does not change according to the progress of the game from when the power is turned on. It is provided as.

  That is, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, the player confirms a certain movement by the movable member 2902, and is directed to the right side of the center accessory 1400 at an appropriate timing in relation to the current position of the movable member 2902. By launching the game balls in this way, the game balls can be distributed with the aim of either the first special figure gate 2903 or the second special figure gate 2904. As the drive source, for example, a motor or the like can be used.

  In addition, the first special figure gate 2903 and the second special figure gate 2904 are described as schematic diagrams in the figure, but the configuration thereof is the special figure gate A1900 of the first embodiment. And it is almost the same as the special figure gate B1910. That is, when the game ball passes through one of the gate parts of the first special figure gate 2903 and the second special figure gate 2904 by the sorting by the movable member 2902, the special figure gate sensor A1901 or the special figure gate sensor. Detection by B1911 is performed. As will be described later, even in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment, the main control board 1350 (CPU 2502) determines that detection is performed by the special figure gate sensor A 1901 and the special figure gate sensor B 1911 under a predetermined condition. A round determination random number is acquired, and a round number determination process is performed when the jackpot game is executed.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, the first special figure gate 2903 and the second special figure gate 2904 are arranged together in the game area 605 on the right side. Therefore, after the change of the special symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, when the game ball is launched aiming at one of the special symbol gates 2903 and 2904, the game ball is more than the center actor 1400 against the player's intention. Even if a situation occurs such that the game ball is fired to the left area, the game ball is not used for the process of determining the number of rounds. That is, in this case, based on the current position of the movable member 2902, the player again performs an operation on the operation handle portion 461 so as to launch a game ball aiming at one of the special figure gates 2903 and 2904. The number of rounds when the jackpot game is executed is determined according to the determination mode on the favorite side of the player. In addition, after the change of the special symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, unless the game ball passes through either of the special gates 2903 and 2904, the number of rounds is not determined and the jackpot game is not started. This is the same as in the case of the first embodiment.

  Further, the discharge port 2905 is a part that discharges the game ball that has passed through either the first special figure gate 2903 or the second special figure gate 2904 to the game area 605 outside the device, The released game ball flows down toward the first start port 1502, the second start port 1506, the special winning port 1510, and the like.

  FIGS. 171 and 172 are views for explaining the operation of the movable member 2902 in the special-purpose gate device 2900.

  As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the main control board 1350 (CPU 2502) according to this embodiment is movable around a predetermined rotation axis through one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 135). The member 2902 is controlled so as to periodically rotate in the left-right direction.

  That is, now, assuming that the movable member 2902 has rotated to the right and has reached the first position shown in FIG. 171, the main control board 1350 (the CPU 2502) is at the first position for a predetermined time (for example, Control is performed so that the movable member 2902 stays in the stopped state only for 5 seconds. Then, when the game ball taken into the special figure gate device 2900 is supplied to the movable member 2902 staying at the first position in this way, the game ball is supplied to the first special figure by the movable member 2902. It is distributed to the gate 2903 side.

  On the other hand, the main control board 1350 (CPU 2502) measures the time from when the movable member 2902 reaches the first position. When a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is counted, the main control board 1350 moves the left side of the movable member 2902. Control to rotate in the direction. As a result, when the movable member 2902 rotates to the second position shown in FIG. 172, the main control board 1350 (CPU 2502) moves the movable member 2902 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) at the second position. Is controlled so as to remain in a stopped state. Then, when the game ball taken into the special figure gate device 2900 is supplied to the movable member 2902 staying at the second position in this way, the game ball is supplied to the second special figure by the movable member 2902. It is distributed to the gate 2904 side.

  The main control board 1350 (CPU 2502) measures the time after the movable member 2902 reaches the second position, and when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is counted, the first control board 1350 (FIG. 171). The movable member 2902 is controlled to rotate to the right until the position shown in FIG.

  Such control by the main control board 1350 (CPU 2502) is repeatedly performed from the time of turning on the power, whereby the movable member 2902 causes the first time each time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The first position (the position shown in FIG. 171) and the second position (the position shown in FIG. 172) are displaced. Incidentally, since the time required for the displacement between the first position and the second position is about 1 second, the movable member 2902 basically has the first position and the second position. It is located in a stopped state in either. Therefore, the player strikes the game ball aiming at the time when the movable member 2902 is stopped at either the first position or the second position, whereby the first special figure gate 2903 is obtained. And the second special figure gate 2904 can be played.

  It should be noted that at least a game ball is fired as a predetermined time during which the movable member 2902 is stopped at each of the first position (position shown in FIG. 171) and the second position (position shown in FIG. 172). It is possible to adopt a longer time than the time required to reach the special figure gate device 2900 from the first special figure gate 2903 and the second special figure gate 2904 in the special figure gate device 2900. This is important for making it easy to divide the game balls.

  Hereinafter, the control concerning the game progress in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described.

  In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, since the general-purpose gate 1600 is provided only in the left game area 605, the player can play the game on the left side regardless of the game state. The operation handle portion 461 is operated so that a game ball is driven into the game area 605.

  In other words, if a game ball is driven into the game area 605 on the left side, the game ball flows down toward the normal gate 1600, the first start port 1502, the second start port 1506, and the like. As a result, when the game ball passes through the ordinary gate 1600, the same processing (step S90) as in the first embodiment is performed.

  Also, when a game ball is received at the first start port 1502 or the second start port 1506, basically, the same processing (step S100) as in the case of the first embodiment is performed. However, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, the probability that the jackpot is won in the winning / failing determination process (step S1311) (the jackpot winning probability) is “1/1” when the probability variation function is not activated. 350 ”, and“ 1/35 ”when the probability changing function is activated. Still further, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 173, when the big hit is won in the winning / failing determination process (step S1311), the winning type determined based on the design random number As a result, four types of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D are prepared.

  Here, the jackpot A is the one in which the probabilistic function and the short-time function operate until the next jackpot winning after the jackpot winning, and in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning, It can be obtained by averaging the number of balls (total number of prize balls).

  In addition, after winning the jackpot, the jackpot B is the one in which the probability change function and the short-time function are activated until the next jackpot win, and in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot win, The ball (total number of prize balls) can be obtained on average.

  In addition, although the jackpot C is a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning game 1510, although the probability variation function and the short-time function operate until the next jackpot winning prize after the jackpot winning, The opening time per one time is only to be opened with a short opening mode in which the opening time is shorter than in the case of big hits A and B, and it cannot be expected to obtain a large amount of balls.

  In addition, the jackpot D is the one in which the probability variation function does not operate after the winning of the jackpot, and in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot, the average number of balls (total number of winning balls) equivalent to 12 rounds is obtained. Is something that can be done. However, the time-saving function is activated only for a predetermined period (for example, a period in which 100 symbol variations are performed) after the jackpot game ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), when a big win is won in the big hit lottery on the first start port 1502 side, the big win (hit with the operation of the condition device) is based on the design random number. The probability that the winning type is determined to be “big hit A” is “5%”, the probability that it is determined that “big hit B” is “37%”, and the probability that it is determined that “big hit C” is “25%”. The probability of determining “big hit D” is “33%”.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 173 (b), when a big win is won in the big win lottery on the second start port 1506 side, a big win (a win involving the operation of the condition device) is based on the design random number. ) Is determined as “big hit A”, the probability of determining “big hit B” as “59.5%”, and the probability of determining as “big hit C”. Is set to “2.5%”, and the probability of determining “big hit D” is set to “33%”.

  According to the winning type determination method according to the second embodiment, unlike the case of the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the special-purpose gates 2903 and 2904 are displayed as game balls. Estimated number of balls (total number of award balls) that a player can win in the jackpot game before the timing when the number of rounds is determined by passing (the stage of starting the change of special symbols) ( (Average value) will be determined. Therefore, in this second embodiment, when determining the variation time of the special symbol and the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 640, not only the random number for the variation pattern but also the design random number is used. According to the standard (average value) of (the total number of award balls), the variation time of the special symbol and the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be varied.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment as well, with regard to the number of round games (number of rounds), the game ball passed through the special figure gates 2903 and 2904 only after the change of the special symbol was stopped. Based on this, it is decided (lottery). That is, also in this embodiment, after the fluctuation start process (step S130), the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150), and the fluctuation process (step S180) are performed, it is a condition that the jackpot is won. Round number lottery processing (step S200) is performed.

  Also in the round number lottery process according to the second embodiment, first, whether or not the variation of the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 is stopped. Judgment is made. As will be described later, when it is determined that the variation of the special symbol has stopped (more specifically, when it is determined that the interval period after the suspension of the variation of the special symbol has ended), the condition device is activated. At this time, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 is stopped in a mode (winning symbol) indicating that it is a win.

  Next, control is made to a low-probability non-short-time state in which neither the probability changing function nor the short-time function is activated, and whether or not the game ball has passed through the first special figure gate 2903 in this gaming state, that is, the special figure A determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor A1901. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first special figure gate 2903, the special figure A flag is turned ON, and the number of rounds in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 1508 is controlled in the big hit game is set. A round decision random number A to be used for determination is acquired. This round determination random number A is acquired from any one of random number widths 0 to 255, and the CPU 2502 determines the number of rounds for determining the number of rounds in the jackpot game based on the acquired round determination random number A. Process A is performed.

  However, in the round number determination process A according to the second embodiment, even if any of the round determination random numbers A is acquired, the ball that has already been determined based on the design random number (the prize ball) The number of rounds is determined according to the standard (average value) of (total). That is, as shown in FIG. 173, for example, when the standard (average value) of the appearance (the total number of prize balls) is won by a large “big hit A” that is equivalent to 16 rounds, When it is decided that a round game will be played and the standard (average value) of the number of balls (total number of prize balls) is equivalent to 12 rounds, the winner is a “big hit B” or “big hit D”. It is determined that 12 round games will be played. Note that if the “big hit C” is won, it is determined that a 12-round game with a short opening will be performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the first special figure gate 2903, whether or not the game ball has passed through the second special figure gate 2904, that is, the special figure gate sensor B1911. A determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has been detected. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second special figure gate 2904, the special figure B flag is turned on, and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 1508 in the jackpot game is controlled. A round decision random number B to be used for decision is acquired. This round determination random number B is acquired from any one of random number widths 0 to 255, and round number determination processing B is performed to determine the number of rounds in the jackpot game based on the acquired round determination random number B. Do.

  However, in the round number determination process B according to the second embodiment, unlike the round number determination process A described above, a guideline (average number of winning balls) that has already been determined based on the design random number The number of rounds is not necessarily determined. That is, as shown in FIG. 173, for example, when the standard (average value) of the appearance balls (the total number of prize balls) is won with a large “big hit A” equivalent to 16 rounds, the round decision random number B In any case, it is decided that 16 round games will be played, but the standard (average value) of the appearance (total number of prize balls) is equivalent to 12 rounds. If you have won the “big hit B” or “big hit D” in the middle of the number, the number of rounds (12 rounds) that are the guideline is shifted up or down by the same number of rounds (here, 4 rounds). One of the numbers of rounds (16 rounds, 8 rounds) is determined by lottery based on the random number B for round determination.

  In other words, in this case, when “Big Bonus B” and “Big Bonus D” are selected, the round (total number of prize balls) is set to the middle equivalent to 12 rounds. Depending on the result of the lottery lottery process based on the random number for decision B, the number of balls (16 rounds) that is the same as when the jackpot A was won as the number of balls actually played by the jackpot game (total number of prize balls) Is obtained. Conversely, there is a case where only a small number of balls (8 rounds) can be obtained as much as the case where a large number of balls (16 rounds) equivalent to that when winning jackpot A is won is obtained. Will be.

  In addition, when “big hit B” and “big hit D” are won, the probability of being determined for 16 rounds and the probability of being determined for 8 rounds based on the round decision random number B are both “50”. The number of rounds as the expected value is set so as to coincide with the standard (12 rounds) of the number of balls (total number of prize balls) already determined based on the design random number. That is, the number of rounds as the expected value only needs to coincide with the guideline (12 rounds) of the appearance (total number of prize balls) already determined based on the design random number. In this sense, for example, 16 It is also possible to set one of 16 rounds and 2 rounds by lottery after setting the probability of being determined as a round high.

  Therefore, as a pachinko machine, regardless of whether the game ball passes through either the first special figure gate 2903 or the second special figure gate 2904, it is paid out when the jackpot game is executed at the time of passage. The expected value of the outgoing ball (total number of prize balls) is the same, but from the player's point of view, whether to get the expected ball (12 rounds) by aiming at the first special figure gate 2903, A game that suits your tastes, such as whether to bet on the possibility of a 16-round jackpot game under the risk of an 8-round jackpot game being played by aiming at the second special figure gate 2904 Can be selectively performed.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 173, even when the “big hit C” is won, when the game ball passes through the first special figure gate 2903, it becomes 12 rounds, and the second special figure gate 2904 is displayed. When the game ball passes, either the 8th round or the 16th round is determined by lottery. However, since these are all played as round games with a short open, the number of balls (total number of prize balls) that can be earned regardless of the number of rounds is very small. The impact is small.

  By the way, after the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 is stopped in a mode (winning symbol) indicating that it is a win, the special symbol is displayed. As a period until the detection of the game ball by the figure gate sensor A 1901 or the special figure gate sensor B 1911 is validated (a period during which the progress of the game is forcibly stopped), a predetermined time for explaining the game is secured. It is desirable. Then, the liquid crystal display device 640 uses this predetermined time to display a display image to which attention is paid to the movable member 2902 and a result of the game balls being distributed by the movable member 2902 (first special figure gate 2903, second It is desirable to explain that the manner of determining the number of rounds in the jackpot game differs according to the special figure gate 2904).

  In addition, when the movable member 2902 rotates between the first position and the second position, an effect image that alternately changes between the two display modes is displayed. The game balls can be divided into the first special figure gate 2903 and the second special figure gate 2904 simply by looking at the liquid crystal display device 640. This effect image may be displayed before the detection of the game ball by the special figure gate sensor A 1901 or the special figure gate sensor B 1911 is validated, and may be used for the description.

  In addition, the predetermined time until the detection of the game ball by the special figure gate sensor A 1901 or the special figure gate sensor B 1911 is validated (a period during which the progress of the game is forcibly stopped) is a big hit when in the normal game state. It is desirable that the length is different between the case of winning and the case of winning a jackpot when in other gaming states. In particular, in a gaming state in which the probability variation function is operating, since the game description is confirmed at least once when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, a brief explanation in a shorter time However, it seems that there is no inconvenience, and it is desirable in order to be able to acquire many balls in a short time.

  Here, as the period during which the progress of the game is forcibly stopped, an interval period after the stop (change time ends) in a mode (winning symbol) indicating that the special symbol is winning can be used. When it is determined that the interval period has ended, the condition device is activated, and based on the activation, the detection of the game ball by the special figure gate sensor A 1901 and the special figure gate sensor B 1911 is validated. Become.

  In other words, in this case, the interval period is determined based on the result of winning the jackpot, the design random number, the random number for variation pattern, the gaming state at the time of the jackpot lottery, etc. It is possible to make the length different between the case where the jackpot is won and the case where the jackpot is won when in other gaming states. In addition, as will be described later, the interval period after the stop of the game (the progress of the game is the case where the production pattern is the same in the case where the jackpot B is won and the case where the jackpot D is won) It is possible to set the same period to be forcibly stopped and to have the same contents for the game descriptions. In addition, as will be described later, an interval period after a symbol stop (game) when the same effect content is adopted in the case where the jackpot A is won and the case where the jackpot C is won It is possible to set the same time period during which the progress of the game is forcibly stopped to have the same content.

  Further, in at least one of the liquid crystal display device 640 and the special figure gate device 2900, the remaining time until the movable member 2902 rotates from the current position is displayed (countdown display) by counting or the like. desirable. In particular, if an appropriate display member is provided in the special-purpose gate device 2900 and the count-down display is performed with this display member, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the movable member 2902 is moving in a certain manner. Since the remaining time is clarified, the special gate on the side intended by the player can be aimed more accurately.

  Also, after the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 is stopped in a mode (winning symbol) indicating that it is a win, the special symbol is displayed. As long as the game ball is not detected by the figure gate sensor A 1901 or the special figure gate sensor B 1911, the point that the game continues without being advanced and stays in the state before the start of the jackpot game is described in the first embodiment. It is the same as the case of.

  In addition, as the effect pattern during the fluctuation time appearing on the liquid crystal display device 640, the effect pattern having the same effect content is adopted when the jackpot B is won and when the jackpot D is won. It is desirable to have a case. In other words, in this case, when the liquid crystal display device 640 distributes the game balls to the first special figure gate 2903 when the special symbol is a win (a winning symbol) indicating that the special symbol is a win (the change time ends). When “12 rounds” is determined and game balls are distributed to the second special figure gate 2904, either “8 rounds” or “16 rounds” is determined by lottery with a probability of 50%. A game description is given. Then, in response to this game description, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through either the first special figure gate 2903 or the second special figure gate 2904, it is determined by the round number determination process. A jackpot game is started based on the number of rounds. Then, during the period in which the jackpot game is performed, an effect regarding whether or not the game state is controlled so that the probability changing function is activated after the jackpot game is performed.

  In addition, as the effect pattern during the variation time appearing on the liquid crystal display device 640, the effect pattern having the same effect content is adopted when the jackpot A is won and when the jackpot C is won. It is desirable to have a case. In other words, when winning the jackpot A or jackpot C, unlike the case of winning the jackpot B or jackpot D, the game ball is used as either the first special figure gate 2903 or the second special figure gate 2904. Even if it passes, there is no significant change in the number of balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game (total number of prize balls). However, on the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through either the first special figure gate 2903 or the second special figure gate 2904, the big hit game is not started, so that the big hit game is simply started. In addition, if it is assumed that a game ball has to be launched toward the special figure gate device 2900, there is a concern that the game interest will be lowered.

  In this regard, when winning the jackpot A or jackpot C, after adopting the same effect pattern, stop in a mode (hit symbol) indicating that the special symbol is winning (variation time) After the game is completed, a big hit game (big hit A) with a large number of balls is played based on the game ball passing through either the first special figure gate 2903 or the second special figure gate 2904. However, if an effect on whether or not the jackpot game (C) with the minimum number of balls to be played is performed, the impression that the winning type is drawn at the time of passing through the special figure gate may be given. It will be possible to suppress the decline of the game entertainment. As described above, since the number of rounds is determined at the time of passing through the special symbol gate, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1802 or the second special symbol indicator 1804 is a hit. When the game is stopped (variation time is finished) in a mode (a winning symbol) indicating (a point before the game ball passes through the special gate), the round is not displayed as a ramp. Also, in this case, since the game elements related to the distribution of the game balls between the first special figure gate 2903 and the second special figure gate 2904 are not so important, the interval period after the symbol stop (game The time period during which the progress is forcibly stopped) is set shorter than the case where the jackpot B or jackpot D is won, and a simple game description (for example, “Now! Etc.) ”is desirable.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, in the special lottery (the jackpot lottery) performed based on the game balls received at the first start port 1502 and the second start port 1506, the jackpot game The expected number of balls (total number of prize balls) that can be acquired by the player when the game is performed is determined based on the design random number (first determination process). Then, when the display of variation by symbol ends based on the result of the special lottery (big win lottery) and stops in a mode (winning symbol) indicating that the special symbol is a win, the first special symbol gate 2903 Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through one of the second special figure gates 2904, a determination process for the number of rounds under the expected value that has already been determined is performed (second determination process). . According to such a two-stage determination process before and after the change display of the symbols is stopped, the second-stage determination process is within the range of expected values that have already been determined. Since the number of rounds may be determined so as to cause a deviation from the number of rounds (guideline) determined by the determination process, for example, it is indicated that the number of rounds is not so large during the display of the variation of the symbol. Even when the performance is performed, it is possible to leave a sense of expectation that a large number of rounds will be determined in the determination process in the second stage. On the other hand, since the number of rounds (guideline) determined in the first stage determination process is determined in the second stage determination process, the game is possible. Also, a solid player's game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the jackpot winning type, after winning the jackpot game, a chance to activate the probability variation function and a chance to not activate the probability variation function are prepared. You may make it prepare only. However, in this case, the probability changing function is deactivated when the jackpot is not won within a predetermined period (for example, a period in which 60 symbol variations are performed) after the jackpot game ends.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example. However, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to a pachinko machine, and a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine or a pachinko machine and a slot machine. It can also be applied to a fusion game machine that fuses and (a game that uses a game ball to play a slot game).

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example. However, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to a pachinko machine, and a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine or a pachinko machine and a slot machine. It can also be applied to a fusion game machine that fuses and (a game that uses a game ball to play a slot game).

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine (pachinko machine), 2 ... Outer frame (outer frame), 3 ... Main body frame (main body frame), 4 ... Game board (game board), 5 ... Door frame (door frame), 10 ... Upper frame board 11 ... lower frame plate, 12 ... side frame plate, 13 ... side frame plate, 101 ... gaming window, 300 ... dish unit, 330 ... operation buttons, 330a to 330c ... push buttons, 381 ... storage unit, 461 ... operation Handle portion, 500 ... Main body frame main body, 510 ... Game board installation recess, 540 ... First side wall, 541 ... Second side wall, 542 ... Third side wall, 543 ... Fourth side wall, 546 ... Rear side Face wall, 599 ... gaming panel, 599e ... opening, 600 ... panel holder, 600a ... holding step, 600b ... through hole, 600j ... mounting hole, 600k ... positioning hole, 601 ... front component, 602 ... outer rail, 603 ... inner rail, 605 ... game area, 635 ... panel Plate, 623 ... Substrate holder for board, 624 ... Main control board box, 640 ... Liquid crystal display device, 640a ... Fixed piece, 640b ... Display side support part, 720 ... Prize ball tank, 740 ... Tank rail member, 800 ... Prize ball Unit: 1000 ... Locking device, 1350 ... Main control board (control board), 1354 ... First decoration control board, 1358 ... Second decoration control board, 1500 ... Attacker unit, 1502 ... First start port, 1506 ... Second start Mouth, 1510 ... Grand prize opening, 1702 ... General prize opening, 1800 ... Symbol display device, 1802 ... First special symbol display, 1804 ... Second special symbol display, 1806 ... Normal symbol display, 1808 ... First special Symbol memory number indicator, 1810 ... Second special symbol memory number indicator, 1812 ... Normal symbol memory number indicator, 1814 ... Round indicator, 1816 ... State Indicator ... 2002 ... Back box, 2004 ... Light emitting ornament, 2006 ... Movable ornament (game device), 2010 ... Storage space, 2012 ... Opening, 2014 ... Rear wall, 2100 ... Decoration member, 2120 ... LED, 2122 ... LED, 2124 ... LED, 2200 ... center movable decorative body, 2202 ... collar, 2300 ... side movable decorative body, 2300L ... left side movable decorative body, 2300R ... right side movable decorative body, 2302 ... side decorative member (movable member) 2304: Side movement mechanism (drive mechanism), 2324 ... Side motor (electric drive source), 2500 ... Main board, 2514 ... Door frame opening switch (door frame opening switch), 2600 ... Peripheral control board (control board) , 2682 ... timer, T ... door picture.

Claims (3)

Lottery means for performing lottery processing based on establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Game control means for performing control related to execution of the jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the lottery processing by the lottery means ;
A game area provided so that a game ball can be divided between a left area and a right area of the center character;
A first receiving port and a second receiving port that are provided in the game area and can receive a game ball ;
The game control means includes
Despite jackpot at the lottery process by the selecting means is elected, the conjunction jackpot gaming are able to form a period that is not executed, the game balls to any one of the first receiving port and the second receiving port A non-execution period control means for allowing the jackpot game to be executed by terminating the period based on the acceptance of the game, and when the game ball is received at the first receiving port, and the second have different execution mode between when the game ball received in the receiving port and have a bonus game execution unit capable of executing the bonus game,
The gaming machine further includes
In the gaming area in which game balls can be divided between the left area and the right area of the center accessory, the game balls divided in the right area of the center accessory are taken into the internal area. Specific receiving device capable of flowing down in the internal region
With
Both the first receiving port and the second receiving port are provided in an internal area of the specific receiving device .   In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
  A lamp device that performs a predetermined light emission effect is further provided.
  A gaming machine characterized by that.   In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
  A speaker device that performs a predetermined sound effect is further provided.
  A gaming machine characterized by that.